Abe Manual

FINANCIAL REPORTING I

Contents

Chapter Title

Introduction to the Study Manual

Unit Specification (Syllabus)

Coverage of the Syllabus by the Manual

i

Page

v

vii

xiii

1

2

3

The Nature and Purpose of Accounting The Scope of Accounting Users of Accounting Information Rules of Accounting (Accounting Standards) Accounting Periods The Main Characteristics of Useful Information The Twelve Traditional Accounting Concepts Important Accounting Terms Different Types of Business Entity Auditing in Business

Final Accounts and Statement of Financial Position Introduction The Trial Balance Trading Account Manufacturing Account Statement of Comprehensive Income Allocation or Appropriation of Net Profit The Nature of a Statement of Financial Position Assets and Liabilities in the Statement of Financial Position Distinction between Capital and Revenue Preparation of Statement of Financial Position

Presentation of Financial Statements Introduction Disclosure of Accounting Policies The Statement of Comprehensive Income Statement of Financial Position IAS 1: Statement of Changes in Equity Summary of Statements Required by IAS 1 Narrative Statements Required in Published Financial Statements Appendix 1: Example of Statement of Accounting Policies (TescoPLC) Appendix 2: Example of Independent Auditors' Report (Tesco PLC) Appendix 3: Example of Directors' Report (Tesco PLC)

1 3 4 6

12 13 16 19 21 23

27 29 29 30 33 36 41 44 47 50 51

57 58 58 58 62 68 69 70 73

81 82

ii

Chapter Title Page

4

5

6

7

8

Profit and Cash Flow Availability of Profits for Distribution Statements of Cash Flows Funds Flow Statements

Valuation of Assets and Inventories Valuation of Inventories The Importance of Inventory Valuation Valuation of Long-Term Contracts Depreciation IAS 38: Intangible Assets IAS 23: Borrowing Costs Leased Assets and IAS 17 IAS 36: Impairment of Assets IAS 40: Investment Properties

Further Accounting Standards and Concepts Introduction IAS 8: Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors IAS 10: Events after the Reporting Date IAS 12: Income Taxes IAS 18: Revenue IAS 20: Accounting for Government Grants IAS 24: Related Party Transactions IAS 33: Earnings Per Share IAS 37: Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets Accounting for Research and Development Expenditure Accounting for Inflation

Assessing Financial Performance Interpretation of Accounts Ratio Analysis Profitability Ratios Liquidity Ratios Efficiency Ratios Capital Structure Ratios Investment Ratios Limitations of Accounting Ratios Worked Examples Issues in Interpretation

Business Funding Capital of an Enterprise Dividends Debentures Types and Sources of Finance Management of Working Capital

85 86 89

101

105 107 113 117 120 125 127 128 130 131

139 141 141

142 145 146 147 148 149 150 153 154

163 165 167 170 172 174 176 177 179 181 188

199 201 208 209 211 216

Chapter Title

iii

Page

9

10

11

12

Financial Reconstruction Introduction Redemption of Shares Accounting Treatment Example of Redemption of Preference Shares Example of Redemption of Ordinary Shares Redemption of Debentures

Group Accounts 1: Regulatory and Accounting Framework Introduction IAS 27: Consolidated and Separate Financial Statements IFRS 3: Business Combinations IAS 28: Investments in Associates IFRS 3: Fair Values in Acquisition Accounting Alternative Methods of Accounting for Group Companies Merger Accounting

Group Accounts 2: The Consolidated Accounts Introduction The Consolidated Statement of Financial Position The Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income Group Accounts – Example

Financial Accounting Examination – The Compulsory Question The Financial Accounting Examination December 2007 Compulsory Question Specimen Examination Compulsory Question

221 222 222 223 224 226 229

233 234 234 236 237 240 241 244

247 248 248 263 271

287 288 289 294

Introduction to the Book

Welcome to this book of Financial Reporting I.

v

The manual has been specially written to assist you in your studies of both undergraduate accountancy

programmes as well as professional examinations,and is designed to meet the learning outcomes listed in

the unit specification. As such, it provides thorough coverage of each subject area and guides you

through the various topics which you will need to understand. However, it is not intended to "stand alone"

as the only source of information in studying the unit. and we set out below some guidance on additional resources which you should use to help in preparing for the examination.

The syllabus from the unit specification is set out on the following pages. This has been approved at level 4 within the UK's Qualifications and Credit Framework. You should readthis syllabus carefully so that you are aware of the key elements of the unit – the learningoutcomes and the assessment criteria. The indicative content provides more detail to definethe scope of the unit.

Following the unit specification is a breakdown of how the manual covers each of thelearning outcomes and assessment criteria.

The main study material then follows in the form of a number of chapters as shown in the contents. Each of these chapters is concerned with one topic area and takes you through allthe key elements of that area, step by step. You should work carefully through each chapterin turn, tackling any questions or activities as they occur, and ensuring that you fullyunderstand everything that has been covered before moving on to the next chapter. You willalso find it very helpful to use the additional resources (see below) to develop yourunderstanding of each topic area when you have completed the chapter.

Additional resources

Additional reading – It is important you do not rely solely on this manual to gain theinformation needed for the examination in this unit. You should, therefore, study someother books to help develop your understanding of the topics under consideration

Newspapers – You should get into the habit of reading the business section of a goodquality newspaper on a regular basis to ensure that you keep up to date with anydevelopments which may be relevant to the subjects in this unit.

Your college tutor – If you are studying through a college, you should use your tutors tohelp with any areas of the syllabus with which you are having difficulty. That is whatthey are there for! Do not be afraid to approach your tutor for this unit to seek clarification on any issue as they will want you to succeed!

Your own personal experience –Examinations are not just about learning lotsof facts, concepts and ideas from the study manual and other books. They are also about how these are applied in the real world and you should always think how thetopics under consideration relate to your own work and to the situation at your ownworkplace and others with which you are familiar. Using your own experience in thisway should help to develop your understanding by appreciating the practical application and significance of what you read, and make your studies relevant to your

vi

personal development at work. It should also provide you with examples which can beused in your examination answers.

And finally …

I hope you enjoy your studies and find them useful not just for preparing for the examination, but also in understanding the modern world of business and in developing in your own job. I wish you every success in your studies.

All our rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval

system or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,recording or otherwise without the prior permission of the author

© Sebastian Fabian Mlingwa CBE 2011

Unit Specification (Syllabus)

vii

The following syllabus – learning objectives, assessment criteria and indicative content – forthis Level 6 unit has been approved by the Qualifications and Credit Framework.

Unit Title: Financial Accounting

Guided Learning Hours: 160

Level: Level 6

Number of Credits: 25

Learning Outcome 1

The learner will: Understand the framework of financial accounting.

Assessment Criteria

The learner can:

1.1 Describe the scope, objectives and main users of financialaccounting information inaccordance with the international framework of the International Accounting Standards Board(IASB).

1.2 Identify the main and sub-characteristics of usefulinformation to users.

1.3 Describe the role and scope ofexternal auditing and internal auditing in business.

Indicative Content

1.1.1 Describe the scope and objectives of financialaccounting.

1.1.2 Describe the main users of accounting informationand their needs in accordance with the internationalframework of the IASB.

1.2.1 Identify and explain the four main characteristicsof useful information to users namely relevance,reliability, understandability and comparability.

1.2.2 Identify and explain the sub-characteristics of the four main characteristics. 1.2.3 Explain the twelve traditional accounting concepts.

1.2.4 Distinguish between capital income andexpenditure, and between revenue income andexpenditure, within financial accounting.

1.3.1 Describe the role and scope of external auditing inbusiness. 1.3.2 Describe the role and scope of internal auditing in business.

1.3.3 Describe the relationship between external andinternal auditing in the context of business. 1.3.4 Identify and explain the differences betweenexternal and internal auditing in the context of business.

viii

Learning Outcome 2

The learner will: Know how to prepare and present the financial statements of companies in accordance with internationally generally accepted accounting practice(IGAAP) under International Financial Reporting Standards.

Assessment Criteria

The learner can:

2.1 Describe the external publication and the elements thatmake up the external financial statements of a company.

2.2 Explain the rules contained in International GAAP in relation toassets, liabilities, income and expenses.

Indicative Content

2.1.1 Describe the external publication of companies’financial statements including:

IAS 1: Presentation of Financial Statements.

IAS 8: Accounting Policies, Changes in AccountingEstimates and Errors.

IAS 10: Events after the Reporting Period.

IAS 33: Earnings per Share.

IAS 24: Related Party Disclosures.

2.1.2 Describe the elements that make up the externalfinancial statements, including: the principal financialstatements, the directors’ report, the corporate governance report and the auditor’s report.

2.2.1 Explain the rules contained in International GAAP in relation to assets including:

IAS 2: Inventories.

IAS 11: Construction Contracts.

IAS 16: Property, Plant and Equipment.

IAS 17: Leases.

IAS 36: Impairment of Assets.

IAS 38: Intangible Assets.

IAS 40: Investment Property.

2.2.2 Explain the rules of the International GAAP in relation to liabilities, including IAS 37: Provisions,Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets.

2.2.3 Explain the rules of the International GAAP inrelation to income, including IAS 18: Revenue 2.2.4 Explain the rules of the International GAAP inrelation to expenses, including:

IAS 12: Income Taxes.

IAS 20: Accounting for Government Grants andDisclosure of Government Assistance.

IAS 23: Borrowing Costs.

Learning Outcome 3

ix

The learner will: Know how to prepare Statements of Comprehensive Income, Statements ofFinancial Position, Statement of Changes in Equity, and Statements ofCash Flows.

Assessment Criteria

The learner can:

3.1 Prepare Statements ofComprehensive Income for agiven company from giveninformation in accordance with International GAAP.

3.2 Prepare Statements ofFinancial Position for a givencompany from given information inaccordance with InternationalGAAP.

3.3 Prepare Statements ofChanges in Equity for a givencompany from given information inaccordance with InternationalGAAP.

3.4 Prepare Statements of CashFlows for a given company fromgiven information in accordancewith International GAAP.

Learning Outcome 4

Indicative Content

3.1.1 Prepare Statements of Comprehensive Income fora given company from given information in accordance with International GAAP.

3.2.1 Prepare Statements of Financial Position for a given company from given information in accordancewith International GAAP.

3.3.1 Prepare Statements of Changes in Equity for agiven company from given information in accordancewith International GAAP.

3.4.1 Prepare Statements of Cash Flows for a givencompany from given information in accordance with International GAAP, including IAS 7: Statement of CashFlows.

The learner will: Know how to analyse and interpret financial statements for a range ofusers.

Assessment Criteria

The learner can:

4.1 Explain the meaning ofperformance, financial status andinvestor ratios.

4.2 Calculate investment ratiosand financial ratios in respect ofperformance and financial statusof an enterprise.

4.3 Interpret the results of theanalysis of financial ratios of performance and financial statusand investor ratios for users offinancial statements.

Indicative Content

4.1.1 Explain the meaning of performance, financial status and investor ratios.

4.2.1 Calculate financial ratios in respect of performanceof a company.

4.2.2 Calculate financial ratios in respect of financialposition of a company. 4.2.3 Calculate ratios of interest to investors andpotential investors in a company.

4.3.1 Analyse and interpret, for users of financial information, the ratios calculated for performance andfinancial status and investor ratios.

4.3.2 Explain the limitations of ratio analysis to users ofthe ratios.

x

Learning Outcome 5

4.3.3 Explain the impact of changing prices on financial statement ratios. 4.3.4 Identify possible methods of adjusting historical financial statements to present more useful informationto users.

The learner will: Know how to prepare and present consolidated financial statements in accordance with IGAAP.

Assessment Criteria

The learner can:

5.1 Describe and explain the contents of IASs in relation to the preparation of consolidatedfinancial statements.

5.2 Prepare consolidated financial

Indicative Content

5.1.1 Describe the contents of IFRS 3: BusinessCombinations and IAS 27: Consolidated and SeparateFinancial Statements. 5.1.2 Explain the concept of control in relation to asubsidiary and holding enterprise.

5.1.3 Explain the principles of consolidation for a singleholding structure. 5.1.4 Explain inter-enterprise items (dividends, inter-enterprise sale, inter-enterprise loans) and theirelimination from the consolidation process.

5.1.5 Explain the treatment of goodwill in consolidationin accordance with IGAAP.

5.2.1 Prepare Consolidated Statements of Financial statements for a holding enterprise Position for a holding enterprise with one subsidiarywith one subsidiary both at theacquisition date and forsubsequent periods.

Learning Outcome 6

both at the acquisition date and for subsequent periods. 5.2.2 Prepare Consolidated Statements ofComprehensive Income for a holding enterprise with one subsidiary both at the acquisition date and forsubsequent periods.

5.2.3 Describe the key characteristics of a firm operatingin a monopolistically competitive market and illustratethe profit maximising price and output position in theshort run and the long run. 5.2.4 Outline the general characteristics of an oligopolyindustry and explain, using diagrams, the profit-maximising price and output position.

The learner will: Understand the capital structure and gearing of a business.

Assessment Criteria

The learner can:

6.1 Explain and appraise thevarious sources of financeavailable to businesses both long-term and short-term.

Indicative Content

6.1.1 Describe the long-term sources of financeavailable in the market place to a business. 6.1.2 Describe the short-term sources of financeavailable to a business.

6.2 Explain the relationship between equity and debt within a business (i.e. the gearing).

6.3 Prepare financial statements ofa business after changes in theirfinancing.

xi

6.1.3 Compare and contrast the effect on a business offinancing long-term and short-term. 6.1.4 Give advice on the financing needs of a givenbusiness to interested parties.

6.1.5 Explain working capital management.

6.2.1 Calculate gearing ratios for a business.

6.2.2 Interpret gearing ratios for users.

6.3.1 Describe the issue of various types of shares and loans. 6.3.2 Describe the redemption of shares and loans.

6.3.3 Prepare a Statement of Financial Position after the issue and redemption of shares and loans.

Coverage of the Syllabus by the Manual

xiii

Learning Outcomes

The learner will:

1. Understand the framework of financial accounting

2. Know how to prepare andpresent the financialstatements of companies in accordance with internationally generallyaccepted accountingpractice (IGAAP) underInternational Financial Reporting Standards

3. Know how to prepare Statements ofComprehensive Income,Statements of FinancialPosition, Statement ofChanges in Equity, andStatements of Cash Flows

Assessment Criteria

The learner can:

1.1 Describe the scope, objectives andmain users of financial accountinginformation in accordance with the international framework of theInternational Accounting StandardsBoard (IASB)

1.2 Identify the main and sub-characteristics of useful information to users

1.3 Describe the role and scope of external auditing and internal auditing inbusiness

2.1 Describe the external publication andthe elements that make up the external financial statements of a company

2.2 Explain the rules contained in International GAAP in relation to assets,liabilities, income and expenses

3.1 Prepare Statements of ComprehensiveIncome for a given company from giveninformation in accordance with International GAAP

3.2 Prepare Statements of FinancialPosition for a given company from giveninformation in accordance with International GAAP

3.3 Prepare Statements of Changes in Equity for a given company from giveninformation in accordance withInternational GAAP

3.4 Prepare Statements of Cash Flows for agiven company from given informationin accordance with International GAAP

Manual

Chapter

Chap 1

Chap 1

Chap 1

Chaps 2 & 3

Chaps 5 & 6

Chap 3

Chap 3

Chap 3

Chap 4

xiv

4. Know how to analyse andinterpret financialstatements for a range ofusers

5. Know how to prepare and

present consolidatedfinancial statements in accordance with IGAAP

6. Understand the capitalstructure and gearing of abusiness

Note about Chapter 12

4.1 Explain the meaning of performance,financial status and investor ratios

4.2 Calculate investment ratios and financial ratios in respect ofperformance and financial status of anenterprise

4.3 Interpret the results of the analysis of financial ratios of performance andfinancial status and investor ratios forusers of financial statements

5.1 Describe and explain the contents of IASs in relation to the preparation ofconsolidated financial statements

5.2 Prepare consolidated financialstatements for a holding enterprise with one subsidiary both at the acquisitiondate and for subsequent periods

6.1 Explain and appraise the various sources of finance available to businesses both long-term and short-term

6.2 Explain the relationship between equityand debt within a business (i.e. thegearing)

6.3 Prepare financial statements of a business after changes in their financing

Chap 7

Chap 7

Chap 7

Chaps 10 &11

Chap 11

Chap 8

Chaps 7 & 8

Chap 9

This chapter does not address any specific Learning Objectives, but is designed to provide practice in tackling the types of question likely to be encountered in the examination for thisUnit.

Chapter 1

The Nature and Purpose of Accounting

Contents

A. The Scope of Accounting

The Purpose of Accounting

Financial Accounting and Management Accounting

Money as the Common Denominator

The Business Entity

B. Users of Accounting Information

Main Categories of Users

Interests of Principal Users

C. Rules of Accounting (Accounting Standards)

International Accounting Standards

Statements of Standard Accounting Practice

D. Accounting Periods

E. The Main Characteristics of Useful Information

Underlying Assumptions Qualitative Characteristics of Financial Statements

F. The Twelve Traditional Accounting Concepts

Prudence

Going Concern Consistency

Money Measurement

Duality

Matching

Cost Materiality

Objectivity

Realisation

Business Entity Concept

1

Page

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

5

6

6

8

12

13

1314

15

16

1616

16

17

17

1717

17

18

18

(Continued over)

2 The Nature and Purpose of Accounting

Separate Valuation

IAS 1: Presentation of Financial Statements

G. Important Accounting Terms

The Accounting Equation or Basic Formula

Assets and Liabilities

Capital v. Revenue Expenditure

H. Different Types of Business Entity

Sole Traders

Partnerships

Limited Companies in the UK

Accounting Differences Between Companies and Unincorporated Businesses

Principle of Limited Liability Promoters and Legal Documents

1818

19

19

19

20

21

21

21

21

22

2223

I. Auditing in Business

What is an Audit?

Types of Audit

23

23

23

Answers to Questions for Practice 25

The Nature and Purpose of Accounting 3

A. THE SCOPE OF ACCOUNTING

The Purpose of Accounting

A business proprietor normally runs a business to make money. He or she needs informationto know whether the business is doing well. The following questions might be asked by theowner of a business:

How much profit or loss has the business made?

How much money do I owe?

Will I have sufficient funds to meet my commitments?

The purpose of conventional business accounting is to provide the answers to such questions by presenting a summary of the transactions of the business in a standard form.

Financial Accounting and Management Accounting

Accounting may be split into Financial Accounting and Management Accounting.

(a) Financial Accounting

Financial accounting comprises two stages:

book-keeping, which is the recording of day-to-day business transactions; and

preparation of accounts, which is the preparation of statements from the book-keeping records; these statements summarise the performance of the business –usually over the period of one year.

(b) Management Accounting

Management accounting is defined by the Chartered Institute of ManagementAccountants (CIMA) as follows:

"The application of professional knowledge and skill in the preparation andpresentation of accounting information in such a way as to assist management in the formulation of policies and in the planning and controlof the operations of the undertaking".

Management accounting, therefore, seeks to provide information which will be used fordecision-making purposes (e.g. pricing, investment), for planning and control.

Money as the Common Denominator

Accounting is concerned with money measurement – it is only concerned with informationwhich can be given a monetary value. We put money values on items such as land, machinery and stock, and this is necessary for comparison purposes. For example, it is not very helpful to say: "Last year we had four machines and 60 items of stock, and this year wehave five machines and 45 items of stock.". It is the money values which are useful to us.

There are, though, limitations to the use of money as the common denominator.

(a) Human Asset and Social Responsibility Accounting

We have seen that accounting includes financial accounting and managementaccounting. Both of these make use of money measurement. However, we may wantfurther information about a business:

Are industrial relations good or bad?

Is staff morale high?

Is the management team effective?


What is the employment policy?

Is there a responsible ecology policy?

These questions will not be answered by conventional business accounting in moneyterms but by "human asset accounting" and "social responsibility accounting". These subjects have not yet been fully developed and are outside the scope of your syllabus.

(b) Devaluation

The value of money does not remain constant, and there is normally some degree ofinflation in the economy. We will look at the steps that have been taken to attempt toadjust accounting statements to the changing value of money later in the course.

The Business Entity

The business as accounting entity refers to the separate identities of the business and itsowners.

Sole Trader

A sole trader is one who carries on business activities on his/her own. He/she is the one who would bear all risk associated with the company and will be rewarded for thework done. The business and the sole trader are considered to be single entity.

Partnership

A partnership is a business run by two or more people together with an intention tomake profit. Profits are usually shared between partners according to the writtenagreement which established the partnership. Partners are normally jointly andindividually liable for the debts and liabilities of the business, so even if you only own1% of the business you will still be responsible for up to 100% of the liability.

Companies

In UK law, a company has a distinct "legal personality". This means that a companymay sue or be sued in its own right. The affairs of the shareholders must be distinguished from the business of the company. The proprietor of a limited company is therefore distinct from the company itself.

We shall return to the issue of business entities later in the chapter.

B. USERS OF ACCOUNTING INFORMATION

We need to prepare accounts in order to "provide a statement that will meet the needs of the user, subject to the requirements of statute and case law and the accounting bodies, andaided by the experience of the reception of past reports".

So if we prepare accounts to meet the needs of the user, who is the user?

Main Categories of Users

The main users of financial accounts are:

Equity investors (shareholders, proprietors, buyers)

Loan creditors (banks and other lenders)

Employees

Analysts/advisers

Business contacts (creditors and debtors, competitors)

The government (The Inland Revenue)

The public

Management (board of directors)


Users can learn a lot about the running of a business entity from the examination of itsaccounts, but each category of user will have its own special perspective. We need to look at some of these in more detail.

Interests of Principal Users

What exactly do each of the users want from the accounts?

Proprietor

The perspective of the business proprietor is explained above (but see below for theinterests of shareholders).

Inland Revenue

The Inland Revenue will use the accounts to determine the liability of the business fortaxation.

Banks and other Lending Institutes

These require to know if the business is likely to be able to repay loans and to pay theinterest charged. But often the final accounts of a business do not tell the lender whathe or she wishes to know. They may be several months old and so not show the up-to-date position. Under these circumstances, the lender will ask for cash flow forecasts toshow what is likely to happen in the business. This illustrates why accountingtechniques have to be flexible and adaptable to meet users' needs.

Creditors and Debtors

These will often keep a close eye on the financial information provided by companies with which they have direct contact through buying and selling, to ensure that their ownbusinesses will not be adversely affected by the financial failure of another. Anindicator of trouble in this area is often information withheld at the proper time, thoughrequired by law. Usually, the longer the silence, the worse the problem becomes.

Competitors

Competitors will compare their own results with those of other businesses. A businesswould not wish to disclose information which would be harmful to its own business: equally, it would not wish to hide anything which would put it above its competitors.

Board of Directors

The board of directors will want up-to-date, in-depth information so that it can draw upplans for the long term, the medium term and the short term, and compare results with its past decisions and forecasts. The board's information will be much more detailedthan that which is published.

Shareholders

Shareholders have invested money in the business and as such are the owners of the business. Normally, the business will be run by a team of managers and theshareholders require the managers to account for their "stewardship" of the business, i.e. the use they have made of the shareholders' funds.

Employees

Employees of the business look for, among other things, security of employment.

Prospective Buyer


A prospective buyer of a business will want to see such information as will satisfy himor her that the asking price is a good investment.

C. RULES OF ACCOUNTING (ACCOUNTING STANDARDS)

As different businesses use different methods of recording transactions, the result might bethat financial accounts for different businesses would be very different in form and content. However, various standards for the preparation of accounts have been developed over theyears in order that users can be assured that the information they show can be relied on. Weshall be looking at the layout of financial accounts later on in the course, but here we are concerned with general underlying rules.

Historically, the Tanzania had its own Accounting Standards – known as Tanzania statements of standard accounting practice (TSSAPs) and Tanzania financial accounting standards (TFASs). However, over a period of time things have changed and, across the whole world, there has been a move to adopt International Accounting Standards. With the adoption of international standards hascome a number of changes in terminology from that traditionally used in Tanzania, and we shalldetail this later in the chapter.

The international regulatory framework is, therefore, gaining in importance and beginning tosupersede the rules and regulations for the preparation of financial accounts in many countries of the world, including the Tanzania. This has been fuelled by the increasingglobalisation of business in the first decade of the 21st century, with global investment inbusiness becoming the norm and investors now requiring comparable information betweenbusiness entities from different countries of the world.

Throughout this manual, therefore, we have adopted the terminology brought in for limitedcompanies by the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) and InternationalAccounting Standards established and maintained by the International Accounting StandardsBoard. These standards are now being used (and sometimes are required) in many parts ofthe world, including Tanzania. However, we are aware that some countries havenot yet adopted the latest standards and you may find many older textbooks which continueto use the old terminology. The principle changes brought in by the latest IFRSs are that:

Profit and Loss Account becomes Statement of Comprehensive Income; and

Balance Sheet becomes Statement of Financial Position.

Cash Flow Statement becomes Statement of Cash Flows


(a) Historical Development

The International Standards Committee (IASC), established in 1973, was originally anindependent private sector body and had no formal authority. It therefore had to rely onpersuasion and the professionalism of others to encourage adoption of theInternational Accounting Standards (IASs) that it issued. The IASC operated under the umbrella of the International Federation of Accountants (IFAC), which is the worldwideorganisation of accountancy bodies and is independent of any country's government. All members of IFAC were originally members of IASC. One of the problems facing the IASC was that it quite often had to issue standards that accommodated two or morealternative acceptable accounting treatments. This situation arose because thesealternative treatments were being practised in countries that were members of the IASC.

In 1995 the IASC entered into an agreement with the International Organisation ofSecurities Commission (IOSCO) (the body representing stock exchanges throughout the world) to produce a core set of accounting standards. These standards were to be


endorsed by IOSCO as an appropriate reporting regime for business entities in the global marketplace for the raising of finance. This deal was to give IASC its muchneeded authority. However, to gain IOSCO's backing the IASC had to agree to a restructuring which occurred in 2000. The core standards were completed in 2000 and adopted by IOSCO in May 2000.

Tanzania decided to adopt wholesale the International Accounting Standards issued by International

Accounting Standards Board with effect from 1st July, 2004.

(b) International Accounting Standards Board (IASB)

The IASC became known as the IASB under the required restructuring in 2000. It is governed by a group of 19 individual trustees, known as the IASC Foundation, withdiverse geographical and functional backgrounds. The current Chair of the trustees is Paul A. Volcker, the former chair of the US Federal Reserve Board. The trustees are responsible for the governance, fundraising and public awareness of the IASB.

The structure under the trustees comprises the IASB as well as an International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) and a Standards AdvisoryCouncil, as shown below.

Structure of the International Regulatory System

IASC Foundation

IASB

IFRIC

SAC

The IASB has 12 full-time members and 2 part-time members all of whom haverelevant technical experience and expertise. The current chair of the IASB is Sir DavidTweedie, who was previously the chair of the UK ASB.

The IASB's sole responsibility is to set International Financial Reporting Standards(IFRSs). (Note that the standards issued by the IASC were known as International Accounting Standards (IASs) and several of these have been adopted by the IASB –see the list of standards later in the chapter). As such it is at the forefront of harmonisation of accounting standards across the world as it pushes for adoption of itsstandards with the help of IOSCO.

Within this manual, we intend to use the international standards. You might, therefore,find it useful to have a look at the IASB web site – www.iasb.co.uk.


Statements of Standard Accounting Practice

Note that, with the issuing of new accounting standards by the IASB (IFRSs), there arecurrently both a number of IFRSs and IASs in force. You do not require a detailedknowledge of all the current standards, but you should be aware of what they cover and webriefly review them here. The standards specifically within the range of the syllabus for thisUnit will be dealt with in detail in later chapters under their own topic headings. (Those notincluded in the syllabus are indicated by ** in the following list.)

International Financial Reporting Standards

IFRS 1: First-time Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards

The objective of this standard is to ensure that an entity's first IFRS financialstatements contain high quality information that is transparent for users andcomparable over time, provides a suitable starting point for accounting under IFRSs and can be generated at a cost that does not exceed the benefits to users.

IFRS 2: Share-based Payment

The objective of this standard is to specify the financial reporting by an entity when itundertakes a share-based transaction. Businesses often grant share options toemployees or other parties and until the issue of this standard there was concern overthe measurement and disclosure of such transactions.

IFRS 3 revised: Business Combinations

IFRS 3 revised governs accounting for all business combinations other than jointventures and a number of other unusual arrangements. We shall cover this in detail inChapter 10.

IFRS 4: Insurance Contracts

The objective of this standard is to specify the financial reporting for insurance contracts issued by an entity. An insurance contract ia a contract under which oneparty, the insurer, accepts significant insurance risk from another party, thepolicyholder, by agreeing to compensate the policyholder if a specified uncertain future event adversely affects the policyholder.

IFRS 5: Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations

The objective of this standard is to specify the accounting for assets held for sale, andfor the presentation and disclosure of discontinued operations.

IFRS 6: Exploration for and evaluation of Mineral Resources

This standard covers the accounting requirements for expenditure incurred in theexploration for and evaluation of mineral resources and whether such expenditure should be regarded as a non-current asset. It also specifies the impairment treatmentfor such expenditure.

IFRS 7: Financial Instruments: Disclosures

This standard is partnered with IAS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation. IFRS 7deals with the disclosures that must be made by a business when it has in issue a financial instrument defined as any contract that gives rise to a financial asset of oneentity and a financial liability or equity instrument of another entity.

IFRS 8: Operating Segments


This is basically a disclosure statement identifying when and how information should bedisclosed in the financial statements in respect of business segments.

IFRS 9: Financial instruments

This standard covers the classification and measurement of financial assets.



We will cover this is some detail in chapter 3. The standard sets out overallrequirements for the presentation of financial statements, guidelines for their structure and minimum requirements for their content. It specifies that a complete set offinancial statements comprises:

– a statement of financial position (balance sheet) at the end of the period

– a statement of comprehensive income (or an income statement and statementshowing other comprehensive income) (profit and loss account)

– a statement of changes in equity for the period

– a statement of cash flows (cash flow statement) for the period

– notes summarising the accounting policies and other explanatory notes

IAS 2: Inventories

We will deal with this in chapter 5. A primary issue in the accounting for inventories is that inventories are valued at lower of cost and net realisable value (NRV). Inventories are assets

– held for sale

– in the process of production for such sale

– in the form of materials or supplies to be consumed in the production process orthe rendering of services.

The standard does not cover construction contracts, which are dealt with under IAS 11.

IAS 7: Cash Flow Statements

We will cover this in chapter 4. The standard deals with the preparation of one of theprimary financial statements as specified by IAS 1.

The primary objective of IAS 7 is

– to ensure that all entities provide information about the historical changes in cashand cash equivalents by means of a statement of cash flows

– to classify cash flows (i.e. inflows and outflows of cash and cash equivalents) during the period between those arising from operating, investing and financingactivities.

IAS 8: Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors

This is dealt with chapter 6. The objective of the standard is to prescribe the criteria forselecting and changing accounting policies, changes in accounting estimates and correction of prior period errors.

IAS 10: Events After the Reporting Period


This is dealt with in chapter 6. The standard deals with events that occur after the dateof the statement of financial position (balance sheet date) and whether these affect thefinancial statements prepared and/or whether information on these events should beprovided in the notes to the accounts.

IAS 11: Construction Contracts

This is dealt with in chapter 5. The primary issue in dealing with construction contractsthat cover more than one accounting period is the allocation of contract revenue and contract costs to the appropriate accounting period.

IAS 12: Income Taxes

Dealt with in chapter 6. Income taxes are all domestic and foreign taxes which arebased on taxable profits. The standard deals with the accounting of both current taxesand deferred taxes.

IAS 16: Property, Plant and Equipment

Dealt with in chapter 5. The principal issues in accounting for property, plant andequipment (tangible fixed assets) are the recognition of the assets, the determination oftheir carrying amounts and the depreciation charges and impairment losses to berecognised in relation to them.

IAS 17: Leases

This forms part of chapter 5. Businesses do not always purchase the fixed assets theyrequire but, rather,; quite often lease them from another party. These leased assets in substance can be used by the business as if they had purchased them and, therefore,the standard details the recognition and accounting for such leased assets. This is anexample of accounting for substance over form.

IAS 18: Revenue

Dealt with in chapter 6. Income, as defined in the Framework for the Preparation andPresentation of Financial Statements (see chapter 3), is increases in economic benefitsduring the accounting period. It further states that income encompasses both revenues and gains. So what is revenue? This standard answers that question and explainshow it should be measured.

IAS 19: Employee Benefits

Many businesses, in addition to wages/salaries, provide further benefits to theiremployees. Such benefits include:

– retirement plans

– insurance plans such as hospital, dental, life and disability insurance

– stock options

– profit sharing plans

– recreational programmes

– vacation schemes, etc.

This standard deals with the accounting for all employee benefits except those dealtwith under a specific standard. The standard requires the recognition of a liability whenan employee has provided service in exchange for employee benefits to be paid in thefuture and the recognition of an expense when the entity consumes the economicbenefit arising from service by an employee in exchange for employee benefit.

IAS 20: Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance


Dealt with in chapter 6. Government grants should be recognised in the statement ofcomprehensive income so as to match the expenditure to which they relate. Capital grants relating to capital expenditure should be credited to revenue over the expected useful economic life of the asset.

IAS 21: The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange

A business may carry on foreign activities in two ways – it may have transactions in foreign currencies or it may have foreign operations. The objective of this standard is to prescribe how to deal with such activities in the financial statements.

IAS 23: Borrowing Costs

Dealt with in chapter 5. Businesses often borrow acquire loans, to purchase assets. Normally the interest costs on such assets should be expensed to the incomestatement in accordance with the matching principle. However, it is possible to putforward an alternative argument that such borrowing costs, the interest, should be capitalised as part of the cost of the asset. This standard deals with the accounting forborrowing costs and whether the alternative treatment can be permitted.

IAS 24: Related Party Disclosures (FRS 8 UK similar, but not identical)

Dealt with in chapter 6. The objective of this standard is to ensure that a business's financial statements contain the disclsoures necessary to draw attention to the possibility that its financial position and profit or loss may have been affected by the existence of related parties and by transactions and outstanding balances with suchparties. This disclsoure is necessary because quite often such transactions would notbe entered into with unrelated parties.

IAS 26: Accounting and Reporting by Retirement Benefit Plans

This standard deals with the preparation of financial statements by retirement benefitplan (pension schemes) entities.

IAS 27: Consolidated and Separate Financial Statements

This forms the basis of chapters 10 and 11 where we deal with the preparation offinancial statements for holding and subsidiary businesses.

IAS 28: Investments in Associates

Again this is dealt with in chapters 10 and 11.

IAS 29: Financial Reporting in Hyperinflationary Economies

In an hyperinflationary economy, financial statements are only useful if they areexpressed in terms of the measuring unit current at the date of the statement offinancial position. Thus, the standard requires restatement of financial statements ofbusinesses operating in an hyperinflationary economy.

IAS 31: Interests in Joint Ventures

IAS 32: Financial Instruments: Presentation

This was superseded by IFRS 7 (effective 2007)

IAS 33: Earnings per Share


Dealt with in chapter 6. This statement specifies the determination and presentation ofthe earnings per share figure/s in the financial statements.

IAS 34: Interim Financial Reporting

IAS 36: Impairment of Assets

Dealt with in chapter 5. The objective of this standard is to prescribe the procedures that a business applies to ensure that its assets are carried at no more than theirrecoverable amount. An asset is carried at more than its recoverable amount if itscarrying value exceeds the amount to be recovered through the use or sale of the asset. If this is the case, the asset is described as impaired and the standard requires the business to recognise an impairmemt loss.

IAS 37: Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets

See chapter 6. The standard deals with the appropriate recognition and measurementof provisions and contingencies. It defines a provision as a liability of uncertain timingor amount.

IAS 38: Intangible Assets

See chapters 5 and 6. The standard only permits the recognition of intangible assets ifcertain criteria are met. An intangible asset is defined as an identifiable non-monetaryasset without physical substance, such as goodwill, research and development costs, broadcasting licences, airline route authority, patents, copyrights, etc.

IAS 39: Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement

IAS 40: Investment Property

See chapter 5. An investment property is property held by a business to earn rentals orfor capital appreciation or both, rather than for use in the production or supply of goods or services. The standard deals with the accounting treatment of such investmentproperties.

IAS 41: Agriculture **

D. ACCOUNTING PERIODS

An owner of a business will require financial information at regular intervals. As we havenoted, he or she will want to be able to check periodically how well or badly the business is doing. Financial accounts are normally prepared on an annual basis, e.g. twelve months tothe 31 March. Preparing accounts on an annual basis facilitates comparisons between oneyear and previous years and assists forecasting the next year. For example, there may beseasonal factors affecting the business, which will even out over the year. An ice-creamvendor will expect to make more sales in the summer months than in the winter months. Hewould not be able to tell if business is improving by looking at accounts for six months ended 31 March 20XX and comparing them with accounts for the six months ended 30 September20XX. True comparison of profit/loss can be gained only when he examines his accounts forthe years (say) 31 March 20X1 and 31 March 20X2.

Accounts normally have to be prepared annually for tax purposes as tax is assessed onprofits of a 12-month accounting period. In the case of limited companies, accounts areprepared annually to the "accounting reference date". It is necessary to calculate annuallythe amount of profit available for distribution to shareholders by way of dividend.


E. THE MAIN CHARACTERISTICS OF USEFUL INFORMATION

A number of attempts have been made since the 1970s to create some form of conceptual framework for financial accounting. The IASBs version, the Framework for the Preparationand Presentation of Financial Statements, was issued in 1989. This document is separatefrom the IASs and IFRSs and basically assembles the body of accounting theory so that standards are formulated on a consistent basis and not in an ad hoc manner. The frameworkhas several sections, but the two we will discuss here are the underlying assumptions in the preparation of financial statements and the qualitative characteristics of such statements.

Underlying Assumptions

These are twofold – accruals and going concern

(a) Accruals

Accruals is taking into account or matching income and expenditure occurring withinan accounting period, whether actual cash is received or paid during the time or not. The reasoning behind the assumption is that profit for the period should represent fairlythe earnings of the time covered and, in view of the dynamic nature of any business, it is unlikely that all invoices will have been paid. However, they should be accounted for to give a true picture.

A distinction is made between the receipt of cash and the right to receive cash, andbetween the payment of cash and the legal obligation to pay cash. The accrualsassumption requires the accountant to include as expenses or income those sumswhich are due and payable.

You need to remember what the following terms mean:

Receipt – the receipt of cash or cheques by the business, normally in return for goods or services rendered. The receipt may relate to another financial period,e.g. it may be for goods sold at the end of the previous period.

Payment – the payment of cash or cheques by the business in return for goods or services received. Again, a payment may be in respect of goods purchased in the previous financial year or a service to be rendered in the future, e.g. rates payable in advance.

Additionally, the term "capital receipt" is used to describe amounts received from thesale of fixed assets or investments, and similarly "capital payment" might relate to anamount paid for the purchase of a fixed (i.e. long-term) asset.

Revenue income – the income which a business earns when it sells its goods. Revenue is recognised when the goods pass to the customer, NOT when the customer pays.

Expenses – these include all resources used up or incurred by a businessduring a financial year irrespective of when they are paid for. They includesalaries, wages, rates, rent, telephone, stationery, etc.

To help you understand the significance of these terms, here are a few examples(financial year ending 31 December):

Telephone bill Tshs.200 paid January Year 2 relating to previous quarter Payment Year 2; Expense Year 1.

Debtors pay Tshs.500 in January Year 2 for goods supplied (sales) in Year 1 Receipt Year 2; Revenue Income Year 1.


Rent paid Tshs.1,000 July Year 1 for the period 1 July Year 1 to 30 June Year 2 Payment Tshs.1,000 Year 1; Expense Year 1 Tshs.500, Expense Year 2 Tshs.500.

In a later chapter we will see how these matters are dealt with in the final accounts.

(b) Going Concern

This assumption infers that the business is going on steadily trading from year to yearwithout reducing its operations.

You can often see if an organisation is in financial trouble, for example if it lacks working capital, and in these circumstances it would not be correct to follow thisconcept. It would probably be better to draw up a statement of affairs, valuing assetson a break-up basis rather than reflecting the business as a going concern (i.e. on the basis of a sudden sale of all the assets, where the sale prices of the assets would beless than on ordinary sale).

Inclusion of other potential liabilities might be necessary to reflect the situation properly– for example, payments on redundancy, pensions accrued, liabilities arising becauseof non-completion of contracts.

Thus, the going concern concept directly influences values, on whatever basis they aremeasured

Qualitative Characteristics of Financial Statements

These characteristics are the attributes that make the information provided useful to users. The IASB state that there are four principal characteristics – understandability, relevance,reliability and comparability. We will deal with each of these in turn.

(a) Understandability

Information provided to users must not be so complex that a user with a reasonable knowledge of business and economic activities and accounting, and a willingness tostudy the information with reasonable diligence, would not be able to understand it. There is a fine balancing act needed here by those preparing financial statements toensure that all information relevant to users is given to them even though it may be complex.

(b) Relevance

To be useful, information must be relevant to the decision-making needs of users. Relevance is closely related to its predictive role – that is the extent to which theinformation helps users to predict the organisation's future and so make decisions about it. For example, the attempt by a potential investor to predict future profitabilityand dividend levels will be at least partly based on the financial statements. A subcharacteristic to relevance is materiality – information is material and therefore relevantif its omission or misstatement could influence the economic decisions of users. Materiality depends of the size of the item or error judged in the particularcircumstances.

(c) Reliability

Information has the quality of reliability when it is free from material error and bias andcan be depended upon by users to represent faithfully that which it either purports torepresent or could reasonably be expected to represent.

There is quite often a conflict between relevant and reliable information. Informationmay be relevant, but so unreliable in nature or representation that its recognition may be potentially misleading. For example, if the validity and amount of a claim for damages under a legal action are disputed, it may be inappropriate for the business torecognise the full amount of the claim in the statement of financial position as this


would provide unreliable information. However, to ensure relevance, it would be appropriate to disclose the amount and circumstances of the claim in a note to the accounts.

Reliable information also requires several sub-characteristics to be present as follows:

Faithful representation – information provided must represent faithfully thosetransactions and other events it purports to represent.

Substance over form – transactions need to be accounted for in accordance withtheir substance not merely their legal form. Substance is not always consistentwith legal form. For example, a business may dispose of an asset to anotherparty in such a way that documentation purports to pass legal ownership to thatparty; nevertheless, though, agreements may exist that ensure that the businesscontinues to enjoy the future economic benefits within the asset. In suchcircumstances a sale would not represent faithfully the transaction entered into. Such agreements are generally referred to as "sale and buy back". Another example of substance over form is a finance lease which we will refer to later.

Neutrality – information must be neutral, that is free from bias and provided in an objective manner. This also ensures that the characteristic of prudence must notoverride all other characteristics

Prudence – as accountants have to contend with the uncertainties that inevitablysurround many events and transactions, then a degree of caution must be brought to bear when making judgements on such events and transactions. Thisdegree of caution is required such that assets or income are not overstated andliabilities or expenses are not understated. For example, when assessing the useful life of plant and equipment, accountants must be cautious in their estimate but not deliberately pessimistic. The exercise of prudence does not allow thecreation of hidden reserves or excessive provisions as this would result in the accounts not being neutral.

Completeness – for information to be reliable it must be complete within thebounds of materiality and cost. An omission can cause information to be false ormisleading and thus unreliable and deficient in terms of its relevance.

(d) Comparability

Users need to be able to compare financial statements of a business through time inorder to identify trends in its financial position and performance. Users also need to beable to compare one business with another and, therefore, the measurement anddisplay of the financial effect of transactions and other events must be carried out in a consistent way for different entities. Thus, we have the need for accounting standardsfrom this characteristic.

In can be quite difficult to ensure that all four main characteristics and their sub-characteristics are applied when preparing financial statements. In practice, a balancing ortrade-off between the characteristics is often necessary. Generally, the aim is to achieve an appropriate balance among the characteristics in order to meet the objectives of financialstatements which is to provide useful information to users.

F. THE TWELVE TRADITIONAL ACCOUNTING CONCEPTS

Over a period of time a number of conventions/concepts have been postulated by various bodies interested in financial statements. Many of these are incorporated in the above


characteristics, but for completeness of your study we provide them here. These conceptsare incorporated by those preparing current financial statements.

Prudence

Prudence is proper caution in measuring profit and income.

Where sales are made for cash, profit and income can be accounted for in full. Where sales are made on a credit basis, however, the question of the certainty of profits or incomes arises. If there is not a good chance of receiving money in full, no sales are made on creditanyway; but if, in the interval between the sale and the receipt of cash, it becomes doubtful that the cash will be received, prudence dictates that a full provision for the sum outstandingshould be made. A provision being an amount which is set aside via the statement ofcomprehensive income (profit and loss account).

The two main aspects of this concept are that:

Income should not be anticipated and all possible losses should be provided for.

The method of valuation of an asset which gives the lesser value should always bechosen.

Prudence is often exercised subjectively on grounds of experience and is likely, in general, to lead to an understatement of profit. The subjectivity involved can lead to variation between accountants in the amount of provision for bad debts, etc. and is bound to create differences between results obtained by the same general method of measurement. Users are thereforeprovided with pictures of various businesses which although apparently comparable, in fact conceal individual distortions.

In long-term credit arrangements, such as hire-purchase agreements, difficulties arise in the actual realisation of income and profit. The date of the sale, whether on a cash or creditbasis, is usually regarded as the date of realisation; but if you have money coming in overtwo or three years, measurement of the actual sum realised is subject to controversy.

Going Concern

As noted above, this concept assumes that the business will carry on its operating activities for the foreseeable future period of time.

Consistency

This is one of the most useful concepts from the point of view of users who need to followaccounting statements through from year to year. Put simply, it involves using unvaryingaccounting treatments from one accounting period to the next – for example, in respect of stock valuation, etc.

You can only identify a trend with certainty if accounts are consistent over long periods;otherwise, the graph of a supposed trend may only reflect a lack of precision or a change ofaccounting policies. However, there will usually be changes or inconsistencies in accountingpolicies over the years and in public accounts it is essential to stress these changes so thatusers can make proper allowance for differences.

Money Measurement

Whether in historic or current terms, money is used as the unit of account to expressinformation on a business and, from analysis of the figures, assumptions can be made by theusers.

As we have seen, though, this concept of a common unit goes only some way towards meeting user needs, though, and further explanation is often needed on non-monetary


requirements – such as the experience of the management team, labour turnover, socialpolicy.

Duality

Each item in a business has two accountancy aspects, reflected in its accounting treatmentas follows:

Double-entry book-keeping requires each transaction to be entered twice – once as adebit and once as a credit. The debit represents an increase in the assets of thecompany or an expense, and the credit entry represents a reduction in the cashbalance to pay for the item, or an increase in the level of credit taken.

The assets of a business are shown in one section of a statement of financial position(balance sheet) and the liabilities in another.

There is little to criticise in this duality, but we are looking behind the framework at theefficiency of the system and judging it by its success in meeting user needs. Duality fallsshort in the same sphere as money measurement, because there are areas in which it is notrelevant.

Matching

Often considered the same as the accruals concept, matching calls for the revenue earned in a period to be linked with related costs. This gives rise to accruals and prepayments whichaccount for the difference between cash flow and profit and loss information. This distinctionwill be clarified when you look at examples later.

Cost

As money is used to record items in the business accounts, each item has a cost.

Accountants determine the value of an asset by reference to its purchase price, not to thevalue of the returns which are expected to be realised. Many problems are raised by this convention, particularly in respect of the effect of inflation upon asset values.

This can also be considered as the historic cost concept.

Materiality

Accounting for every single item individually in the accounts of a multi-million pound concern would not be cost-effective.

A user would gain no benefit from learning that a stock figure of Tshs.200,000 included Tshs.140 work-in-progress as distinct from raw materials. Neither would it make much difference thatproperty cost Tshs.429,872 rather than Tshs.430,000. Indeed, rounded figures give clarity topublished statements. So, when they are preparing financial statements, accountants do not concern themselves with minor items. They attempt rather to prepare clear and sensible accounts.

The concept of materiality leaves accounts open to the charge that they are not strictlyaccurate, but generally the advantages outweigh this shortcoming.

Objectivity

Financial statements should be produced free from bias (not a rosy picture to a potential lender and a poor result for the taxman, for instance). Reports should be capable ofverification – a difficult problem with cash forecasts.


Realisation

Any change in the value of an asset may not be recognised until the moment the firmrealises or disposes of that asset. For example, even if a sale is on credit, we recognise therevenue as soon as the goods are passed to the customer.

However, unrealised gains, such as increases in the value of stock prior to resale, are nowwidely recognised by non-accountants (e.g. bankers) and this can lead to problems with this concept.

Business Entity Concept

The affairs of the business are distinguished from the personal affairs of the owner(s). Thusa separate capital account is maintained in the business books, which records the business's indebtedness to the owner(s).

It is important to draw a clear distinction between the owner of a business and the businessitself. As far as accountancy is concerned, the records of the business are kept with a viewto controlling and recording the affairs of the business and not for any benefit to the owner,although the completed accounts will be presented to the owners for their information.

However, it is sometimes hard to divorce the two interests, especially when you are dealingwith a sole trader, whose affairs are intertwined with the business he/she owns and isoperating. So if, for example, Pauline owns a sweetshop and takes and eats a bar ofchocolate, she is anticipating her profits – as much as she is if she takes a few pence fromthe till to pay for some private purchase – and such activities should be recorded. Her morepersonal affairs, however, such as the cost of food, clothing and heat and light for her privateresidence, must be kept separately from the business records.

When we look at the partnership the distinction becomes a little clearer; and when we look at limited companies, where the owners or shareholders may take no part in running the company and the law gives the company a distinct legal personality of its own, then we havea clear-cut division and it is easy to distinguish owner and business.

Separate Valuation

This concept can be best explained by an example.

Assume that A has sold goods on credit to B worth Tshs.1000. Thus in A's accounts, B shows up as a debtor for Tshs.1000. Meanwhile, B has sold goods on credit to A for Tshs.750. Thus, in A'saccounts, B shows up as a creditor for Tshs.750. No agreement has been made between A andB about setting off one amount against the other. What should we show in the accounts of A in relation to B?

You could argue that we should simply show the net debtor of Tshs.250 as a current asset. However, this would not show the entire picture in relation to A and B and therefore a trueand fair view would not be presented. The traditional concept of separate valuation requiresthat both the debtor and creditor be shown in A's accounts.


This standard requires that financial statements present fairly the financial position, financialperformance and cash flows of an entity. The standard specifies the need to present information in a manner that provides relevant, understandable, comparable and reliableinformation – thus incorporating the four essential characteristics from the Frameworkdocument. The standard also requires the use of going concern, accruals/matching,consistency, materiality, separate valuation, business entity, etc. In other words, IAS 1 ensures that all the four characteristics and the twelve concepts detailed above in sections Eand F must be applied in the preparation of financial statements for users.


G. IMPORTANT ACCOUNTING TERMS

The Accounting Equation or Basic Formula

In any business there are two entities: the business and its owner/s. Capital is provided bythe owners in the form of cash or goods, and this capital is used by the business to acquireassets and finance its operations. When accounts are drawn up, the statement of financial position will show the assets of the business, net of any liabilities not yet settled, balancedagainst the owners' capital. We can, therefore, say that:

Assets Liabilities + Owners' Equity

The owners' equity is what belongs to the owner/s. It is the contribution by the owner/s intothe business to buy assets (where assets are the resources used in the business). If the owner is unable to contribute the whole of the amount required to buy the assets, cash canbe borrowed from outsiders – this being known as liabilities. Should the business ceasethose assets would be used to raise the cash to repay the owners' capital.

This equation is known as the basic formula and you will notice that both sides have equal values. This is because all modern accounting is based on the principle of double entry. This means that every transaction in the accounts must have two entries, a debit entry inone account and a credit in another.

Assets and Liabilities

Assets are the property of the business and include land and buildings, cash, debtors and money in the bank.

Liabilities are what the business owes to outside firms for goods or services supplied,loans made or expenses.

Net assets represent the assets of the business after deducting outstanding liabilities due tothird parties. To calculate the net assets we take the total assets and deduct the liabilities.

You can relate this to your own situation. You probably own various assets – perhaps a flat,a car, and some household effects. At the same time you may well owe money to a creditcard company, the newsagent or a finance company. If you are an employee then youremployer will owe you money by way of salary or wages. When you are in business then thebusiness will owe you money by way of your capital and profits.

The treatment and classification of assets and liabilities in the accounts is of fundamentalimportance:

Assets involve expenditure and are always shown as debit entries in the accounts. There are two main classes of assets:

(i) Non-current assets/Fixed assets, which comprise land and buildings, plant andmachinery, motor vehicles, fixtures and fittings – in fact any assets which are tobe used in the business for a reasonable period of time generally taken to begreater than one year.


(ii) Current assets, which consist of stock for resale, debtors, cash/bank. Currentassets are short-term assets, not intended to be retained in the business for long.

(Note that expenses also involve expenditure and are always shown as debit entries.)

Liabilities consist of money owing for:

(i) Goods purchased on credit

(ii) Expenses owing for items like telephone bills, unpaid garage bills, etc.

(iii) Loans from, say, the bank, building societies, hire purchase, etc.

Capital v. Revenue Expenditure

When assets such as buildings, plant and machinery, motor vehicles, tools, etc. are bought,they are purchased not for resale but for use in running the business. This type of asset isknown as a non-current asset/fixed asset. Non-current assets help to create profit, andexpenditure on them is known as capital expenditure.

As well as the cost of the asset there are additional costs such as carriage on machinery orthe legal costs of acquiring land and buildings. If a prefabricated building is erected, therewould be additional costs such as the materials used (cement and bricks for the foundations), and the labour costs incurred to erect the building. All these costs are includedin the cost of the building and are referred to as capital expenditure. This class ofexpenditure is kept separate from revenue expenditure, which relates to the day-to-dayrunning of the business. Examples of revenue expenditure include expenses such as petrol for the delivery vans, telephone charges for the sales department, etc.

You should have no difficulty in distinguishing between capital and revenue expenditure. Remember that capital is spent to buy fixed assets which are used to create profits, while revenue is spent in the creation of profit. We will remind you of the difference between thesetwo types of expenditure in later chapters.

Effects of not Complying with the Rule

If we include non-current assets in revenue expenditure, we will reduce the profit and at thesame time fail to disclose the non-current assets. This in turn means that any depreciation(see later in course) will not be taken. If we add revenue items in the non-current assets, wehave the opposite effect, i.e. more profit and depreciation incorrectly charged.

The UK Companies Acts include the following directive in relation to published company accounts:

"The balance sheet shall give a true and fair view of the state of affairs as at the end of the financial year. The profit and loss account shall give a true and fairview of the profit or loss of the company for the financial year."

(Note that this quote, from the 1989 Act, uses the old terminology for the statement offinancial position and statement of comprehensive income.)

If we mix capital and revenue expenditure, not only will the accounts be incorrect but they will also contravene the law.


H. DIFFERENT TYPES OF BUSINESS ENTITY

We can now return to the issue of business entities and distinguish them in more sophisticated ways.

Sole Traders

A sole trader is a business person trading on his or her own account. A sole trader bears total responsibility for business debts and, if in difficulty, may even need to sell personalassets to discharge liabilities.

A sole trader is a business which is owned by one person, although we should remember that the business may employ several others. Capital is introduced by the owner and theprofits will be used in two main ways:

As drawings (the proprietor's wages).

As retention of profits which will be used to finance the business in future.

Partnerships

A partnership is a group of people working together with a view to generating a profit. The basic structure of a partnership is governed in the UK by the Partnership Act 1890. Therewill often be a deed of partnership which lays down in writing the rights and responsibilities ofthe individual partners, but there is no legal requirement for any partnership agreement to beput into writing.

There are two types of partnership:

(a) Ordinary or General Partnership

This consists of a group of ordinary partners, each of whom contributes an agreed amount of capital, with each being entitled to participate in the business activity and to share profits within an agreed profit-sharing ratio. Each partner is jointly liable for debtsof the partnership unless there is some written agreement to the contrary. This is themost common form of partnership.

(b) Limited Partnership

This must consist of at least one ordinary partner to take part in the business, and to be fully liable for debts as if it were an ordinary partnership. Some partners are limited partners who may take no part in the business activity and whose liability is limited tothe extent of the capital which they have agreed to put in. Such firms must be registered and are not common.

Limited Companies in the UK

There are four main characteristics which distinguish a limited company:

The legal nature of the business

Statutory rules governing the form and content of published accounts

Separation of ownership from the management of the business

Limited liability of the shareholders

A company is completely separate in law from its shareholders and as such it may be sued in the courts. On its formation the shareholders subscribe for shares in the company in return for money (or money's worth). The shareholders then collectively own the company and areentitled to share in the profits generated by it.

Several types of limited companies exist:


(a) Private companies

These must comprise one or more members (shareholders) and may not offer sharesto the public at large. A private company's name must end with "Limited" or "Ltd".

(b) Public companies

A public company is a company limited by shares which must have at least twomembers and an authorised capital of at least Tshs.50,000, at least one quarter of which must be paid up. There is no maximum number of members prescribed and the company can offer its shares to the public. A public company's name must end with the words "public limited company" or "plc".

(c) Quoted companies

Quoted (listed) companies are those whose shares are bought and sold on a recognised stock exchange. Large organisations may have a full listing on the LondonStock Exchange, whilst smaller firms may be listed on the Alternative Investment Market. The latter was established to provide a market for younger companies which could not afford the costs of a full listing on the Stock Exchange. Quoted companies must be public companies, although not all public companies will have a stockexchange listing.

(d) Unquoted companies

These are companies which do not have a full listing on a recognised stock exchange. An unquoted company may be a private or a public company and some shares may be traded through the Alternative Investment Market.

Accounting Differences Between Companies and Unincorporated Businesses

The following table summarises the main accounting differences between the alternativetypes of business:

Item Sole Traders and Partnerships

Companies

Capital introduced To the capital account As issued share capital

Profits withdrawn by the owners

Profits left in the business

Loans made from outsideinvestors

Principle of Limited Liability

As drawings

In a capital account

As loan accounts

As dividends

As a revenue reserve

As loan accounts

The principle of limited liability means that a member agrees to take shares in a company up to a certain amount, and once he has paid the full price for those shares he is notresponsible for any debts that the company may incur, even if it becomes insolvent within afew months of his becoming a member.

This provides a safeguard against the private personal estate of a member being attached tomake good the company's debts. (Remember sole traders and partners in suchcircumstances can lose the whole of their business and private wealth.)

Promoters and Legal Documents


Promoters are the people who comply with the necessary formalities of company registration. They find directors and shareholders, acquire business assets and negotiate contracts. Theydraw up the memorandum and articles of the new company and register them with theRegistrar of Companies.

The memorandum of association is said to be the "charter" of the company and it muststate the company's objects as well as other details such as its name and address and details of authorised capital.

The articles of association are the internal regulations or by-laws of the company, dealingwith such matters as the issue and forfeiture of shares, procedure at meetings, shareholders'voting powers, appointment, qualification, remuneration and removal of directors.

When the promoters have arranged all the formalities and satisfied themselves that thestatutory regulations have been complied with, they apply for a certificate of incorporationwhich brings the company into existence as a legal being, known as a registered company.

I. AUDITING IN BUSINESS

What is an Audit?

An audit is a process by which an independent suitably qualified third party expresses anopinion on whether a set of financial statements of a business represent a true and fair viewof its financial affairs for an accounting period.

Not all businesses are required to have an audit. In the UK, only large companies and somepublic bodies are required by law to have an audit. So why are small companies,partnerships and sole traders, for example, not audited by law? The answer to this questionis in the very nature of an audit. The audit is a check on the truth and fairness of the financial statements prepared by the management of the organisation for the users. One of the key users of these financial statements, as we saw earlier, is the owners and they need to knowthat the statements have been prepared competently, with integrity and are free frommistakes as best they can be. If the management and the owners are the same people, as isthe case with sole traders, partnerships and generally small companies, then there is noneed for such an audit.

It has been known for those involved in the preparation of financial statements to bend the rules of accounting, as detailed in accounting standards, in order to provide a more favourable picture of the entity. There can be many reasons for them doing this – forexample:

their salary or bonus may be based on the profit figure declared;

they may not wish information that shows a poor liquidity position to be in the publicdomain;

to protect the organisation from liquidation.

You might like to gather information from the internet on the demise of Enron and WorldComto illustrate the above points.

Types of Audit

There are two types of audit – external audit and internal audit.

(a) External audit

An external audit is carried out by persons from outside the organisation who investigate the accounting systems and transactions and ensure, as far as they are


able, that the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with theunderlying books, the law and applicable accounting standards. The external auditorneeds, from his investigation, to place him/herself in a position to express an opinionwhether the financial statements being reported upon show a true and fair view or not. This opinion, if positive, provides considerable reassurance to users of financialstatements, particularly the current shareholders, the owners, that these accounts are reliable.

It is important to identify what an external audit is not. It is not an attempt to find fraud,and it is not a management control. Fraud may be discovered during an audit, and theauditor will usually be well placed to give advice to management about potential improvements in the internal control system, but these benefits are incidental.

(b) Internal audit

Internal audit forms part of the internal management control system of a business. It iscarried out at management discretion and is not imposed by law. Many organisations set up an internal audit function to check on financial records, quality or cost control toensure the organisation achieves the best performance it can. Internal auditors, who do not need to be qualified accountants, report to management not the owners. Thefunctions of internal audit can include:

Ensuring the adequacy of internal controls

Reviewing the reliability of records and books

Preventing fraud, waste and extravagance

Enforcing management decisions

Undertaking ad hoc investigations

Securing the asset base

Substituting for external auditors under their supervision

Undertaking value for money audits

Questions for Practice

As this is the only point in the study manual that we will consider the topic of audit, you mightfind it useful to consider the following two questions. We provide brief answers on the following page, but do try and answer them without looking at these answers.

1. Many companies within the UK have to undergo an external audit by law. Non-statutory audits are quite often undertaken by other organisations, but they are costly. What would persuade a partnership to undergo a non-statutory external audit?

2. What is a qualified audit report? Outline the likely effect on a UK company of such areport.


ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS FOR PRACTICE

1. The following circumstances/issues might persuade a partnership to undergo aexternal audit:

To settle the profit sharing between partners equitably especially if complicated profit sharing arrangements exist

To provide credibility to figures within the financial statements after assetrevaluations or creation of non-purchased goodwill on the death or retirement of apartner, or other change in the partnership arrangement

To support an application to third parties for loan finance

To enhance the credibility of the accounts provided to tax authorities

The need for financial advice from a expert/professional to advance the business

You might well have thought of other reasons as well.

2. A qualified audit report is one in which the auditor has reservations and which have amaterial effect on the financial statements. Circumstances under which a qualifiedaudit report might occur are:

Where there has been limitation on the scope of the audit, and hence anirresolvable uncertainty, which prevents the auditor from forming an opinion, or

Where the auditor is able to form an opinion but, even after negotiation with the directors, disagrees with the financial statements.

The likely effect of a qualified audit report will be to significantly reduce the reliability ofthe financial statements in the eyes of any user of such statements. This may well then impact on the company's ability to raise finance or trade on credit. This could lead to afall in share price and eventual liquidation.

Chapter 2

Final Accounts and Statement of Financial Position

Contents

Introduction

A. The Trial Balance

B. Trading Account

Layout Example

C. Manufacturing Account

Layout

Example

D. Statement of Comprehensive Income

Credits

Debits

Items Requiring Special Attention

Example

E. Allocation or Appropriation of Net Profit

Sole Trader

Partnership

Limited Company

F. The Nature of a Statement of Financial Position

Difference between Trial Balance and Statement of Financial Position Functions of the Statement of Financial Position

Summarised Statement

G. Assets and Liabilities in the Statement of Financial Position

Types of Asset Valuation of Assets

27

Page

29

29

30

3031

32

33

33

36

36

36

37

40

41

41

41

42

44

4546

46

46

4647

(Continued over)

28 Final Accounts and Statement of Financial Position

Order of Assets in the Statement of Financial Position

Liabilities to Proprietors External Liabilities

H. Distinction between Capital and Revenue

Definitions

Capital and Revenue Receipts

484849

50

50

50

I. Preparation of Statement of Financial Position

Sole Trader

Partnership

51

51

52


INTRODUCTION

Final Accounts and Statement of Financial Position 29

Every business, sooner or later, wants to know the result of its trading, i.e. whether a profit has been made or a loss sustained, and whether it is still financially solvent. For this reason,the following accounts must be prepared at the end of the year (or at intervals during the yearif the business so chooses):

(a) Manufacturing Account

This applies only to a manufacturing business, and shows the various costs ofproducing the goods.

(b) Trading Account

The purpose of this account is to calculate the gross profit of a trading business, andthis is done by showing the revenue from the sale of goods, and the cost of acquiringthose goods.

(c) Statement of Comprehensive Income (Profit and Loss Account)

A business has many expenses not directly related to manufacturing or tradingactivities, and these are shown in the statement of comprehensive income or incomestatement. By subtracting them from gross profit, a figure for net profit (or loss) is found. A business selling a service will produce just a statement of comprehensiveincome.

(d) Appropriation Account

A business now has to decide what to do with its net profit. The way in which this profit is distributed (or "appropriated") is shown in the appropriation account. This account is not used in the case of a sole trader, the net profit being transferred to the proprietor's capital account.

(e) Statement of Financial Position (Balance Sheet)

This is a statement of the assets owned by the business, and the liabilities outstanding. It is not strictly an account.

So you can see that we arrive at the results of a firm's trading in two stages. Firstly, from themanufacturing and trading accounts we ascertain gross profit. Secondly, from the statementof comprehensive income we determine net profit. You will often see the manufacturing, trading and statement of comprehensive income presented together and headed simply"Income statement (or statement of comprehensive income) for the year ending ....".

A. THE TRIAL BALANCE

Before drawing up the final accounts and the statement of financial position, it is usual toprepare a list of all the balances in the accounts ledger. This is known as the trial balance.

Each account in the firm's books is balanced off. This means adding up the debit and creditsides and then comparing the totals. If, for example, the debit side adds up to Tshs.500 and the credit side to Tshs.400, then the lesser figure is deducted from the greater figure, and thedifference would be shown as a debit balance and entered into the trial balance (in this caseit would amount to Tshs.100).

Having drawn up the trial balance, and providing that the two sides have similar totals, it is then possible to begin to draw up the final accounts. Remember that even if the trial balancehas similar amounts on both the debit and credit totals, this only proves the arithmeticalaccuracy of the entries in the ledger accounts.

A Typical Trial Balance (Sole Trader)


Capital

Drawings

Trade receivables

Trade payables Provision for doubtful debts

Non-current assets at cost

Depreciation of non-current assets

Inventory (trading)

Telephone expenses Sundries

Cash in hand/bank

Purchases trading inventory

Sales

Wages Insurance

Audit

Motor vehicle expenses

Rent

Salaries (office) Office cleaning

Carriage inwards

Advertising

Commissions paid

Loss on canteen

Debit Tshs.

10,000

20,000

60,000

32,000

3,000

1,000

1,900

55,000

35,000

1,600

3,000

9,000

9,000

12,000 9,000

2,200

5,000

7,000

5,000

Credit Tshs.

84,000

7,000

700

19,000

170,000

280,700 280,700

Note: This model is provided to give you an idea of the layout and of some of the typical items that may be included in a trial balance. There is no need to try and learn where all the items can be found.

B. TRADING ACCOUNT

For the sake of simplicity, we will assume here that the business purchases ready-madegoods and resells them at a profit.

What is gross profit? If I purchase a quantity of seeds for Tshs.10 and sell them for Tshs.15, I havemade a gross profit of Tshs.5. In the trading account we have to collect all those items which aredirectly concerned with the cost or selling price of the goods in which we trade.

Layout

The main items in the trading account are shown in the following model layout. Carriageinwards, i.e. on purchases, and customs duties on purchases, etc. are expenses incidental tothe acquisition by the business of the goods which are intended for resale, and are therefore debited to the trading account.


Sales less Sales returns (Returns inwards)

Turnover

Cost of goods sold:

Tshs. Tsh

s.

Tshs.

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

Opening inventory Purchases

less Returns (Returns outwards)

add Carriage inwards

less Closing inventory

Gross profit (loss)

XXXX XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX XXXX

XXXX

Note how sales returns are deducted from sales, and purchases returns from purchases.

Gross profit may be defined as the excess of the selling price of goods over their costprice, due allowance being made for opening and closing inventories, and for costsincidental in getting the goods into their present condition and location. We will look at thevaluation of inventories in a later chapter.

Example

From the following balances extracted from the books of AB Co. Ltd, prepare a tradingaccount for the year ended 31 December:

Balances at 31 December Year 1

Purchases

Sales

Purchases returns

Sales returns

Inventory as at 1 January

Customs and landing charges (re purchases)

Carriage inwards

Inventory in hand at 31 December was valued at

Tshs.64,971.

Dr Tshs.

140,251

9,471

54,319

2,471

4,391

Cr Tshs.

242,761

4,361

NB These are not all the balances in the books of the company – only those necessary forcompiling the trading account.

As you know that all these items are trading account items, this makes the exercise easy, butremember that in practice the accountant will have to select, out of the various items in thetrial balance, those which are trading account items.


AB Co. Ltd Trading Account for year ended 31 December . . .

Tshs. Tshs.

Sales 242,761

Tshs.

less Returns

Cost of goods sold:

Opening stock

Purchases

less Returns

Customs and landing charges

9,471

140,251

4,361

135,890

2,471

54,319

233,290

Carriage inwards


Gross profit


4,391 142,752

197,071

64,971 132,100

101,190

1. (a) From the following balances extracted from the ledger of H Smith & Co. on 31October, prepare the trading account of the business for the year ended 31October:

Purchases

Sales

Purchases returns

Sales returns

Carriage inwards

Tshs.24,720

Tshs.40,830

Tshs.1,230

Tshs.1,460

Tshs.2,480

Inventory as at 1 November (i.e. beginning of year) Tshs.6,720

Inventory at end of year Tshs.7,630

(b) In what way would the trading account of H Smith & Co. be different if theproprietor, Mr Smith, had withdrawn goods for his own use valued at Tshs.500 sellingprice?

Now check your answers with those provided at the end of the chapter

C. MANUFACTURING ACCOUNT

In dealing with our trading account, we have assumed that the business purchased finished articles and resold them in the same condition, without making any alteration to them. Sucha business is a trading concern only. As you know, many businesses do more than this. They purchase raw materials and convert them into finished articles by a process ofmanufacture. Manufacture involves a number of factors, each contributing its own measure


of cost to the final product when it is ready for the market. A simple trading account wouldnot be appropriate for the purpose of dealing with these various expenses, so we use amanufacturing account.

The primary purpose of the manufacturing account is to arrive at the cost of production ofthe articles produced within a given period. A secondary purpose may be that of arriving at atheoretical profit on manufacturing (manufacturing profit).

The cost of production comprises such factors as raw materials, manufacturing wages, carriage inwards, factory power and fuel, factory rent, rates, insurance, etc. The expensesmust not be debited to the manufacturing account haphazardly; the layout and sequence ofthis account is important.

Layout

The account is built up by stages:

(a) Cost of materials used – i.e. opening inventory of raw materials plus purchases ofraw materials less closing inventory of raw materials.

(b) Carriage inwards, duty, freight, etc. will be added to purchases, while purchases returns will be deducted. The purchases figure will be after deduction of tradediscount.

(c) Direct labour costs – i.e. wages paid to workmen engaged on actual production.

(d) Direct expenses – which are any expenses incurred on actual production.

(e) Prime cost – i.e. the sub-total of (a), (b), (c) and (d).

(f) Factory overheads or indirect expenses associated with production such as factoryrent and rates, salary of works manager, and depreciation of plant, machinery andfactory buildings.

(g) Work in progress at the beginning of the period (added).

(h) Work in progress at the end of period (deducted).

(i) Cost of production – i.e. adjusted total of (g) and (h)

So in outline the layout is:

Direct materials

Direct labour

Direct expenses

PRIME COST

Factory overheads or Indirect expenses

TOTAL PRODUCTION COST

Example

The following is an extract from a trial balance:

Opening inventory of raw materials

Opening inventory of work in

Tshs.

90,000

Tshs.


progress

Returns outwards – raw materials

Purchases – raw materials

Wages direct

Wages indirect

Expenses direct

Carriage inwards – raw materials

Rent factory

Fuel and power

General factory expenses

Opening inventory – finished goods

Sales

The closing inventories are:

Raw materials Tshs.74,000

Work in progress Tshs.68,000

Finished goods Tshs.83,500

75,000

160,000

83,000

65,000

22,000

7,900

25,000

17,370

32,910

97,880

2,500

548,850

We can prepare the manufacturing and trading accounts together as follows:


Manufacturing and Trading Account for ......

Opening inventory of raw materials

Purchases raw materials

less Returns outward

Carriage inwards

less Closing inventory of rawmaterials

Total cost of raw materials

Direct wages

Direct expenses

Prime cost

Indirect expenses:

Wages Fuel & power

General factory expenses

Rent

Opening WIP

less Closing WIP

Total cost of production

Sales

Opening inventory finished goods

Production costs

Tshs.

160,000

(2,500 )

157,500

7,900

83,000

22,000

65,000

17,370

32,910

25,000

97,880

433,680

531,560

Tshs.

90,000

165,400

255,400

(74,000 )

181,400

105,000

286,400

140,280

426,680

75,000

501,680

(68,000 )

433,680

548,850

less Closing inventory finished goods (83,500 ) (448,060 )

Gross trading profit 100,790


D. STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

No business can function without incurring what are known as overhead expenses. Forexample, there are salaries, rent, stationery and other incidentals which must be met out of the gross profit made. In addition, a business may earn a small income quite apart from thegross profit, e.g. dividends and interest on investments.

The purpose of the statement of comprehensive income is to gather together all the revenuecredits and debits of the business (other than those dealt with in the manufacturing and/ortrading account) so that it can be seen whether a net profit has been earned or a net lossincurred for the period covered by the account.

The recommended format is as follows:

ABC LTD Statement of Comprehensive Income for the year ended …

Credits

Revenue

Cost of sales

Gross profit

Distribution costs

Administrative expenses

Profit from operations

Finance costs

Investment income

Profit before tax

Income tax expense

Profit for the year

X

(X )

X

(X )

(X )

X

(X )

X

X

(X )

X

The items appearing as credit in the statement of comprehensive income include:

Gross profit on trading – brought from the trading account.

Discounts received.

Rents received in respect of property let. (If rents are received from the subletting ofpart of the factory premises, the rent of which is debited to the manufacturing account,then these should be credited to manufacturing account. In effect this reduces the rentdebit to that applicable to the portion of the factory premises actually occupied by thebusiness.)

Interest and dividends received in respect of investments owned by the business.

Bad debts recovered.

Other items of profit or gain, other than of a capital nature, including profits on the saleof assets.

Debits

All the overhead expenses of the business are debited to the statement of comprehensiveincome. Items entered as debits in the statement of comprehensive income should be


arranged in a logical and recognisable order. The following subdivisions of overheadexpenses indicate one recommended order (although this is not the only order in use).

(a) Administration Expenses

These cover rent, rates, lighting, heating and repairs etc. of office buildings, directors'remuneration and fees, salaries of managers and clerks, office expenses of varioustypes. In general, all the expenses incurred in the control of the business and thedirection and formulation of its policy.

(b) Sales Expenses

Included in these are travellers' commission, salaries of sales staff, warehouse rent,rates and expenses in respect of the warehouse, advertising, and any expensesconnected with the selling of the goods dealt in, e.g. bad debts.

(c) Distribution Expenses

Here we have cost of carriage outwards. (Remember that carriage inwards, i.e. onpurchases, is debited to the trading account; it is not really an overhead charge as it increases the cost of the purchase.) Under this heading we also have such items asfreight (where goods are sold to customers abroad), expenses of motor vans andwages of the drivers, wages of packers and any other expenses incurred by the distribution or delivery of the goods dealt in.

(d) Financial Expenses

These include bank charges, interest on loans, hire purchase agreements, debentures, mortgages, bank overdrafts, etc.

No capital expense items must be debited to the statement of comprehensive income.This is extremely important. An example of a capital item is the purchase of plant andmachinery by a manufacturing business.

Items Requiring Special Attention

There are several items which do not occur in the normal course of business but which mustbe carefully considered at the end of each trading period.

(a) Bad Debts

If all the trade receivables of a firm paid their accounts, no mention of this item would be made. Unfortunately, however, they do not, and many firms incur what are known as bad debts. For instance, where a debtor is declared a bankrupt, the whole of hisdebt will not be settled. Only a part of it is paid, but as far as the law is concerned, the debt is wiped out. Consequently, the unsettled portion of the debt is of no value, and itmust be written off as a loss. Similarly, if trade receivables disappear, or if their debtsare not worth the trouble of court action, the debts must be written off.

The debtor's account is credited with the amount of bad debt, thus closing the account. To complete the double entry, the bad debts account is debited. All bad debtsincurred during the trading period are debited to the bad debts account.

At the end of the trading period the bad debts account is credited with the total baddebts, to close the account. The double entry is preserved by debiting the statement ofcomprehensive income with the same amount.

Bad debts are sometimes considered to be a financial expense, for they arise from thefinancial policy of selling goods on credit rather than for cash. However, they are moreappropriately classified as a sales expense, as they result directly from sales.

(b) Bank Charges


These are charges made by the firm's bank for working the account of the firm, and are therefore debited to the statement of comprehensive income. Bank charges are afinancial expense.

(c) Debenture Interest

As debenture holders are trade payables of the company, their interest must be paidwhether the company is able to show a profit or not. Therefore it is an expense and, as such, must be debited to the statement of comprehensive income.

Remember the difference between debenture interest and dividends paid. The formeris interest on an outside loan whilst the latter is merely a distribution of profit.

(d) Depreciation

Assets such as plant and machinery, warehouse or factory buildings, delivery vehicles, are used directly in the manufacture of goods or in trading and, as a result of this, theirvalue must decrease owing to wear and tear. This decrease in value must be allowedfor when overhead charges are being debited to the manufacturing, trading orstatement of comprehensive income. We will look at how to estimate the amount to charge each year for depreciation in a later chapter.

Each year the depreciation account will increase in value, until such time as the balance on that account equals the cost price shown in the asset account. At this pointno further deprecation should be charged to the statement of comprehensive income.

Depreciation of such assets as office furniture must also be allowed for in the statementof comprehensive income. Where, however, there is a manufacturing account, thedepreciation of all assets which are actually engaged in production, e.g. plant andmachinery, should be recorded in it, because such depreciation is a manufacturingexpense. Normally the depreciation provision is the last charge to be shown in boththe manufacturing account and the statement of comprehensive income.

Where there is a profit or loss on the disposal of a fixed asset, this is shown in the statement of comprehensive income immediately after the expense of depreciation.

(e) Discount

There are usually two discount accounts, one for discounts received and one fordiscounts allowed. The former is a credit balance and the latter a debit balance. At theend of the trading period, discounts received account is debited and statement ofcomprehensive income credited, as items under this heading are benefits received bythe firm. Discounts allowed account is credited and statement of comprehensiveincome debited, as these items are expenses of the firm. Discounts allowed can beclassed as a financial expense but are more usually shown as a separate item in the statement of comprehensive income.

(f) Dividends Paid (Limited Company Only)

This item, which will appear as a debit balance in the trial balance, represents profitswhich have been distributed amongst the shareholders of the company. It is not,therefore, an expense of the company and must not be debited to the statement ofcomprehensive income. This item must be debited to the appropriation account (seelater). If no profits have been made, no dividends will be paid to shareholders.

(g) Drawings (Partnership or Sole Trader)

The drawings of a partner or sole trader are not expenses of the business and mustnot, therefore, be debited to the statement of comprehensive income. Drawings are the withdrawals of cash or goods or services from the business by the partner or soletrader.

(h) Goodwill


This is an item which often appears as an asset of a business. It is the value attached to the probability that old customers will continue to patronise the firm. Thus, where a company purchases another business, it may pay Tshs.500,000 for assets which areagreed as being worth only Tshs.450,000. The difference of Tshs.50,000 will be the value ofthe goodwill.

In such circumstances, the company might decide to write off the goodwill over anumber of years, say ten years. In this case the statement of comprehensive incomewould be debited annually with Tshs.5,000 and goodwill account credited, until the latter account ceases to exist. Often, however, the firm decides to write off the entire amountof any goodwill immediately.

(i) Preliminary Expenses (Limited Company Only)

These are expenses incurred at the time a limited company is set up, and consistchiefly of legal charges connected with the incorporation of the company. Under theCompanies Act they should be written off immediately.

(j) Provision for Bad Debts

In addition to writing off bad debts as they occur or when they are known to be bad, abusiness should also provide for any losses it may incur in the future as a result of itspresent trade receivables being unable to meet their obligations. If a business has book debts totalling Tshs.100,000, it is not very likely that all those trade receivables willpay their accounts in full. Some of the debts may prove to be bad, but this may not beknown for some considerable time.

The amount of the provision should be determined by a careful examination of the listof trade receivables at the date of the statement of financial position. If any of these debts are bad, they should be written off at once. If any debts are doubtful, it should be estimated how much the debtor is likely to pay. The balance of his debt is potentiallybad, and the provision should be the total of such potentially bad amounts. The debtor's account will not, however, be written off until it is definitely known that it is bad.

The provision is formed for the purpose of reducing the value of trade receivables onthe statement of financial position to an amount which it is expected will be receivedfrom them. It is not an estimate of the bad debts which will arise in the succeedingperiod. Bad debts arising in the next period will result from credit sales made withinthat period as well as from debts outstanding at the beginning of the period. It istherefore quite incorrect to debit bad debts against the provision for bad debts. Oncethe latter account has been opened, the only alteration in it is that required to increaseor decrease its balance – by debit or credit to the statement of comprehensive income. This alteration is included as a financial expense when a debit.

(Never show provision for bad debts with the liabilities on the statement of financial position – it is always deducted from the amount of trade receivables under the assetson the statement of financial position – see later.)

(k) Provision for Discounts Allowable

If a business allows discount to its customers for prompt payment, it is likely that someof the trade receivables at date of the statement of financial position will actually payless than the full amount of their debt. To include trade receivables at the face value ofsuch debts, without providing for discounts which may be claimed, is to overstate the financial position of the business. So, a provision for discounts allowable should be made by debit to statement of comprehensive income. If made on a percentage basis, it should be reckoned in relation to potentially good debts, i.e. trade receivables less provision for bad debts, for if it is thought that a debt is sufficiently doubtful for a provision to be raised against it, it is hardly likely that that debtor will pay his account promptly and claim discount!


The provision appears as a deduction in the statement of financial position from tradereceivables (after the provision for bad debts has been deducted). It is a financial expense.

(l) Expenses Paid in Advance or Arrears (Prepayments and Accruals)

Where a proportion of an expense, such as rent, has been paid in advance (prepaid),this must be allowed for when the statement of comprehensive income is drawn up. For instance, if the firm paid Tshs.10,000 rent for six months from 1 November, and thestatement of comprehensive income is made out for the year ended 31 December, itwould obviously be wrong to debit the statement of comprehensive income with the full amount of Tshs.10,000. Only two months' rent should be debited, i.e. Tshs.3,333.30 and theother four months' rent, i.e. Tshs.6,666.70, should be carried forward and shown in thestatement of financial position as an asset, "Rent paid in advance". These remarksapply equally to any other sum paid in advance, e.g. rates, insurance premiums.

On the other hand, it is often the case that a firm, at the end of the trading period, hasincurred expenses which have not yet been paid (i.e. have accrued). For instance,where rent is not payable in advance, a proportion of the rent for the period may beowing when the statement of comprehensive income is drawn up. How is this to beaccounted for?

Obviously, the statement of comprehensive income will be debited with rent alreadypaid, and it must also be debited with that proportion of the rent which is due butunpaid. Having debited the statement of comprehensive income with this latter proportion, we must credit rent account with it. The rent account will then show a creditbalance and this must appear as a liability on the statement of financial position – it is adebt owing by the business. Then, when this proportion of rent owing is paid, cash will be credited and rent account debited.

The treatment of expenses (or income) paid or received in advance or in arrears is anexample of the accruals concept referred to earlier in the course.

Example

The following balances remain in John Wild's books after preparation of his trading accountfor the year ended 30 June:

Capital

Gross profit

Rates

Insurance

Postage and stationery

Drawings

Electricity

The following notes were available at 30 June:

Rates paid in advance

Tshs.140

Insurance paid in advance

Tshs.150

Electricity account due but

T

s

h

s

.

1

7

0

Dr Tshs.

700

350

270

6,000

800

Cr Tshs.

80,000

10,000

unpaid


Prepare John Wild's statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 30 June.

This would be as follows:

John Wild Statement of Comprehensive Income for the year ended 30 June

Gross profit less Expenses:

Rates (700 - 140)

Insurance (350 - 150)

Postage and stationery

Tshs.

560 200

270

Tshs.

10,000

Electricity (800 + 170)

Net profit

970 2,000

8,000

E. ALLOCATION OR APPROPRIATION OF NET PROFIT

The net profit of a business for any period is the excess of its income (gains and profits) over its expenses and losses. It is quite easily ascertained by deducting the total of the debititems in the statement of comprehensive income from the total of the credit items.

We must now consider how the debit to the statement of comprehensive income for net profit(or credit for net loss) is represented by double entry in the books of the business. Thisdiffers according to the type of ownership of the business.

The three main types of ownership are sole trader, partnership and limited company, and weshall consider the question of net profit in relation to each in turn.

Sole Trader

This is the simplest case of all (illustrated in the previous example) because the net profit,which is debited to statement of comprehensive income, is credited to the capital account ofthe sole trader. The trader may have withdrawn certain amounts during the trading period;the total of the drawings accounts will then be debited to capital account at the end of thetrading period.

Partnership

The allocation of net profit (or loss) in the case of a partnership is not quite as simple. Whenthe partnership commences, a document is usually drawn up setting out the rights and dutiesof all the partners, the amounts of capital to be contributed by each, and the way in which thenet profit or loss is to be shared amongst them.

In the case of a partnership, the statement of comprehensive income is really in two sections. The first section is drawn up as we have seen in this chapter and is debited with the net profitmade (or credited with the net loss). The second section shows how the net profit isallocated to the various partners, and it is referred to as a profit and loss appropriationaccount.

In a partnership, the partners each have two accounts, the capital account (which is kept intact) and the current account. A partner's current account is debited with his drawings, and with his proportion of any loss which the business might sustain. It is credited with the


partner's share of the net profit, and with interest on his capital if this is provided for in the partnership agreement. Thus the capital account of a partner will remain constant, but hiscurrent account will fluctuate year by year.

So the appropriation account is credited with the net profit of the trading period. It is debitedwith any interest on the partners' capitals, where this is provided for in the partnershipagreement, and with any salaries.

Then, when these items have been debited, remaining profit can be divided. The appropriation account will be debited with the shares of the remaining profit which are due to the partners. This will close the statement of comprehensive income, and, to complete thedouble entry, the current account of each partner must be credited with his share of the profit.

Example

Smith, Brown and Robinson are partners who share profits in the proportion of their capitals. Their capitals are Tshs.50,000, Tshs.20,000 and Tshs.10,000 respectively. The net profit for the yearbefore providing for this, or for the following items, is Tshs.71,000. Interest on capital is to beallowed at 5 per cent per annum, and Robinson is to have a partnership salary of Tshs.3,000 per annum. Show how the profit of Tshs.71,000 is allocated.

Profit and Loss Appropriation Account for year ended 31 December . . .

Net profit b/d

Robinson – salary

Interest on capital at 5%:

Smith

Brown

Tshs.

2,500

1,000

Tshs.

71,000

3,000

Thus:

Robinson

Share of profit:

Smith (85 )

Brown (41 )

Robinson (81 )

500 4,000

40,000

16,000

8,000 64,000

71,000

Tshs.

Smith's current account will be credited with (Tshs.2,500 + Tshs.40,000)

Brown's current account will be credited with (Tshs.1,000 + Tshs.16,000)

42,500

17,000 Robinson's current account will be credited with (Tshs.3,000 + Tshs.500 + Tshs.8,000) 11,500

Net profit shown in first part of statement of comprehensive income

Limited Company

71,000

When the net profit has been ascertained, the directors of a company have to decide howmuch they can release as dividends and how much to retain. A limited company distributesits profits by means of dividends on the shares of its capital held by the shareholders. So,where a company declares a dividend of 10 per cent, the holder of each Tshs.1 share will receive10p. Such a dividend would be debited to the appropriation account, together with alldividends paid on other classes of shares.


Directors' fees should be debited to the statement of comprehensive income proper. (If,however, these fees vary according to the amount of net profit paid and have to be passed bythe company in general meeting, they should be kept in suspense until such meeting has taken place. Then they should be debited to the appropriation account, because they are aproportion of the profits due to the directors.)

When dividends and any other items have been debited to the appropriation account, thewhole of the profit may not have been used. The balance remaining is carried forward to theappropriation account of the next trading period.

When a company make a large profit, the directors will often deem it prudent to place aproportion of such profit on one side, instead of distributing it amongst the shareholders. Anaccount is opened to which such sums will be credited, the appropriation account beingdebited. This account is known as a reserve account and contains appropriation from netprofits, accumulating year by year.



2. From the following balances appearing in the ledger of the New Manufacturing Co. on31 December, draw up the statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31December:

Discounts allowed

Discounts received

Gross profit brought down from tradingaccount

Salaries

Bank charges

Sundry office expenses

Rent and rates

Bad debts written off

Carriage outwards

Plant and machinery

Notes:

Tshs.

32

44,261

193

1,361

19,421

937

5,971

50,000

Tshs.

267

127,881

(a) Write off 10 per cent depreciation on plant and machinery.

(b) Rent owing on 31 December amounted to Tshs.2,000.

(c) An insurance premium amounting to Tshs.500 was paid in July in the current year for the year to 30 June of the following year. The Tshs.500 is included in sundry officeexpenses.

Now check your answer with that provided at the end of the chapter

F. THE NATURE OF A STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION

As we have seen, at the end of an accounting period, it is usual to extract a trial balance. From the trial balance are compiled the trading account, manufacturing account (if any),statement of comprehensive income (profit and loss account) and appropriation account. Inpreparing these final accounts, many accounts in the ledger are closed, e.g. sales account is closed by being transferred to the credit of the trading account.

When the final accounts have been prepared, there will still be a number of ledger accountswhich remain open. These open account balances are extracted as a kind of final trial balance, set out in full detail, and this final trial balance is known as the statement of financial position (formerly, balance sheet). A statement of financial position is a statement showingthe assets owned and the liabilities owed by the business on a certain date. It can be ruledin account form, but it is not an account. However, the expression "final accounts" includesthe statement of financial position even though it is not really an account.


Because it is a statement as at a particular date, it is headed:

Name of Firm Statement of Financial Position as at (or as on, or at) date

It is never headed "for the year (or other period) ended ......". This latter type of heading isused for trading accounts and statements of comprehensive income which cover a period oftime.

The statement of financial position may be presented with the assets on one side and the liabilities on the other. An alternative presentation is to show the assets (net) first, with atotal, and then the capital of the business, with its own total, in a vertical format. The vertical format is now the more generally used one.

The recommended format is as follows:

ABC LTD Statement of Financial Position as at 31st December 2010

Assets

Non-current Assets

Intangibles

Property Plant and Equipment

Investments

Current Assets

Inventories

Trade Receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Total Assets

Equity and Liabilities

Capital and reserves

Share capital

Retained Earnings

Other Components of equity

Total Equity

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Difference between Trial Balance and Statement of Financial Position

A trial balance is a list of all the ledger balances, not only assets and liabilities but also gains and losses. A statement of financial position is a list of a part only of the ledgerbalances, i.e. those remaining after the statement of comprehensive income items havebeen dealt with – the assets and liabilities.

A trial balance is prepared before the revenue accounts are compiled. A statement offinancial position is prepared after the revenue accounts have been dealt with.


With the statement of comprehensive income, we actually transfer the gains and lossesappearing in accounts in the books. Because the statement of financial position is astatement and not an account, the accounts for assets and liabilities in the books are notaffected when we draw it up. We do not "transfer" them to the statement of financial position.

Functions of the Statement of Financial Position

(a) Financial Position of Business

The statement of financial position is drawn up in order to give a picture of the financial position of the business. It reveals whether the business is solvent or insolvent. Itshows how much is invested in different forms of property, and how the business is funded.

(b) Arithmetical Accuracy of Accounts

The agreement of the statement of financial position also provides a check on theaccuracy of the revenue accounts in much the same way as the agreement of a trial balance provides evidence of the arithmetical accuracy of the books.

(c) Bridge between Financial Years

The statement of financial position is also a bridge between one financial year and the next. All accounts which remain open after the manufacturing, trading and statement ofcomprehensive income have been prepared are summarised in the statement offinancial position.

Summarised Statement

If we listed each asset, each piece of machinery, each book debt etc. separately, thestatement of financial position would be extremely long. Assets and liabilities are summarised or grouped, therefore, into main classes, and only the total of each type is shown on the statement of financial position. Thus, if our trade receivables are Jones, whoowes us Tshs.10, and Smith, who owes us Tshs.15, we show under current assets:

Trade receivables Tshs.25

Summarisation entails giving as much information in as little space as possible. Style andlayout are important. As an example, assume that office furniture was worth Tshs.2,000 at thebeginning of the year and has since depreciated by Tshs.100. The statement of financial positionwill show:

Statement of Financial Position as at 31 December year 1

Non-current assetsOffice furniture

Balance 1 January

Tshs.

2,000

Tshs.

less Depreciation for year at 5% pa 100 1,900

G. ASSETS AND LIABILITIES IN THE STATEMENT

OFFINANCIAL POSITION

Types of Asset

The key distinction to make is between fixed and current assets.

Non-Current Assets


These are assets which are retained in a business, more or less permanently, for thepurpose of earning revenue only and not for the purposes of sale. Examples are: plant, machinery, land, buildings, vehicles. Some non-current assets are consumed bythe passing of time, e.g. leases, mines. The difference between tangible and intangible assets is discussed later.

Current Assets

Cash and those other assets which have been made or purchased merely to be sold and converted into cash are known as current assets. It is from the turnover of currentassets that a business makes its trading profit. Examples are: inventory in trade, tradereceivables, cash, temporary investments. All such assets are held for a short periodonly, e.g. inventory when sold creates trade receivables, these trade receivables paytheir debts in cash, by means of which more inventory can be acquired. So the circle moves round and current assets are kept constantly moving.

Whether an asset is fixed or current depends entirely upon the kind of business. What is afixed asset in one firm may be a current asset in another. For example, machinery is a fixedasset when held by a firm which manufactures cigarettes but, in the hands of a firm whichsells machinery, it will be a current asset. A motor van will be a fixed asset for a tradesmanwho uses it for delivery but, to a manufacturer of such vans, it will be a current asset, i.e.inventory.

The deciding factor is whether the asset is held merely until a purchaser can be found, orpermanently for use in the business.

However, you must remember that even if an asset is not easily realisable, it may still be acurrent asset, e.g. a debt due from a foreign importer may be hard to realise, owing toexchange restrictions, but it still remains a current asset. (Note also that a "fixed" asset isnot necessarily immovable.)

A further classification of assets may be made to distinguish between tangible and intangible assets.

Assets which can be possessed in a physical sense, e.g. plant, machinery, land andbuildings, are tangible assets. Also included in the category of tangible assets are legal rights against third parties.

On the other hand, assets which cannot be possessed in a physical sense, and whichare not legal rights against external persons, are intangible. Goodwill is perhaps the best example of an intangible asset. It is often a very valuable asset in the case of an old-established business.

Valuation of Assets

Generally speaking, non-current assets represent money which has been spent in the paston items which were intended to be used to earn revenue for the firm. In many cases these non-current assets depreciate over a period of years and may finally have to be scrapped. Therefore, the money spent originally on a fixed asset should be spread out over the numberof years of the estimated life of the asset. An item representing depreciation will be debited to the statement of comprehensive income annually.

Because we deduct the depreciation from the cost of the asset, the fixed asset is shown as adiminishing figure in the statement of financial position each year (unless, of course, there have been additions to the asset during the year). The decrease in the value of the fixedasset is also shown as an expense in the annual statement of comprehensive income.

Remember that not all non-current assets are consumed by the passing of time. Some, infact, may appreciate, e.g. freehold land and buildings. With the rising value of such assets, it


is considered quite correct to revalue them so the statement of financial position shows the correct market value.

Current assets such as inventory are normally held for a relatively short period, i.e. until theycan be realised. Current assets should generally be valued at cost or market price whicheveris lower. This is necessary to ensure that no account is taken of profit until the assets havebeen realised.

Order of Assets in the Statement of Financial Position

The assets in the statement of financial position must be arranged in a clear and logicalorder. The order usually adopted is:

Non-current assets

Current assets

In each group assets are arranged in an order from most fixed to most fluid, thus:

Non-current assets

Goodwill

Patents, trademarks, etc.

Freehold land and buildings

Leasehold land andbuildings

Plant and machinery

Motor vehicles

Furniture and fittings

Long-term investments

Current Assets

Work in progress

Inventory in trade

Trade receivables

Payments in advance

Temporary investments

Bank deposit account

Cash at bank

Cash in hand

A sub-total for each group is extended into the end column of the statement of financial position. The examples which follow later make this clear.

Liabilities to Proprietors

The liability of a business to the proprietor is, in the case of a sole trader, his capital account,i.e. the amount by which the business is indebted to him.

With a partnership, the liabilities to the proprietors are found in the capital accounts andcurrent accounts of the partners. (The current accounts are only liabilities when they arecredit balances. When they are debit balances they appear in the asset section of thestatement of financial position, since debit balances represent debts due from partners.) The balances of these accounts represent the indebtedness of the business to the various partners.

With a limited company, this indebtedness is the amount of the share capital paid up.

The indebtedness of the business to the proprietor(s) cannot, strictly speaking, be classed as a liability. The proprietors of a firm can only withdraw their capital in bulk when the firm is wound up, and even then they must wait until the outside trade payables have been satisfied. When the outside trade payables have been paid out of the proceeds of sale of the assets, itmay be that there is very little left for the proprietors to take.


In some cases the proceeds of sale of the assets are insufficient to pay off the external tradepayables. The proprietors must then provide more funds until the trade payables are satisfied:

A sole trader must contribute funds to pay off remaining outside trade payables, evenif this takes the whole of his private property and investments.

In a partnership, the partners too must make good a deficiency on winding up. Theymust contribute until all the external trade payables are paid, even if this takes the whole of their private means.

A limited liability company is different from either a sole trader or a partnership, since the liability of each proprietor, i.e. shareholder, is restricted to the amount he originallyagreed to contribute. For example, a shareholder has 100 shares of Tshs.1 each in a company, and has paid 75p on each share. He can only be called upon to pay afurther sum of 25p per share (total Tshs.25), if the assets of the company do not realisesufficient to satisfy the external trade payables. In most companies all the shares arefully paid, so the shareholders are not liable for anything further.

External Liabilities

The external liabilities of any firm are those which cannot be described as indebtedness toproprietors. It is possible, however, for a person to be an external creditor and a proprietor. This occurs when a shareholder of a company becomes an ordinary trade creditor of the company in the normal course of business.

We can classify external liabilities in various ways:

(a) Long term or Current Liabilities

Long-term Liabilities

Long-term liabilities are those which would not normally be repaid within 12months.

Current Liabilities (Short-term Liabilities)

Current liabilities consist of current trading debts due for payment in the nearfuture. It is essential that long-term and current liabilities are stated separately inthe statement of financial position, so that shareholders and third parties canjudge whether the current assets are sufficient to meet the current liabilities and also provide sufficient working capital. Current liabilities also include accrued expenses.

(b) Secured and Unsecured Liabilities

Secured Liabilities

Liabilities for which a charge has been given over certain or all of the assets ofthe firm are said to be secured. In such cases the creditor, in default of payment,can exercise his rights against the assets charged, to obtain a remedy. (An assetis "charged" when the creditor gives a loan on condition that he acquires the ownership of the asset if the loan is not repaid by the agreed date. The asset issecurity for the loan.) This is similar to a mortgage on a private house.

Unsecured Liabilities

Such liabilities are not secured by a charge over any of the assets of a firm.

In the event of a winding-up of a business, the secured trade payables aresatisfied out of the proceeds of the asset(s) over which they have a charge. Anysurplus, together with the proceeds of uncharged assets, are reserved to satisfy


first the preferential liabilities (described below) and then the unsecured liabilities. When all these liabilities have been met, the final surplus, if any, is shared by theproprietors.

(c) Preferential Liabilities

On the bankruptcy of a sole trader or partnership, or on the winding-up of a company,certain liabilities enjoy preference over others. These debts are known as preferential liabilities. Examples are unpaid wages and taxation. Preferential liabilities do notconcern us in the preparation of a statement of financial position of a continuingbusiness.

(d) Contingent Liabilities

Liabilities which might arise in the future but which are not represented in the books ofthe firm concerned at the date of drawing up the statement of financial position, are said to be contingent.

An example of a contingent liability is where the firm concerned is involved in a lawaction at the date of the statement of financial position. If there is a possibility thatdamages and/or costs will be awarded against the firm, a note to this effect should be added as a footnote to the statement of financial position.

H. DISTINCTION BETWEEN CAPITAL AND REVENUE

As we mentioned earlier in the course, revenue expenditure constitutes a charge against profits and must be debited to statement of comprehensive income, whereas capital expenditure comprises all expenditure incurred in the purchase of non-current assets for the purpose of earning income, and is shown in the statement of financial position. Failure toobserve the distinction inevitably falsifies the results of the book-keeping. For example, if amotor car were purchased and the cost charged to statement of comprehensive income as motor car expenses, or if a building were sold and the proceeds credited to statement ofcomprehensive income as a trading gain, then both the statement of comprehensive incomeand the statement of financial position would be incorrect. It would not show a true and fairview of the company's trading position.

Definitions

(a) Capital Expenditure

Where expenditure is incurred in acquiring, or increasing the value of, a permanentasset which is frequently or continuously used to earn revenue, it is capital expenditure.

(b) Revenue Expenditure

This represents all other expenditure incurred in running a business, includingexpenditure necessary for maintaining the earning capacity of the business and for the upkeep of non-current assets in a fully efficient state.

It is extremely difficult to lay down a hard and fast rule as to the dividing line which separates capital expenditure and revenue expenditure. For example, if a general dealer bought a motor car, the cost would be debited to capital, whereas if a motor dealer bought the car, thecost would be debited to revenue and/or holding inventory, if not sold during the sameaccounting period as the purchase.

Capital and Revenue Receipts

The division of receipts into capital and revenue items is not nearly as difficult, as the sourcesof receipts are generally far less in number than the types of expenditure.

(a) Capital Receipts


These normally consist of additional payments of capital into the business, andproceeds from the sale of non-current assets.

(b) Revenue Receipts

These comprise all other forms of income, including income from the sale of goods in the ordinary course of trading, interest on investments, rents, commission and discounts.

I. PREPARATION OF STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION

Let's now see how statement of financial position are prepared in practice for sole traders and partnerships. Company statements of financial position follow the same lines, and wewill look at these in the next chapter.

Sole Trader

As an example, the statement of financial position (balance sheet) of J Smith follows.


J. Smith: Statement of Financial Position as at 31 Dec

Tshs. Tshs. Tshs.

Non-current assets

Freehold premises

Fixtures and fittings

Current Assets Trading inventory

Trade receivables 18,960

Cost

21,480

2,000

23,480

11,480

Dep'n

(100 )

(100 )

Net

21,480

1,900

23,380

less Provision for bad debts

Insurance prepaid

Cash

Current Liabilities

Trade payables Accrued expenses

Net current assets

Total assets less current liabilities


Mortgage on freehold

Capital Account Balance brought forward

add Net profit for the year

less Drawings

Partnership

(750 ) 18,210

250

240 30,180

19,490

480 (19,970 )

10,210

33,590

(12,470 )

21,120

18,000

14,010

32,010

(10,890 )

21,120

The main point of difference between the statement of financial position of a sole trader andof a partnership lies in the capital and current accounts. While the sole trader may mergeprofits and losses, drawings, etc. into his capital account, this is not so in a partnership. Current accounts are necessary to record shares of profits and losses, interest on capitals, salaries, drawings, etc. and the final balances only need be shown in the statement offinancial position (balance sheet).

The order of assets and liabilities is generally as shown in the statement of financial positionabove for the sole trader. Current accounts always appear below capital accounts.

The following is a summarised version of the proprietors' interest section of the statement offinancial position of a partnership:


Robinson, Jones and Brown Statement of Financial Position as at 31 October ....

Proprietors' Interest

Capital accounts

Current accounts

Robinson

Tshs.

7,500

2,475

9,975

Jones

Tshs.

5,500

1,965

7,465

Brown

Tshs.

2,500

1,180

3,680

Total

Tshs.

15,500

5,620

21,120

Note that the formats we have used for the presentation of the accounts/financial statementsin this chapter are suitable for the type of business referred to, but when, in later chapters,we deal with large companies who have to report under IGAAP, the format will be slightlydifferent.


3. The following balances remain in William Dean's books after he has completed hisstatement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 May Year 2:

Capital 1 June Year 1

Net profit for year ended 31 May Year 2

Loan from John Dean (repayable in 10 years' time)

Trade payables

Premises

Inventory

Trade receivables

Balance at bank

Cash in hand

Drawings (taken out of business for private use)

Tshs.

110,000

25,000

2,600

1,400

20

10,000

Tshs.

124,000

13,570

9,500

1,950

Set out William Dean's statement of financial position as at 31 May Year 2.




1. (a) H. Smith & Co.Trading Account for year ended 31 October

Tshs. Tshs.

Sales 40,830

Tshs.

less Returns

Cost of goods sold:

Opening inventory

Purchases 24,720

1,460 39,370

6,720

less Returns

Carriage inwards

Closing inventory

Gross profit

(1,230 ) 23,490

2,480

32,690

(7,630 ) (25,060 )

14,310

2.

(b) The profit would be increased by Tshs.500 to Tshs.14,810 because the net sales would be increased to Tshs.39,870 and the drawings account of Mr Smith would be debited by a similar amount, i.e. Tshs.500.

New Manufacturing Company Statement of Comprehensive Income for year ended 31 Dec

Gross profit on trading

Tshs. Tshs.

127,881

Tshs.

Discounts received

Expenses

Rent & rates (19,421 + 2,000)

Salaries

Sundries (1,361 250)

Discounts allowed

Bad debts

Carriage outwards Bank charges

Depreciation on plant and machinery: 10% of Tshs.50,000

Net profit

Notes

21,421

44,261

1,111

32

937

5,971

193

5,000

267 128,148

(78,926 )

49,222

Rent and rates have been increased by Tshs.2,000, this being the amount owing atthe year end.

Sundry office expenses have been reduced by Tshs.250, this being the prepaymentof the insurance premium.

3.


William Dean Statement of Financial Position as at 31 May year 2

Tshs. Tshs.

Non-current assets

Premises 110,000

Current assets

Inventory 25,000

Trade receivables 2,600

Balance at bank 1,400 Cash in hand 20

29,020

less Current Liabilities

Trade payables

Net assets

Long-Term Liabilities

Long-term loan (repayable in 10 years' time)

Financed by: Opening capitaladd Net profit

less Drawings

(1,950 ) 27,070

137,070

(9,500 )

127,570

124,000 13,570

137,570

(10,000 )

127,570

Chapter 3

Presentation of Financial Statements

Contents

Introduction

A. Disclosure of Accounting Policies

B. The Statement of Comprehensive Income Presentation of the Statement of Comprehensive Income Example of Internal and Published Statement of Comprehensive Income

C. Statement of Financial Position Presentation of the Statement of Financial Position Example

D. IAS 1: Statement of Changes in Equity Separate Statement of Other Comprehensive Income Statement of Changes in Equity

E. Summary of Statements Required by IAS 1

F. Narrative Statements Required in Published Financial Statements The Audit Report The Director's Report Corporate Governance Report Other Statements

Appendix 1: Example of Statement of Accounting Policies (Tesco PLC)

Appendix 2: Example of Independent Auditors' Report (Tesco PLC)

Appendix 3: Example of Directors' Report (Tesco PLC)

57

Page

58

58

585860

626266

686869

69

7070707071

73

81

82

58 Presentation of Financial Statements

INTRODUCTION

When a business draws up its own final accounts/financial statements for internal use, it may use any format it likes since there are no rules to prevent such accounts being drafted in the manner most suitable for management.

However, the published accounts of a business must be in accordance with the rules laiddown in the legal framework of the country the business is resident in. They wil also have tocomply with relevant accounting standards (with which we wil deal later).

A. DISCLOSURE OF ACCOUNTING POLICIES

We shall start with the international requirements for the presentation of financial statementsas contained in IASs.

Under IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements, businesses must publish their financial statements every year. The information provided to shareholders (and other interestedparties) would be of little value were there no explanation of the way in which the figures hadbeen compiled. IAS 1 addresses just this area – namely a business's accounting policies.

IAS 1 requires the production of a summary of significant accounting policies in which abusiness must disclose the measurement basis used in preparing the financial statementsand the other accounting policies that are relevant to an understanding of the financial statements. For example, users wil need to be informed whether historical cost, current cost, net realisable value, fair value or recoverable amount has been used as ameasurement basis. They wil need to be informed if borrowing costs have been expensed(see chapter 5) or capitalised as part of a qualifying asset. Policies in respect of goodwil and foreign currency exchange wil need disclosing as well as many others.

Under IAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors, further disclosures must be made in respect of any change in accounting policy, change in an accounting estimate and/or changes arising from the correction of any errors from a priorperiod. (We look at IAS in detail in chapter 6.)

The statements of accounting policies from a business can run into several pages and weinclude an example from Tesco plc here for you to review – see Appendix 1. You may find other examples on the Internet – try searching for the financial statements of an international business that you deal with regularly (such as Microsoft or McDonalds).

B. THE STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

Presentation of the Statement of Comprehensive Income

IAS 1 requires an statement of comprehensive income to be prepared for each period with,as a minimum, the following items included

revenue;

finance costs;

share of profit or loss of associated and joint ventures;

tax expense;

profit or loss attributable to minority holders; and

profit or loss attributable to equity holders.

Presentation of Financial Statements 59

In the appendix to IAS 1 we are presented with a typical income statement as follows:

1. Revenue 2. Cost of sales 3. Gross profit or loss 4. Other income 5. Distribution costs 6. Administrative expenses 7. Other expenses 8. Finance costs 9. Share of profits of associates 10. Profit before tax 11. Income Tax expense 12. Profit or loss for the financial year, attributable to:

Equity holders of the parent Minority interest

Notes

Revenue should be shown and calculated net of trade discounts, VAT and other salestaxes. Notes must show the revenue broken down by classes of business and by geographical markets, having regard to the manner in which the company's activitiesare organised, insofar as these classes and markets differ substantially. Thisadditional information on revenue may be omitted if disclosure would be seriously prejudicial to the company's interests.

Cost of sales, distribution costs and administrative expenses must all be stated aftertaking any provision for depreciation or diminution of asset value into account. (Cost of sales is the direct expenses attributable to bringing the raw materials to the point of sale.)

Dividends paid or payable to shareholders are not shown on the face of the statement of comprehensive income. These are now required to be dealt with in a new statement – "a statement of changes in equity" – as considered later in this chapter.

Note also that extraordinary items do not exist any more according to the IASB. The IASB decided when revising IAS 8 in 2004 that, as extraordinary items (as they werepreviously called) resulted from the normal business risks faced by an entity, they do not warrant presentation in a separate part of the statement of comprehensive income. Thus, these items are now just a subset of items of income and expense. A businesscan, if it wishes, disclose such items in the notes, but not on the face of the statement of comprehensive income.

Final y, here, you should note that earnings per share figures, both basic and diluted, are also disclosed on the face of the income statement, but they do not form part of the income statement. We wil deal with EPS later in the manual, in chapter 6.

We include here Tesco's income statement as an exemplar.


Tesco PLC: Group Statement of Comprehensive Income year ended 24 February 2007

2007 Tshs.m

Continuing operations

2006 Tshs.m

Revenue (sales excluding VAT) Cost of sales

Pensions adjustment – Finance Act 2006 Impairment of the Gerrards Cross site

Gross profit Administrative expenses

Profit arising on property-related items Operating profit Share of post-tax profits of joint ventures and associates

(including Tshs.47m of property-related items (2005/06 – Tshs.nil)

Profit on sale of investments in associates Finance income Finance costs

Profit before tax Taxation Profit for the year from continuing operations

Discontinued operationProfit/(loss) for the year from discontinued operation

Profit for the year

Attributable to: Equity holders of the parent

Minority interests

42,641 (39,401 )

258 (35 )

3,463 (907 )

92 2,648

106 25 90

(216 )

2,653 (772 )

1,881

18

1,899

1,892 7

1,899

39,454 (36,426 )

––

3,028 (825 )

77 2,280

82 –

114 (241 )

2,235 (649 )

1,586

(10 )

1,576

1,570 6

1,576

Earnings per share from continuing and discontinued operations Basic 23.84p 20.07p Diluted Earnings per share from continuing operations Basic Diluted

23.54p

23.61p

23.31p

19.79p

20.20p; 19.92p

Example of Internal and Published Statement of Comprehensive Income

In order to see how one kind of statement of comprehensive income can be changed intoanother, study the example set out over the following pages.


(a) Statement of Comprehensive Income for Internal Distribution

J & K Plastics plc Income Statement for the Year ended 31 December

Net sales less Cost of sales:

Inventory 1 Jan Purchases

Tshs. Tshs.

300,000 1,500,000 1,800,000

Tshs. 1,750,000

Inventory 31 Dec Gross profit Distribution costs:

Salaries & wages Motor vehicle costs General Depreciation: MV Depreciation: Machinery

Administration expenses: Salaries & wages Directors' remuneration Motor vehicles General Auditors Depreciation: Office furniture Depreciation: Office machinery

Other operating income: Rents receivable

40,000 25,000 20,000 7,000 3,000

45,000 22,000 12,000 27,000 4,000 3,000 2,000

(400,000 ) (1,400,000 )

350,000

95,000

115,000 (210,000 )

140,000

9,000

149,000 Income from shares in associated companies Income from shares in non-related companies Other interest receivable

Interest payable: Loans repayable in less than 5 years Loans repayable in less than 10 years

Profit on ordinary activities before taxation Tax on profit on ordinary activities Profit on ordinary activities after tax Undistributed profits brought forward from last year

Transfer to general reserve

3,000 1,500 1,000

5,500 5,000

47,000

5,500 154,500

(10,500 )

144,000 (48,000 )

96,000 45,000

141,000

Proposed ordinary dividend Undistributed profits carried forward to next year

60,000 (107,000 ) 34,000


An appropriate form of published statement is shown below.

(b) Statement of Comprehensive Income for Publication

J & K Plastics plc Statement of Comprehensive Income for the Year ended 31 December

Revenue Cost of sales Gross profit Distribution costs

Tshs.

95,000

Tshs. 1,750,000 (1,400,000 )

350,000

Administration costs

Other income Income from associated interests

Finance costs

Profit before taxation Tax expense Profit for the year after taxation Profit attributable to equity holders

115,000 (210,000 ) 140,000

11,500 3,000

154,500 (10,500 )

144,000 (48,000 )

96,000 96,000

C. STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION

Presentation of the Statement of Financial Position

IAS 1 states that a statement of financial position must be included in the financial statements, but does not give us a prescribed format in the actual standard (only in anappendix to it). It does, however, state the minimum information that must be presented on the face of the statement of financial position in terms of line items for each of the following:

Property, plant and equipment

Investment property

Intangible assets

Financial assets

Investments accounted for using the equity method (see chapters 10 and 11)

Biological assets

Inventories

Trade and other receivables


Trade and other payables

Provisions

Financial liabilities

Liabilities and assets for current tax

Deferred tax liabilities and assets


Minority interests presented within equity (see chapters 10 and 11)

Issues capital and reserves

As an il ustration of this, we present below the statement of financial position of Tesco plc forthe year ended 24 February 2007.


Tesco PLC: Group Statement of Financial Position, as at 24 February 2007

2007 2006

Non-current assets Goodwil and other intangible assets


Investment property

Investments in joint ventures and associates

Other investments

Tshs.m

2,045

16,976

856

314

8

Tshs.m Tshs.m

1,525

15,882

745

476

4

Tshs.m

Deferred tax assets

Current assets

Inventories

Trade and other receivables

Derivative financial instruments

Current tax assets


Non-current assets classified as held for sale and assets of the disposal group

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Financial liabilities:

Borrowings

Derivative financial instruments and other liabilities Current tax liabilities Provisions

Liabilities directly associated with the disposal group

Net current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Financial liabilities

Borrowings

Derivative financial instruments and other liabilities

Post-employment benefit obligations

Other non-current liabilities

Deferred tax liabilities

Provisions

Net assets

Equity

Share capital

Share premium account

Other reserves

Retained earnings

Equity attributable to equity holders of the parent

Minority interests

Total equity

32 20,231

1,931

1,079

108

8

1,042

4,168

408

4,576

(6,046 )

(1,554 )

(87 ) (461 )

(4 )

(8,152 )

–

(8,152 )

(3,576 )

(4,146 )

(399 )

(950 )

(29 )

(535 )

(25 ) (6,084 )

10,571

397 4,376

40

5,693

10,506

65

10,571

12 18,644

1,464

892

70

–

1,325

3,751

168

3,919

(5,083 )

(1,646 )

(239 ) (462 )

(2 )

(7,432 )

(86 )

(7,518 )

(3,599 )

(3,742 )

(294 )

(1,211 )

(29 )

(320 )

(5 ) (5,601 )

9,444

395 3,988

40

4,957

9,380

64

9,444


As you can see from this example, non-current assets, current assets, current liabilities andnon-current liabilities are all sub-totalled and added to give a total for net assets. This net assets figure is then represented by equity in the bottom half of the statement of financial position.

In a simplified form this presentation is as follows:

NET ASSETS

Non-current assets; Intangible assets including goodwil and development Tangible assets: Property plant and equipment Investment property

Deferred tax assets Current assets Inventories Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents Current liabilities Trade and other payables Provisions

Short-term loans and overdrafts Net current assets (current assets less current liabilities) Non-current liabilities Loans

Deferred tax liabilities Total of net assets (non-current assets, plus net current assets, less non-current liabilities)

EQUITY Share capital Share premium account Revaluation reserves Other reserves Retained profits Total of equity attributable to equity holders (the above items totalled) Minority interests Total equity (equity holders' equity plus minority interests – this should equal net assets)

The format for presentation in the appendix to IAS 1 actual y shows both current liabilitiesand non-current liabilities in the bottom half of the statement of financial position. The twohalves of the statement of financial position are retitled "assets" and "equity and liabilities". However, we find the presentation shown above gives better information to users and is the one commonly used by most international businesses. We suggest you use this style in your examinations, but as long as your statement of financial position is in reasonable style you wil not lose presentation marks.


Notes to the statement of financial position are also required under IAS 1. In many cases, these can be very detailed and long, and we would refer you to the notes for Tesco on the Internet that cover almost 50 pages as an exemplar.

Example

The following example shows an acceptable layout of a statement of financial position under IAS 1

J & K Plastics plc Statement of Financial Position as at 31 December

Current year Previous year

Non-current AssetsIntangible assets Tangible assets Investments

Current Assets Inventories Trade and other receivables Cash at bank and in hand

Tshs.

X X X X

X X X X

Tshs.

X X X X

X X X X

Current liabilitiesNet current assets Non-current liabilitiesProvisions for liabilities and charges

Capital and ReservesCalled-up share capital Share premium account Revaluation reserve Other reserves Retained profits

Approved by the Board (date) Names (Directors)

(X )

X (X )

(X )

XXX

X X X X X

XXX

(X ) X

(X ) (X )

XXX

X X X X X

XXX

Note that previous year figures are also shown on the face of a statement of financial position.

An example of two important notes that are usually attached to all statement of financial position follows.


Notes to the Statement of Financial Position

(a) Intangible assets

Cost At 1 Jan Additions Disposals At 31 Dec

Amounts Written off

Impairment At Jan 1 balance Charge for the year, IS etc.

Development costs

Tshs.

X X

(X )

X

X X

Patents &trademarks

Tshs.

X X

(X )

X

X X

Goodwill

Tshs.

X X

(X )

X

X X

Total

Tshs.

X X

(X )

X

X X

Deductions in respect of disposals (X ) (X ) (X ) (X )

At 31 Dec

Net Book Values

At 31 Dec current year

At 31 Dec previous year

(a) Tangible assets

Cost or Valuation At 1 Jan Additions

X

X

X

Land & buildings

Tshs.

X X

X

X

X

Plant & machinery

Tshs.

X X

X

X

X

Vehicles

Tshs.

X X

X

X

X

Total

Tshs.

X X

Revaluations (additional value only) X X X X Disposals At 31 Dec

Depreciation At Jan 1 balance Charge for year IS

(X )

X

X X

(X )

X

X X

(X )

X

X X

(X )

X

X X

Deductions in respect of disposals (X ) (X ) (X ) (X )

At 31 Dec

Net Book Value

At 31 Dec current year

At 31 Dec previous year

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X


D. IAS 1: STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY

This is another primary statement required by IAS 1 as part of a complete set of publishedstatements. This statement has now, as at October 2007, been split into two statements andwe wil deal with each part separately.

Separate Statement of Other Comprehensive Income

This statement encompasses all those other items of income and expense that have not been included in the statement of comprehensive income, including such items asrevaluation of non-current assets and foreign currency exchange differences. Profit for the year is also included.

We present below Tesco's statement of other comprehensive income – just note that they have titled it "statement of recognised income and expense" as it was produced before the change in IAS 1.

Tesco PLC: Group Statement of Recognised Income and Expense, year ended 24 February 2007

(Loss)/gain on revaluation of available-for-sale investments

Foreign currency translation differences Total gain/(loss) on defined benefit pension schemes (Losses)/gains on cash flow hedges: net fair value (Iosses)/gains reclassified and reported in the Income Statement Tax on items taken directly to equity

Net income/(expense) recognised directly in equity Profit for the year

Total recognised income and expense for the year

Attributable to: Equity holders of the parent Minority interests

2007 Tshs.m

(1 )

(65 )

114

(26 )

(12 )

12

22 1,899 1,921

1,920 1

1,921

2006 Tshs.m

2

3

(443 )

44

(5 )

133

(236 )

1,576 1,340

1,327 13

1,340

Statement of Changes in Equity


This statement includes dividends and any issues or redemptions of shares. A typical statement would be as follows:

Share Other Translation Retained Total Minority Equity

Balance 20x1

capital reserves

X X

reserve(foreign

currencies)

(X)

earnings

X X

interest holders

X X

Comprehensiveincome (from abovestatement which wil include profit for the period)

Dividends

Issue of share capital X

X (X) X

(X)

X

(X)

X

X

(X)

X

(X)

Balance 20x2 X X (X) X X X X

E. SUMMARY OF STATEMENTS REQUIRED BY IAS 1

To summarise, a complete set of financial statements published in accordance with IAS 1comprises:

(a) A statement of financial position

(b) A statement of comprehensive income

(c) A statement of other comprehensive income

(d) A statement of changes in equity

(e) A statement of cash flows (see chapter 4)

(f) Notes comprising a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory notes.

Al of these statements need to present fairly the financial position, financial performanceand cash flows of an entity. Fair presentation requires the faithful representation of the effects of transactions, other events and conditions in accordance with the definitions andrecognition criteria for assets, liabilities, income, expenses and equity. These are as follows:

Assets are resources controlled by the entity as a result of past events and from whichfuture economic benefits are expected to flow to the entity.

Liabilities are present obligations of the entity arising from past events, the settlement of which is expected to result in an outflow from the entity of resources embodying economic benefits


Income is the increase in economic benefits during the accounting period in the form of inflows or enhancements of assets or decreases of liabilities that result in increasesin equity, other than those relating to contributions from equity participants.

Expenses are decreases in economic benefits during the accounting period in the form of outflows or depletions of assets or incurrence of liabilities that result indecreases in equity, other than those relating to distributions to equity participants.

Equity is the residual interest in the assets of the entity after deducting all its liabilities

F. NARRATIVE STATEMENTS REQUIRED IN PUBLISHEDFINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Annual reports of businesses also include several narrative reports. Many of these arerequired by the legislation of a particular country or by stock exchange requirements. Weare not going to deal with the plethora of legislation in this area, but we wil consider the following narrative reports;

Audit report (see also chapter 1)

Director's reports

Corporate governance report.

The Audit Report

The auditor's report is made to shareholders and should give a clear opinion on the financial statements. It should also give the reasoning behind that opinion and state how the audit was carried out.

We include in Appendix 2 an example of an unqualified audit report taken from Tesco'sannual report.

When auditors find problems during their audit they do not have the power to insist that financial statements are amended, although many businesses wil amend them to takeaccount of the auditor's findings. What they do have the power to do is to issue a modified or qualified audit report. This modified audit report alerts the shareholders to what they havediscovered and expresses the auditor's opinion on whether this affects the truth and fairnessof the financial statements. Auditors generally consider the issue of a modified report as alast resort.

The Director's Report

This report is generally included in the annual report of a business. Within the United Kingdom it is regulated by law through the Companies Act.

The report is basically designed to provide information that might otherwise be omitted fromthe annual report. We include here, in Appendix 3, an exemplar of a directors' report taken from Tesco's annual report.

Corporate Governance Report

Corporate governance is defined by the Organisation for Economic Co-operation andDevelopment (OECD) as:

"The system by which business corporations are directed and controlled. The corporategovernance structure specifies the distribution of rights and responsibilities among different participants in the corporation, such as the board, managers, shareholders and other stakeholders, and spells out the rules and procedures for making decisions on corporate


affairs. By doing this, it also provides the structure through which the business objectivesare set, and the means of attaining those objectives and monitoring performance."

From the above definition we can see that corporate governance is multi-faceted. It coversprocesses, systems and cultures amongst others, and from the viewpoint of many stakeholders. Corporate governance has come to the fore since the collapse of such companies as Enron and WorldCom.

In 2004, the OECD issued its updated Principles of Corporate Governance and several countries issue their own regulations – for example, as a result of several reports, in the UK there is now a Combined Code on Corporate Governance issued by the Financial Reporting Council (in June 2006).

The OECD sees corporate governance as a key element in improving economic efficiency and growth as well as enhancing investor confidence. Good corporate governance shouldensure that the directors and managers pursue objectives within the business that are in the interests of the business and its stakeholders, not just themselves. The aim of the report isto allow the reader to make a judgement on whether the corporate governance of the business is adequate to achieve this aim. Weak and non-transparent regimes can lead tounethical behaviour in a business and ultimately loss of market integrity.

A Corporate Report wil cover such matters as:

Board composition and independence

Board responsibilities

Board processes and delegation regulations

Appointments to the Board

Determination of executive remuneration

Audit committee

Board performance evaluation

Risk management and internal controls

Relations with stakeholders

Compliance with any codes.

The Tesco corporate report runs to 5 pages so we do not produce it here, but we do adviseyou to go to the Internet and read it or indeed any other corporate report of a largemultinational business.

Other Statements

The subject of reporting to stakeholders and the content of annual reports is ongoing andwithin annual reports you may see examples of the following:

Social and environmental reports

Past trends in key financial figures

Value added statements

Employment reports

Statement of future prospects

Management commentaries

Operating and financial review


As we have stated previously you wil enhance your understanding of this chapter if you access several annual reports that are freely available on the Internet


APPENDIX 1: EXAMPLE OF STATEMENT OF ACCOUNTING POLICIES (TESCO PLC)

The following extract is from Tesco PLC's Annual Report and Financial Statements, 2007 –Note 1 to the Group Financial Statements (pages 48 – 55).


APPENDIX 2: EXAMPLE OF INDEPENDENT AUDITORS' REPORT (TESCO PLC)

The following is an extract from Tesco PLC's Annual Report and Financial Statements, 2007 (page 43).


APPENDIX 3: EXAMPLE OF DIRECTORS' REPORT (TESCO PLC)

The following two pages are an extract from Tesco PLC's Annual Report and Financial Statements, 2007 (pages 21 - 21).

Chapter 4

Profit and Cash Flow

Contents

A. Availability of Profits for Distribution

Legal Definition

Rules Governing Relevant Accounts

Goodwill

Realised and Unrealised Profits

B. Statements of Cash Flows

Purpose Presentation of Statements of Cash Flows

Example

C. Funds Flow Statements

Example Reasons for Change from Funds Flow

Answer to Question for Practice

85

Page

86

86

87

88

88

89

8990

93

101

101101

103

86 Profit and Cash Flow

A. AVAILABILITY OF PROFITS FOR DISTRIBUTION

This section deals with the distribution of profits. The rules and regulations relating to thistopic may well be different in other countries.

There are three overriding principles governing the availability of profits for distribution.

(a) The profits from which the dividend is paid must be bona fide (as we shall see, thisgives companies a wide range of options).

(b) The payment of a dividend must not jeopardise the interests of outside trade payables,i.e. the company must be solvent.

(c) Dividends must never be paid out of shareholders' capital instead it must be paid out ofprofits retained by the company.

If you return to this later after we have considered the legal aspects, you will appreciate thesethree principles further.

Legal Definition

The Companies Act requires that no distribution may be made except out of profits availablefor the purpose. These are defined as: accumulated realised profits, not on a prior occasiondistributed or capitalised, less accumulated realised losses not written off already underreorganisation or reduction of capital. The profits and losses may originally have been revenue or capital based.

A "distribution" is any distribution of a company's assets to its members, by cash orotherwise, other than:

An issue of bonus shares, partly or fully paid.

A redemption of preference shares from the proceeds of a fresh share issue and the payment, from the share premium account, of any premium on redemption.

A reduction of share capital, either by paying off share capital which has been paid up,or by eliminating or reducing a member's liability on partly-paid share capital.

A distribution to members of a company's assets upon winding up.

In addition to satisfying the condition of having profits available for the purpose of distribution, which is all that is required of a private company, a public company must fulfil two otherconditions:

Its net assets must exceed the aggregate of its called-up share capital together with itsundistributable reserves.

Any distribution must not deplete its net assets to such an extent that the total is less than the aggregate of called-up share capital and undistributable reserves.

Called-up share capital

This is defined as "as much of the share capital as equals the aggregate amount of the callsmade on the shares, whether or not the calls have been paid, and any share capital which has been paid up without having been called and share capital to be paid on a specific dateincluded in the articles".

Undistributable reserves

Undistributable reserves are as follows:

Share premium account.

Capital redemption reserve.

Profit and Cash Flow 87

Excess of accumulated unrealised profits, not capitalised before, over accumulated unrealised losses not already written off under reorganisation or reduction of capital. Capitalisation excludes transfers of profit to the capital redemption reserve but includes a bonus issue.

Any other reserve that, for some reason, the company is prohibited from distributing.

Effectively, a public company must make good any existing net unrealised loss before anydistribution.

Example

We can illustrate the differences between private and public companies (figures in Tshs.000) asfollows.

Company A Company B Company C Company D

Tshs.000 Tshs.000 Tshs.000 Tshs.000 Tshs.000 Tshs.000 Tshs.000

Tshs.000

Share capital

Realised profits

2,500

400

2,500

400

2,500

400

2,500

400

Realised losses – 400 – 400 (160 ) 240 (160 ) 240

Unrealised profits 200 200 200 –

Unrealised losses – 200 (250 ) (50 ) (250 ) (50 ) (250 ) (250 )

Share capital and reserves 3,100 2,850 2,690 2,490

Taking the companies A to D as alternatively private and public companies, the distributableprofits are as follows:

Company Private Company

Tshs.000

Public Company

Tshs.000

A

B

C

D

400

400

240

240

400

350

190

0

Rules Governing Relevant Accounts

The information from which to ascertain the profit available for distribution must come from"relevant items" as they appear in "relevant accounts", i.e. profits, losses, assets, liabilities, share capital, distributable and undistributable reserves as they appear in the last annualaudited financial statements or initial statements.

An initial financial statement is where a distribution is proposed during a company's firstaccounting reference period prior to the first annual audited accounts.

An interim financial statement would be used as the basis of calculation if the proposeddistribution would exceed the maximum possible according to the last annual accounts.

As such strict rules govern distributions, equally strict rules must exist with regard to the relevant accounts. The requirements regarding the relevant accounts, as specified in the UKCompanies Acts, are as follows – (a), (b), (e), (f) and (g) not applying to initial or interimaccounts of private companies:


(a) They must be "properly prepared", at least to the extent necessary to enable a decisionto be made as to the legality of the proposed distribution.

(b) The financial statements must give a true and fair view of the affairs of the company, itsprofit or loss, unless the company is eligible by statute not to make disclosure.

(c) A public company must disclose any uncalled share capital as an asset.

(d) To prevent a company making various individually legal distributions which are in aggregate more than is available for distribution, It is obligatory that any furtherproposed distributions are added to those which have already been made and appear in the financial statements.

(e) The annual financial statements must be audited and initial financial statements mustcontain the auditor's opinion as to whether they have been properly prepared. There isno need for interim financial statements to be audited.

(f) Any qualifications made by the auditors must state if and to what extent the legality ofthe proposed distribution is affected.

(g) The statement mentioned in (f) above must be either laid before the company in general meeting or filed with the Registrar, whichever is applicable. In addition, theRegistrar should receive, with any interim or initial financial statements, a copy of them,and a copy of the auditors' report and statement (if there is one).

Goodwill

Goodwill is an asset representing the future economic benefits arising from other assetsacquired in a business combination that are not individually identified and separatelyrecognised. It is calculated as the excess of the consideration transferred over the netassets obtained from the subsidiary, and treated as an intangible non-current asset under IFRS 3 and IAS 38 (see chapter 5).

There may be cases where the cost of the investment is less than the value of net assetspurchased. This could be referred to as negative goodwill. The most likely reason for this toarise is a misstatement of the fair values of assets and liabilities and, accordingly, thestandard requires that the calculation is reviewed.

Any negative goodwill is credited to the statement of comprehensive income

The amortisation of goodwill over its useful economic life has less impact on the possible sums available for distribution – especially if it is written off over, say, 20 years.

Realised and Unrealised Profits

The Companies Act does not actually define either "realised" or "unrealised". However, help is given in the following guidelines:

Unrealised profits may not be used to pay up debentures or amounts unpaid on shares issued.

Provisions are to be "realised" losses except those that account for a drop in the fixedasset value on revaluation.

As regards the difference between depreciation on cost and depreciation on a revalued sum, this is realised profit.

If the directors cannot determine whether a profit or loss made before the appointedday was realised or unrealised, the profit can be taken as realised, and the loss unrealised.

In any other circumstances, best accounting practice rules.

Additional provisions apply to investment and insurance companies.

Unrealised profits may be either capital or revenue.


An unrealised capital profit is not "distributable" and may never be credited to the statementof comprehensive income. If the directors of a company wish its books to record the fact thata fixed asset which cost Tshs.7,500 is now valued at Tshs.10,000, the "appreciation" will be debitedto the asset account, a provision for taxation on the appreciation in value will be credited totaxation equalisation account and the balance credited to capital reserve.

Now, what of an unrealised revenue profit? Suppose that the directors insist that inventory,previously valued at Tshs.16,000 (at lower of cost or market price) shall now be valued atTshs.22,000 (representing selling price). Can they do this, thus increasing the "profit" of the yearby Tshs.6,000?

The answer is that, no matter how imprudent this might be, they can do so, but since the Tshs.6,000 "profit" arises from a "change in the basis of accounting", it must be separately shown, or referred to, in the published accounts; and if, in the opinion of the directors, any ofthe current assets are valued in the statement of financial position above the amount whichthey would realise in the ordinary course of the company's business, the directors must state this fact.

B. STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

Under IAS 7: Statement of Cash Flows all entities must provide information about thehistorical changes in cash and cash equivalents by means of a statement of cash flows,classifying cash flows during the period between those arising from operating, investing andfinancing activities.

Purpose

The statements of comprehensive income and of financial position place little emphasis on cash, and yet enterprises go out of business every day through a shortage of readilyavailable cash. This can happen irrespective of profitability, as cash otherwise availablemay have been overinvested in non-current assets, leaving insufficient cash to maintain thebusiness.

The statement of cash flows will help analysts in making judgements on the amount, timingand degree of certainty of future cash flows by giving an indication of the relationshipbetween profitability and cash generating ability and thus the "quality" of the profit earned.

Looking at the statement of cash flows in conjunction with a statement of financial positionprovides information about liquidity, viability and financial adaptability. The information in the statement of financial position is regularly used to obtain information about liquidity, but as it is only the picture on one day, the liquidity information is incomplete. The statement of cashflows extends liquidity information over the accounting period. However, to give an indicationof future cash flows, the statement of cash flows needs to be studied in conjunction with thestatements of comprehensive income statement and of financial position.

The concentration on cash as opposed to working capital emphasises the pure liquidity of thereporting business. Organisations can have ample working capital but run out of cash, andfail.


Presentation of Statements of Cash Flows

A statement of cash flows prepared under the terms of IAS 7 separates:

Operating activities

Investing activities – covering capital expenditure, acquisitions and disposals, equitydividends paid, interest received, dividends received

Financing activities – covering proceeds from issuing shares, other equity instruments, debentures and other loans, principal lease payments, dividends paid.

Note that interest and taxation paid are treated as part of operating activities.

This combination of three types of cash flows shows the overall movement in cash and cash equivalents. Hence the statement gives an overview of changes in these areas to illustrate the success of management in controlling the different functions.

Briefly, the overall presentation of a statement of cash flows is as follows:

Cash flows from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities

X

X

X

Increase/decrease in net cash and cash equivalents X

Cash and cash equivalents at start of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

X

X

As you can see, the emphasis at the bottom of the statement is on liquidity. The accumulating effect on cash and cash equivalents (which may appear as a separate note) isclearly shown.

Let us look now at the different terms and what they represent.

(a) Operating Activities

Cash flows from operating activities are, in general, the cash effects of transactions and other events relating to operating or trading activities. This can be measured by adirect or indirect method.

Direct Method

The direct method picks up individual categories of cash flow including incomefrom customers, cash paid to suppliers, cash paid to employees and cash paid to meet expenses.

In other words, you will see:

Operating Activities

Cash received from customers Cash payments to suppliers

X (X )

Cash paid to and on behalf of employees (X )

Interest paid

Income taxes paid

Net cash inflow from operating activities

(X )

(X )

X

Any exceptional items should be included within the main categories of thisheading as above and be disclosed in a note to the statement of cash flows.

The use of the direct method is encouraged only where the potential benefits tousers outweigh the costs of providing it.

Indirect Method


Many businesses will not readily have available cash-based records and may prefer the indirect method (which is accruals based) of dealing with operatingactivities. This method is also adopted by IAS 7 as is the direct method.

A typical presentation of the indirect method for operating activities would followthis approach:

Operating Activities

Profit before tax

Adjustments for:

Depreciation

Profit/loss on sale of assets

Interest Amortisation

Increase/decrease in trade receivables

Increase/decrease in inventory

Increase/decrease in trade payables

Cash generated from operations

Interest paid

Income taxes paid

Net cash inflow/outflow from operating activities

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Alternatively, you may well see in practice "Net cash inflow from operatingactivities" in the statement of cash flows with a separate reconciliation as a note to the statement. This reconciliation will be between the operating profit (for non-financial companies, normally profit before interest) reported in the incomestatement and the net cash flow from operating activities. This should, as above,disclose separately the movements in inventories, trade receivables and tradepayables relating to operating activities and other differences between cash flows and profits (e.g. accruals and deferrals).

To illustrate this latter approach, consider the following notes attached to a statement ofcash flows.

Note: Reconciliation of Operating Profit to Net Cash

Inflow from Operating Activities

Operating profit

Depreciation charged

Increase in trade receivables

Increase in trade payables

Increase in inventory Effect of other deferrals and accruals ofoperating activity cash flows

Net cash inflow from operating activities

Tshs.000

100

10

(15 )

5

(90 )

(5 )

5

Although the profit from the income statement is Tshs.100,000, this does not mean that thecompany has received that amount of cash during the year, as profit has been charged


with non-cash items such as depreciation. Therefore, in order to arrive at the "cashflow from operating activities" we have to adjust the operating profit figure for any non-cash items, these being depreciation, amortisation and profit/loss on the sale offixed assets. Depreciation, in the above example, has been deducted in arriving atthe profit figure of Tshs.100,000. So we need to add the Tshs.10,000 depreciation back as itwas just a book entry and did not involve any cash payment.

Now look at the next three items under "operating activities" – trade receivables,trade payables and inventory. We are trying to find the net increase/decrease incash in our statement of cash flows and the first stage of this is finding our "cash flowfrom operating activities". However, some of the profit has not gone into the cash orbank balance but has been ploughed back into inventory. Therefore, we need todeduct any increase in inventory from the operating profit to arrive at the cash flowfigure. Similarly with trade receivables, if the trade receivables figure has increasedthen some of the sales made during the year have not yet generated cash. Anyincrease in trade receivables therefore has to be deducted to arrive at the cash flowfigure. On the other hand, if the trade payables figure has increased then cash has notyet been paid out for some of the purchases which have been deducted in arriving atthe operating profit. Therefore, we need to add back any increase in trade payables. Prepayments and accruals are treated in the same way as trade receivables and tradepayables.

Note that we have started with the figure for profit before tax, i.e. we do not adjust forany provision for tax on this year's profit, as this does not involve the movement ofcash. What we do have to do is to deduct any tax actually paid during the year(normally the tax on the previous year's profits), under the appropriate heading in operating activities, as this reduces our cash flow. Lastly, we need to adjust for interestexpense, so we will need to add back the accrued interest paid and deduct the accruedinterest received. The actual interest paid in cash terms will be shown as a separateline under cash flow from operating activities and the actual interest received in cashterms will be shown under investing activities.

(b) Cash flows from investing activities

Cash inflows from investing activities include:

(i) interest received in cash terms;

(ii) dividends received in cash terms

(iii) cash paid for investments in or loans to other entities

(iv) proceeds from the sale of property, plant and equipment – remember that we have already added back the profit or loss on the sale of these when amendingthe profit figure, so under this heading we need to include the cash we actuallyreceived on the sale.

Cash outflows from investing activities include:

(i) payments made for the purchase of non- current assets such as property, plant and equipment

(ii) payments made for the acquisition of subsidiaries.

(c) Financing Activities

These include as cash inflows:

Proceeds from the issue of share capital or other equity instruments

Proceeds from long term borrowings (issuing debentures, loans, notes andbonds).

And as cash outflows:


Payment of finance lease liabilities – although the interest element of a leasepayment will be entered under interest paid in cash flow from operating activities

Payments to owners to acquire or redeem shares

Repayments of a mounts borrowed other than finance leases

Equity dividends paid

Supplementary notes are essential to explain certain movements. Paramount in these notes are reconciliations of the movements in cash and cash equivalents.

The terms "cash" and "cash equivalents" should perhaps be defined as they excludeoverdrafts which are hardcore in nature.

Cash is defined as cash in hand (including overdrafts) and deposits repayable ondemand with any bank or other financial institution. Cash includes cash in hand anddeposits denominated in foreign currencies.

Cash equivalents are short-term, highly liquid investments which are readilyconvertible into known amounts of cash and which are subject to an insignificant risk ofchanges in value. An investment normally qualifies as a cash equivalent only when it has a short maturity of, say, three months or less from the date of acquisition. Cashequivalents include investments and advances denominated in foreign currencies provided that they fulfil the above criteria.

We shall now take two examples which illustrate different degrees of complexity. We shallwork through the first in full, and the second is presented as a Practical Exercise for you totry and work out for yourself.

Example

This sets out the full specimen statement from IAS 7 in the format for full published accountsusing the indirect method.

Initial Information Relating to XYZ

You are provided with the statements of comprehensive income and of financial position forXYZ, together with the following additional information.

(a) All of the shares of a subsidiary were acquired for 590. The fair values of assets acquired and liabilities assumed were as follows:

Inventories

Accounts receivable

Cash


Trade payables

Long-term debt

100

100

40

650

100

200

(b) 250 was raised from the issue of share capital and a further 250 was raised from long-term borrowings.

(c) Interest expense was 400, of which 170 was paid during the period. Also, 100 relatingto interest expense of the prior period was paid during the period.

(d) Dividends paid were 1,200.


(e) The liability for tax at the beginning and end of the period was 1,000 and 400respectively. During the period, a further 200 tax was provided for. Withholding tax ondividends received amounted to 100.

(f) Interest received during the year was 200 and dividends received during the year was 200. Payments on finance leases totalled 90.

(g) During the period, the group acquired property, plant and equipment with an aggregatecost of 1,250 of which 900 was acquired by means of finance leases. Cash paymentsof 350 were made to purchase property, plant and equipment.

(h) Plant with original cost of 80 and accumulated depreciation of 60 was sold for 20.

(i) Accounts receivable as at the end of 20X2 include 100 of interest receivable.

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income for the period ended 20X2

Sales

Cost of sales

Gross profit

Depreciation

Administrative and selling expenses

Interest expense Investment income

Foreign exchange loss

Profit before taxation

Taxes on income

Profit

30,650

(26,000 )

4,650

(450 )

(910 )

(400 )

500

(40 )

3,350

(300 )

3,050


Consolidated Statement of Financial Position as at end of 20X2

Assets Cash and cash equivalents Accounts receivable

Inventory

Portfolio investments Property plant and equipment at cost

Accumulated depreciation

Property, plant and equipment net

Total assets

Liabilities

Trade payables

Interest payable

Income taxes payable Long-term debt

Total liabilities

Shareholder's Equity

Share capital

Retained earnings

Total shareholders' equity

Total liabilities and shareholders' equity

3,730

(1,450 )

1,500

3,230

20X2

230

1,900

1,000

2,500

2,280

7,910

250

230

400 2,300

3,180

4,730

7,910

1,910

(1,060 )

1,250

1,380

20X1

160

1,200

1.950

2,500

850

6,660

1,890

100

1,000 1,040

4,030

2,630

6,660

The statement of cash flows now follows. Note that it is divided into two main parts:

The statement of cash flows itself

Notes to the statement of cash flows (on the following page).

We have also added some working notes to help explain how the figures are arrived at.


Indirect Method Statement of Cash Flows

Cash flows from operating activities Profit before taxation

Adjustments for:

Depreciation

Foreign exchange loss Investment income

Interest expense

Increase in trade and other receivables

Decrease in inventories

Decrease in trade payables

Cash generated from operations

Interest paid

Income taxes paid

Net cash from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities

Acquisition of subsidiary X net of cash acquired (Note A)

Purchase of property, plant and equipment (Note B) Proceeds from sale of equipment

Interest received

Dividends received

Net cash used in investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities

Proceeds from issue of share capital

Proceeds from long-term borrowings Payment of finance lease liabilities

Dividends paid *

Net cash used in financing activities

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period (Note C)

Cash and cash equivalents at end of period (Note C)

* This could also be shown as an operating cash flow

3,350

450

40

(500 )

400

3,740

(500 )

1,050

(1,740 )

2,550

(270 )

(900 )

(550 )

(350 )

20

200

200

250

250 (90 )

(1,200 )

20X2

1,380

(480 )

(790 )

110

120

230

Notes to the Statement of Cash Flows

A. Acquisition of subsidiary


During the period the Group acquired subsidiary X. The fair value of assets acquired and liabilities assumed were as follows:

Cash

Inventories

Accounts receivable


Trade payables

Long-term debt

Total purchase price

less Cash of X

Cash flow on acquisition net of cash acquired

B. Property, plant and equipment

40

100

100

650

(100 )

(200 )

590

(40 )

550

During the period the Group acquired property, plant and equipment with an aggregatecost of 1,250 of which 900 was acquired by means of finance leases. Cash paymentsof 350 were made to purchase property, plant and equipment.

C. Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents consist of cash on hand and balances with banks, andinvestments in money market instruments. Cash and cash equivalents included in thestatement of cash flows comprise the following amounts from the statement of financial position:

Cash on hand and balances with banks

Short-term investments

Cash and cash equivalents as previously reported

Effect of exchange rate changes

Cash and cash equivalents as restated

20X2

40

190

230

–

230

20X1

25

135

160

(40 )

120

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the period include deposits with banks of 100 held by a subsidiary which are not freely remissible to the holding company because ofcurrency exchange restrictions.

The Group has undrawn borrowing facilities of 2,000 of which 700 may be used only forfuture expansion.

Further working notes

In arriving at the statement of cash flows you will have had to make the following calculations and use the notes given in the additional information at the beginning of the exercise.


Trade and other receivables:

Change on statement of financial position for accounts receivable (1900 – 1200) deduct Subsidiary receivables, as these will form part of the

acquisition under investing activities deduct Interest receivable as shown in investing activities

Inventories:

Change on statement of financial position for inventory(1,000 – 1,950) 950

deduct Subsidiary inventory acquired 100

1,050

Trade payables:

Change on statement of financial position (250 – 1,890) 1,640

deduct Subsidiary trade payables 100

1,740

Interest paid is detailed in additional information note (c)

Taxation paid:

Opening balance of tax (see note (e)) 1,000

Tax provided in income statement 300

1,300

Closing balance of tax 400

Therefore, cash paid in respect of tax 900

Acquisition of subsidiary:

700

100

100

500

Acquisition cost was 590 (note (a)), but this included 40 cash, thus actual figure is 550

Purchase of property, plant and equipment:

This is actually provided at note (f), but we can calculate the figure from otherinformation given as follows:

Opening cost as per statement offinancial position add Subsidiary assets acquired

add Finance lease (note (g))

deduct Sale of plant (note (h))

Closing cost as per statement offinancial position

Therefore, purchase

1,910 650

2,560

900

3,460

80

3,380

3,730

350

Proceeds from sale of equipment is given in note (h)

Interest received and dividends received are given in note (f)


The proceeds from the issue of share capital and long term borrowings are given in note (b). The share capital can in fact be easily calculated from the statement offinancial position changes.

Details of the finance lease payments and dividends paid are given in notes (f) and (d)respectively.

As you can see from this exercise, to prepare a statement of cash flows we need the provision of other information which is not shown in the statements of comprehensive incomeor of financial position.

Question for Practice

Now see if you can work the next example out for yourself.

The following information relates to Peak Ltd.:

Statement of Financial Position as at 31 December 20X5

Property, plant and equipment nbv Buildings

Other

Investments

Current assets:

Inventory

Debtors

Bank

31.12.20X5

624,500

102,300

142,000 868,800

83,400

48,750

132,150

31.12.20X4

543,100

93,450

56,000 692,550

82,400

54,300

1,100

137,800

Current liabilities falling due within one year:

Trade creditors 35,480 63,470

Taxation

Dividends Bank

Net current assets


12,500

38,000 10,500

96,480

35,670

904,470

10,500

35,000

108,970

28,830

721,380

Non-current liabilities due after one year:

5% Debentures

Net assets

Capital reserves

Ordinary Tshs.1 shares


Revaluation reserve

Retained profits

150,000

754,470

620,000

40,000

70,000

24,470

754,470

45,000

676,380

600,000

50,000

26,380

676,380


Statement of Comprehensive Income for the year ended 31 December 20X5

Profit before tax

Taxation

Profit after tax

Dividends

Retained profit for the year

Retained profit b/f 1 January

Retained profit at 31 December

The following additional information is available:

20X5

Tshs.

48,590

12,500

36,090

38,000

(1,910 )

26,380

24,470

20X4

Tshs.

65,600

10,500

55,100

35,000

20,100

6,280

26,380

A market issue of shares was made on 1 January 20X5.

During 20X5, equipment originally purchased at Tshs.65,200 was sold for Tshs.17,900, accumulated depreciation being Tshs.37,700. The difference on disposal had been takento the statement of comprehensive income.

Buildings costing Tshs.100,000 had been purchased during 20X5 and the depreciationcharged for the year 20X5 on other assets was Tshs.25,000. The only assets revaluedduring the year were the buildings.

During 20X5, dividends received amounted to Tshs.7,500 and interest received Tshs.15,000,both of which had been credited to the statement of comprehensive income.

The debentures were issued on 1 January 20X5 and all interest due had been paid.

Required

(a) Prepare the statement of cash flows for the year ended 31 December 20X5 in a formsuitable for publication.

(b) Summarise the main conclusions arising from the cash flow produced for Peak Ltd.

(c) Comment on the usefulness of the statement of cash flows to users of financialstatements.


C. FUNDS FLOW STATEMENTS


As the statement of cash flows highlights the change in cash and bank balances over theyear, the source and application of funds statement highlights the change in workingcapital over the year. Working capital is current assets less current liabilities. The statementshows the sources of funds which have become available during the year, deducts the application of funds (i.e. how these funds have been applied during the year) and shows howthe balance, i.e. net sources of funds, has been "ploughed into" inventories, bank, etc.

Prior to the issue IAS 7, many entities included a statement of sources and application offunds in their published accounts. You may come across a funds flow statement, so it would be useful for you to understand its purpose.

Example

Source and Application of Funds Statement for year ended 31 December

Source of Funds Profit before tax

Tshs. Tshs.

47,000

Adjustment for items not involving the movement of funds:

Depreciation

Funds generated from operations

Funds from other sources: Issue of shares

Application of Funds Purchase of non-current assets 6,000

12,000

59,000

15,000

74,000

Payment of taxation

Increase/Decrease in Working Capital

Increase in inventory

Increase in trade receivables Increase in trade payables

Movement in net liquid funds:

Decrease in bank overdraft

Reasons for Change from Funds Flow

31,000 37,000

37,000

21,000

2,000

(2,000 )

16,000

37,000

IAS 7 sets out to meet what the IAS identified as a move away in user needs from funds flowinformation to cash flow information (i.e. eliminating the long-term provisions and otherallocations associated with accruals accounting). Reasons cited for the change in emphasiswere:

Historical cash flows may be directly relevant for business valuation in a way that working capital flows are not.


Funds flow information may hide significant changes, through the leads and lags, as compared with cash flow, in the viability and liquidity of a business.

The funds flow statement does not provide any new data – it simply reorganises dataalready available in the statement of financial position.

Cash flow is an easier concept to understand than working capital changes.

ANSWER TO QUESTION FOR PRACTICE


(a) First we need to do the reconciliation of operating profit to net cash flow from operatingactivities:

Net profit for the year before tax less Interest and dividends received

add Interest charged

Net profit before interest and tax

Depreciation on buildings

Depreciation other

Loss on sale

Increase in inventory

Decrease in debtors

Tshs.

48,590

22,500

38,600

25,000

9,600

(1,000 )

5,550

Tshs.

26,090

7,500

33,590

73,200

106,790

Decrease in creditors

Net cash inflows from operating activities

Now we can prepare the statement of cash flows.

(27,990 ) (23,440 )

83,350

Statement of Cash Flows for Peak Ltd for the year ended 31.12.20X5

Net cash flow from operating activities Interest paid Taxation paid

Net cash used in investing activities

Tshs.

(7,500 )

(10,500 )

Tshs.

83,350

(18,000 )

Payments to acquire tangible non-current assets (161,350 )

Payments to acquire investments Sale of non-current assets

Interest received

Dividends received

Net cash used in financing activities

Issue of shares

Issue of debentures

Equity dividends paid

Decrease in cash balances

(b) The cash flow shows that:

(86,000 ) 17,900

15,000

7,500 (206,950 )

60,000

105,000

(35,000 ) 130,000

11,600

The amount generated from operating activities more than covered the net interest, dividends and tax paid for the company during the year ended 31December 20X5.

Non-current assets were purchased in excess of sales of Tshs.229,450. This was financed by the issue of shares and debentures of Tshs.165,000 cash. The


remaining Tshs.64,450 was financed from internal resources of the company resultingin a cash reduction of Tshs.11,600.

The interest and dividends received on the investments is at a good level.

Questions should be asked in respect of the fall in the profit for the year.

Gearing has increased during the year, but does not appear to be at a high risk level.

The company has expanded its assets by the use of long-term capital resourcesin the main.

(c) The statement of cash flows is useful in that:

It identifies the factors which have caused the change in the cash and cash equivalent position.

It identifies the extent to which profits result in inflows of cash.

It is more objective and verifiable than the income statement as it has no need foraccruals and other estimates.

It provides information on something familiar to users – cash. Profit is notuniversally understood by users.

It provides information on the financial adaptability of a business and its liquidity.

However, we could also say that:

The information provided is all historical. Will this provide an indication of thefuture that can be relied on?

The format presentation, many would say, is cluttered and lacks clarity.

Chapter 5

Valuation of Assets and Inventories

Contents

A. Valuation of Inventories

Definitions

Methods of Determining Cost

Net Realisable Value

Disclosure of Inventories

B. The Importance of Inventory Valuation

Closing Inventory in the Trading Account

Unconsumed Inventories

Gross or Trading Profit

Stocktaking and Inventory Values Effects of Under- or Over-Valuation of Inventory

C. Valuation of Long-Term Contracts

Reflecting the Fundamental Concepts


D. Depreciation

IAS 16: Property, Plant and Equipment Accounting for Depreciation

Accounting for Depreciation

Disclosure in the Statement of Financial Position Revaluation of Non-Current Assets

Methods of Providing for Depreciation

E. IAS 38: Intangible Assets

How does Goodwill Arise?

Accounting Treatment

Amortisation Treatments

F. IAS 23: Borrowing Costs


105

Page

107

107

109

111

111

113

113

114

115

115116

116

117

117

120

120

123

123123

124

125

125

126

126

127

127

(Continued over)

106 Valuation of Assets and Inventories

G. Leased Assets and IAS 17

Classification of Leases

Accounting Treatment Examples

H. IAS 36: Impairment of Assets

Requirements of IAS 36

Example

128128

128129

130

131

131

I. IAS 40: Investment Properties 131


A. VALUATION OF INVENTORIES

Valuation of Assets and Inventories 107

Accounting standards aim to narrow the differences and variations in practice and ensure adequate disclosure in published accounts. IAS 2 specifically seeks to define practices forthe valuation of inventories.

To determine profit, costs have to be matched with related expenses. Unsold orunconsumed inventories and work in progress will have incurred costs in the expectation offuture revenue and it is therefore appropriate to carry forward such costs so that they may bematched with future revenues.

The main requirement of IAS 2 is that inventories must be stated at the lower of cost ornet realisable value – this is the key point to remember.

Definitions

(a) Inventories

Inventories are assets:

held for sale in the ordinary course of business;

in the process of production for such sale; and/or

in the form of materials or supplies to be consumed in the production process orin the rendering of services

Note that they do not include work-in-progress arising under construction contracts. These are dealt with under IAS 11 Construction contracts, which we will deal with laterin this chapter.

(b) Cost

Cost is expenditure incurred in bringing the product or service to its present locationand condition. There are three elements to consider.

Cost of purchase

This comprises not just the purchase price of materials, etc., but any other costsincurred in acquiring them:

(i) Purchase price

(ii) Import duties

(iii) Transport and handling costs and other attributable costs

(iv) Trade discounts (subsidies and rebates must be deducted)

Trade discounts must not be confused with cash discounts which are allowed orreceived. Cash discounts are made to encourage the early payment of the account and are entered into the accounts and appear in the statement ofcomprehensive income (profit and loss account). Trade discounts, on the otherhand, never appear in the accounts, and are deducted at source. The reason forthese discounts is that the seller will be dealing with three possible types ofcustomer:

(i) The trader who buys a lot

(ii) The trader who buys only a few items

(iii) The general public

It is therefore logical that whilst the three types of customer will want to benefit from a discount those under (i) will expect a higher discount than those under (ii),


and those under (ii) a higher discount than those under (iii). This means that there would potentially be at least three price levels. To save staff having to deal with several price lists, all goods are shown at the same price and a negotiatedtrade discount is given to selected customers. Discounts are deducted at the time of the transaction, are instant and are never therefore entered in theaccounts.

Cost of conversion

The cost of conversion into finished goods consists of:

(i) Costs attributable to units of production such as raw material, direct labourand expenses and sub-contracted work

(ii) Production overheads (see below)

(iii) Other overheads, if attributable in the particular circumstances of the business in bringing the product or service to its present location and condition.

Production overheads may cause some problems. The direct charges of rawmaterials, direct labour and expenses are easy to identify, but other overheads related to production may be difficult to define accurately. Fixed productionoverheads are those indirect costs of production that remain relatively constant regardless of the volume of production – for example, depreciation and maintenance of factory buildings. Variable production overheads are thoseindirect costs of production that vary directly, or nearly directly, with the volume ofproduction, such as indirect materials and indirect labour. The allocation of fixedproduction overheads to the costs of conversion is based on the normal capacityof the production facilities. Variable production overheads are allocated to eachunit of production on the basis of the actual use of the production facilities.

Where a production process results in more than one product being producedsimultaneously, then costs of conversion are allocated between the products on arational and consistent basis. For example, we could base the allocation on the relative sales value of each product.

Other costs

Other costs are included in the costs of inventories only to the extent that theyare incurred in bringing the inventories to their present location and condition. For example, we may need to include the costs of designing products for specificcustomers in the costs.

The standard specifically excludes several other costs:

(i) Abnormal amounts of wasted materials, labour or other costs

(ii) Storage costs, unless those costs are necessary in the production processbefore a further production stage – for example, maturing whisky or wine

(iii) Administrative overheads that do not contribute to bringing inventories totheir present location and condition

(iv) Selling costs.

Methods of Determining Cost


If inventories are required to be measured at the lower of cost or net realisable value then weneed first to determine what the cost is. This is not always as easy as it sounds.

(a) Unit Cost

This is the cost of purchasing or manufacturing identifiable units of inventory, and is the simplest form of determining cost. It can, though, be an impractical method if thevolume of inventories or the sales turnover is high. Thus, it could be used for valuingluxury motor boats, but would be totally impractical for valuing tins of baked beans.

(b) Average Cost (Weighted Average)

The units of inventory on hand are multiplied by the average price. The average priceis calculated by:

Total cost of unitsTotal number of units

(c) Simple Average

This method is used to good advantage when it is impossible to identify each itemseparately, and the prices of purchases do not fluctuate very much. To calculate theissue price, the total prices paid are divided by the number of prices paid in the calculation, for example:

1 unit cost: Tshs.1.00 per unit

100 units cost: Tshs.0.50 per unit

Average price is Tshs.(1.00 0.50) Tshs.0.75 2

As you can see, a danger with this method arises where there are large variations in the numbers of items purchased.

(d) First In First Out (FIFO)

Here it is assumed that the earliest purchases are taken into production or sold first,and the inventory on hand then represents the latest production or purchases, asfollows:.

Receipts Issues Inventory After EachTransaction

Units Tshs. Units Tshs. Units Tshs.

20 @ Tshs.45

Tshs.900

10 @ Tshs.50 Tshs.500

10 @ Tshs.52 Tshs.520

Advantages

20 @ Tshs.45

10 @ Tshs.50 Tshs.1,400

10 @ Tshs.45 Tshs.450 10 @ Tshs.45

10 @ Tshs.50 Tshs.950

10 @ Tshs.45

5 @ Tshs.50 Tshs.700 5 @ Tshs.50 Tshs.250

5 @ Tshs.50

10 @ Tshs.52 Tshs.770


The inventory valuation follows the physical movement of the inventory.

The most recent purchases appear on the statement of financial position – as shown above.

Disadvantages

The revenue is charged at current prices and is potentially matched with out-of-datecosts. This means that the profit is based on price change and the profit margin maynot be consistent.

(e) Last In First Out (LIFO)

This works the opposite way to FIFO, and the calculation of inventories taken toproduction or sold represents the most recent purchases. Inventory on handrepresents the earliest purchases or cost of production, as follows:

Receipts Issues Inventory After EachTransaction

Units Tshs. Units Tshs. Units Tshs.

20 @ Tshs.45 Tshs.900

10 @ Tshs.50 Tshs.500

20 @ Tshs.45

20 @ Tshs.45

Tshs.900

10 @ Tshs.52 Tshs.520

Advantages

10 @ Tshs.50 Tshs.1,400

5 @ Tshs.50 Tshs.250 20 @ Tshs.45

5 @ Tshs.50 Tshs.1,150

20 @ Tshs.45

5 @ Tshs.50

10 @ Tshs.52 Tshs.1,670

5 @ Tshs.52 Tshs.260 20 @ Tshs.45

5 @ Tshs.50

5 @ Tshs.52 Tshs.1,410

The current revenue is matched with the current purchases, meaning that the profit should be realistic. In the ideal situation where items purchased equal items sold, thecost of sales will be the current cost of goods sold.

Disadvantages

The inventory values on the statement of financial position are out-of-date andunrealistic. There is also the problem of keeping accurate records of inventorymovements.

(f) Replacement Cost

This is the cost at which an identical asset could be purchased or manufactured. The difficulty with this method arises where the replacement cost is greater than the historiccost because unrealised gains will be included in the resulting profit. Conversely,where the replacement cost is less than either the realisable value or the historic cost,then a greater loss will be incurred.


Under IAS 2, LIFO method and replacement cost are not permitted for the valuation ofinventories . Thus remember we can only use specific identification of costs, weightedaverage costs or FIFO.

Net Realisable Value

This is the actual or estimated selling price net of trade discounts, less:

All further costs to completion

All costs which will be incurred in marketing, selling and distribution

Remember, the rule laid down in IAS 2 is that inventories must be valued at cost or netrealisable value, whichever is the lower.

Estimates of net realisable value are based on the most reliable evidence available at thetime the estimates are made. The write down to net realisable value is charged to thestatement of comprehensive income as an expense

There are many reasons why the net realisable value might be lower than cost:

Errors in purchasing

Errors in production

Falling selling prices

Obsolescence

Increasing costs

The company has decided to sell at a loss – for example, the supermarket practice of"loss leaders"

Disclosure of Inventories

The main disclosure requirements of IAS 2 are

The accounting policy adopted, including the cost formula used

The total carrying amount. classified appropriately

The amount of inventories carried at NRV

The amount of inventories recognised as an expense during the period

Details of any circumstances that have led to the write down of inventories ofinventories to their NRV.


Questions For Practice

1. This will help reinforce your understanding of manufacturing and trading accounts, as well as emphasising the importance of the inventory figure(s).)

The trainee accountant in your costing department has tried to draw up a manufacturing and trading account as shown below.

Opening inventories Purchases Returns inwards

less Carriage inwards

Tshs.

90,590

2,718

93,308

4,920

88,388

Tshs.

20,590

add Returns outwards

add WIP 1 Jan

Prime cost

Indirect wages

Direct expenses Factory insurance

less WIP 31 Dec

less Direct wages

Indirect expenses

add Finished goods 1 Jan

less Finished goods 31 Dec

Cost of production

Sales

less Cost finished goods

Add Closing inventories, 31 Dec

Trading profit

Required

Correct the account.

2,920 91,308

111,898

2,409

114,307

10,240

9,110 2,240 21,590

135,897

5,219

130,678

14,209

9,240 23,449

107,229

18,240

125,469

24,000

101,469

150,500

101,469

49,031

19,420

68,451


2. Calculate the cost of inventories in accordance with IAS 2 from the following datarelating to Mod enterprise for the year ended 31 December 200X.

$

Direct material cost of computer game per unit

Direct labour cost of computer game per unit

Direct expenses cost of computer game per unit

Production overheads per year

Administrative overheads per year

Selling overheads per year

Interest payments per year

2

2

2

500,000

300,000

400,000

50,000

There were 150,000 units in finished goods at the year end. You may assume therewere no finished goods at the start of the year and that there was no work in progress. The normal annual level of production is 500,000 computer games, but in the yearended 31 December 200X only 350,000 were produced because of a labour dispute.

3. An entity has three products in its inventory with values as follows

Product Cost Net Realisable Value

A

B

C

Total inventory

20

22

24

66

24

30

18

72

At what value should the inventory be stated in the statement of financial position inaccordance with IAS 2?


B. THE IMPORTANCE OF INVENTORY VALUATION

Closing Inventory in the Trading Account

Having reviewed the treatment of inventories in the manufacturing and trading accounts, wewill now turn our attention to those organisations which do not have a manufacturingprocess. These firms will buy in finished goods for resale, and an example of a tradingaccount is given below to refresh your memory:


Sales

Tshs. Tshs.

25,770

Tshs.

less Returns

Cost of goods sold:

Opening inventory

Purchases less Returns

18,722

576

18,146

1,446 24,324

5,565

Carriage inwards


Gross (or trading) profit

645 18,791

24,356

4,727 19,629

4,695

After we have added purchases less returns to the opening inventory and added the carriage inwards, we have a grand total of the total inventory on hand plus all net purchases. Fromthis figure we have to deduct the inventory remaining, i.e. unsold, because it is not part of thecurrent year's costs. The net result is known as the cost of sales.

Unconsumed Inventories

The cost of unconsumed inventories will have been incurred in the expectation of futurerevenues which will not arise until a later period, and it is appropriate to carry this costforward to be matched with the revenue when it does arise. This reflects the accrualsconcept – i.e. the matching of costs and revenue in the year in which they arise rather than in the year in which the cash is paid or received.

If there is no reasonable expectation of sufficient revenue to cover the cost incurred, theirrecoverable cost should be charged in the year under review. This may occur due to obsolescence, deterioration, change in demand, etc.

The comparison of cost versus realisable value needs to be made in respect of each itemseparately. Where this is not practical then groups or categories which are similar will needto be assessed together.

The methods used in allocating costs to inventory need to be selected with a view toproviding the fairest possible assessment of the expenditure actually incurred in bringing the product to its present location and condition. For example, in supermarkets and retail shopswhich have large numbers of rapidly changing items, it is appropriate to take the currentselling price less gross profit. When you next go shopping take a good look at the goods displayed and ask yourself how you think the retailer would go about valuing the inventory.

Inventories should be sub-classified so that the categories can be identified and this can bedone in three ways:

By maintaining detailed records of cost of sales

By maintaining detailed records so that a inventory valuation may be performed at anytime (known as the perpetual inventory)

By using the gross profit margin applied to sales


The inventories should also be classified and identified in the statement of financial positionor in notes to the accounts under the headings of:

Raw materials

Work in progress

Finished goods

Gross or Trading Profit

As you know, the net sales less the cost of sales (sometimes known as the cost of goodssold) is the gross profit (GP). This is an important figure because it reveals the profit from operations.

Gross Profit Ratio

This is a very simple calculation, and is usually quoted as a percentage:

Gross profit 100Net sales

If we apply the figures from our trading account example above we get:

4,69524,324

100 19%

Most businesses have a target gross profit ratio which they aim to achieve. The success orfailure of the business depends on maintaining a level of gross profit that will be higher thanthe expenses incurred in running the business. We will return to this subject in a laterchapter when we discuss the analysis of final accounts.

You should remember that the level of gross profit varies with the type of business. Forexample, the grocery trade, furniture stores and newsagents all have their individual profitmargins, which may vary even within the industry. A major supermarket chain may operate on quite different profit margins from that planned by a village store. However, it is generally possible to judge whether a business is below or above the average, once we are aware ofthe average gross profit for the particular trade. This will only be a rough guide becausethere are many other factors to take into account before a reasoned judgement can be made.

Stocktaking and Inventory Values

In large organisations inventory control systems usually exist and these adopt one of themethods we looked at earlier. In large supermarkets and DIY stores, inventory will becomputer-controlled from the tills, using scanning devices. Each sale not only records the value of the sale but also identifies the unit and updates the stock holding, often actuallyexecuting a re-order program automatically. This, of course, cuts out the arduous and expensive task of counting individual items of inventory. Smaller firms, unable to afford sophisticated systems, do have to resort to counting the individual items.

The are various ways of doing this which range from the perpetual inventory to the once-a-year inventory check. Whichever method is chosen, there is the continual problem of pricingthe stock. This is made easier by IAS 2 which suggests that it is acceptable to use theselling price less the estimated profit margin in the absence of a satisfactory costing system. However, the chosen system must give a reasonable approximation of the actual cost.

Perpetual Inventory

This is a method of recording store balances after every receipt and issue to facilitate regularchecking and to avoid the need to close down for stocktaking. The essential feature of the perpetual inventory is the continuous checking of stock. A number of items are counted every day or at frequent intervals and compared with stores records. Discrepancies can be


investigated and clerical errors can be corrected. If there is a physical discrepancy, then the records must be adjusted accordingly. The usual causes of discrepancies are incorrectentries, breakage, pilfering, evaporation, short or over-issues, absorption by moisture, pricingmethod or simply putting the inventory in the wrong bin or location.

Effects of Under- or Over-Valuation of Inventory

The following three examples show the outcome if the closing inventory valuation isincorrect.

(a) Correct inventory values

Sales Opening inventory Purchases

Tshs.

500

6,500

7,000

Tshs.

10,000

Closing inventory

Gross profit

(b) Under-valuation

Sales

Opening inventory

Purchases

Closing inventory

Gross profit

(c) Over-valuation

Sales Opening inventory

Purchases

Closing inventory

Gross profit

700 6,300

3,700

Tshs. Tshs.

10,000

500

6,500

7,000

650 6,350

3,650

Tshs. Tshs.

10,000

500

6,500

7,000

750 6,250

3,750

Notice the difference in the gross profit. These models show how important it is to get as accurate a inventory valuation as possible. Inventory adjustments are one of the main waysof "window dressing" a set of accounts, as we will see in a later chapter.

C. VALUATION OF LONG-TERM CONTRACTS

Work in progress may include long-term contracts. IAS 11: Construction Contracts defines along-term contract as one that is undertaken to manufacture or build a single substantial


entity, or to provide a substantial service. In both cases the period taken will extend beyond one year, and a substantial amount of the contract will be carried forward.

So what is the accounting problem with long term contracts?

Well our problem is "how much of the revenue of the contract should we recognise in anyone period?" A long term contract generally carries with it stage payments which may or maynot relate to the stage of completion of the contract. Let's look at an example to demonstratethe problem.

Example

A construction contract with revenue of Tshs.20m is initially estimated to have total costs of Tshs.12mand is expected to take three years to complete. Thus, over the life of the contract, there willbe a profit of Tshs.8m, but at what point should we recognise that profit. If, for example, wereceive stage payments of Tshs.5m in year 1, Tshs.5m in year 2 and Tshs.10m on final completion,should we recognise the profit as follows Tshs.2m in year 1, Tshs.2m in year 2 and Tshs.4m on completion – that is, in proportion to the stage payments.

If we reflect on some of the accounting concepts and conventions then we might be able toanswer this question.

Reflecting the Fundamental Concepts

(a) Accruals Concept

The contract activity is expected to extend over several years, and it is argued thatprofit should be allocated over those years in order to give a "true and fair view" of the results of the years over which the activity takes place. A misleading view could begiven if contract profits were not recognised until completion of the contract. Someyears could show substantial profits and others substantial losses, causing the analystto make incorrect interpretations on a company's progress.

(b) Prudence Concept

It may not be possible to predict accurately the outcome of a contract until the contractis well advanced. The prudence concept requires a company to determine the earliestpoint at which contract profits may be brought into the statement of comprehensiveincome. Any contract has uncertainties, examples being the actual date on which the contract will be completed, or some unexpected cost arising. If it is expected that there will be a loss on any contract, provision should be made for a loss as soon as it becomes evident.

(c) Going Concern

A company entering into any contract must ensure that it has adequate resources tocomplete the contract.

(d) Consistency Concept

Where a company has several contracts of a similar nature, then it should treat suchcontracts in a similar fashion from an accounting point of view. In addition there should be consistency within any one year and from year to year.


A construction contract is a contract specifically negotiated for the construction of an asset ora combination of assets that are closely inter-related or inter-dependent in terms of theirdesign technology and function or their ultimate purpose or use.

This is a difficult area of accounting and because of the wide variety of industrial projectsthere is, of course, a diversity of accounting practice. The IAS attempts to address this areaby providing us with the following definitions and accounting practice.


Definitions

The IAS defines two types of contract;

A fixed price contract is a construction contract in which the contractor agrees to afixed price or a fixed rate per unit of output, which in some cases is subject to costescalation clauses.

A cost plus contract is a construction contract in which the contractor is reimbursed forallowable or otherwise defined costs, plus a percentage of these costs as a fixed fee.

The IAS does not define contract revenue for us, but it does tell us what it is comprised of. Contract revenue shall comprise

The initial amount of revenue agreed in the contract; and

Variations in contract work, claims and incentive payments to the extent that it isprobable that they will result in revenues, and are capable of being reliably measured.

Contract revenue needs to measured at its fair value.

The more difficult area in the standard is, of course, the recognition of contract costs tomatch with the revenue. There is no definition of contract costs, but the IAS states thatcontract costs comprise costs that relate directly to specific contracts, costs that areattributable to contract activity in general and can be allocated to the contract, and such othercosts as are specifically chargeable to the customer under the terms of the contract.

Accounting practice

The treatment differs depending on the predictability of the outcome of the contract:

When the outcome of a construction contract can be estimated reliably

In this situation, revenue and expense within the contract is recognised by reference tothe stage of completion (and note that this is not necessarily the same as stagepayments) of the contract. This is generally known as the percentage of completionmethod.

An expected loss on a long term contract must be recognised as an expense immediately in the statement of comprehensive income.

When the outcome of a construction contract cannot be estimated reliably

Here, revenue should be recognised only to the extent of contract costs incurred that itis probable will be recoverable

Contract costs should be recognised as an expense in the period in which they areincurred

For debtors and creditors within long term contracts, the enterprise needs to disclose on itsstatement of financial position:

The gross amount due from customers (debtors) for contract work, which IAS 11 statesis the net amount of costs incurred plus recognised profit less the sum of progressbillings and recognised losses.

The amount shown as assets could therefore include:

– Progress billings not yet paid

– Contract costs relating to future activity

The gross amount due to customers (creditors) is the net amount of costs incurred plus recognised profits less the sum of progress billings and recognised losses for allcontracts in progress for which progress billings exceed costs incurred plus recognisedprofits.


All of the above may be somewhat confusing so again let us use an example to demonstrateaccounting for long term contracts under the requirements of IAS 11.

Example

Show how the following information for two construction contracts should be recorded in the financial statements

Contract X Contract Y

Contract revenue

Contract expenses

Billings

Payments in advance of billings

Contract costs incurred

Foreseeable additional losses

For Contract X

500

450

500

25

600

0

350

400

200

0

400

60

Within the statement of comprehensive income, we will show revenue of 500 andexpense of 450, resulting in a profit of 50. The difference between the contract costsincurred and contract expense (600 – 450 150) will be shown on the statement offinancial position under current assets as "due from customers, construction contracts". In addition, the customer for this contract has paid us 25 in advance on billings. Thiswill be shown on the statement of financial position under "payments in advance,construction contracts".

For Contract Y

Within the statement of comprehensive income, we will show contract revenue of 350matched to contract costs of 400 plus the foreseeable loss (which must be recognisedimmediately) of 60, resulting in a loss of 110. Under "due from customers", we will need to show the 150 – the difference between the contract revenue 350 and billings 200 – plus the provision for foreseeable loss of 60, so we have a net figure of 90 on the statement of financial position under "due from customers, construction contracts".

In determining the point at which profit is to be recorded, the overriding principle is that there should be no attributable profit until the outcome of the contract can be foreseen withreasonable certainty. If the profit can be seen with reasonable accuracy it is only prudentthat the profit earned should reflect the amount of work performed to date.


D. DEPRECIATION

Depreciation is a reduction in the value of an asset over a period of time. Fixed/non-current assets are those assets of a material value that are held for use in the business and not for resale or conversion into cash. With the exception of land, non-current assets do not last for ever and therefore have a limited number of years of useful life. In fact, even some land may have its usefulness exhausted after a number of years – examples include quarries, gravel pits and mines, but here it is possible that when one useful life is depleted,another useful life can be created. For example, an old gravel pit can be filled with water andused for water sports.

Usually there is no one cause that contributes to the reduction in value of an asset; it is moreoften a combination of factors. Externally there may be technological change and advancements causing obsolescence to existing assets, whilst internally there are inherent causes such as wear and tear in a factory environment.

Depreciation cannot really be determined accurately until the asset is disposed of. At thattime the difference between the original cost and the disposal value can be matched. Foraccounting purposes it is unacceptable to await the time of disposal, mainly because the total reduction in value would fall within one financial accounting period, whereas the reductiontypically takes place over the whole of the period during which the asset is used.

Depreciation can be said to be that part of the cost of the asset which is consumed during itsperiod of use by the firm. Depreciation is an expense and is treated in the same way as other expenses such as wages, electricity, rent, etc. However, the most significantunderlying concept is that, unlike other charges in the statement of comprehensive income,the charge for depreciation does not entail actual expenditure.

Once the initial capital outlay has been made, no further amount is expended, although the firm is suffering a loss by reason of the diminution of the value of the asset which is retained in the business for the sole purpose of earning profit. This brings us back to the earlier rule that capital expenditure must not be mixed with revenue expenditure.

IAS 16: Property, Plant and Equipment Accounting for Depreciation

This section gives a summary of the requirements of IAS 16 in relation to depreciation in thepublished accounts of businesses.

IAS 16 allows for a choice of accounting treatment for the depreciation of property, plant andequipment between:

Cost Model

Revaluation Model

Depreciation is defined as the systematic allocation of the depreciable amount of an assetover its useful life. Depreciable amount is the cost of an asset, or other amount substitutedfor cost, less its residual amount. Depreciation should be allocated to the accounting periodso as to charge a fair proportion to each accounting period during the expected useful life ofthe asset.

It is important to remember that depreciation is just an accounting method for allocating thecost of an asset over the period of its use. The value of the asset in each intervening yearhas no real meaning, and it is certainly not what the asset could probably be sold at. Thevalue is usually referred to as its net book value. Depreciation also has nothing to do withensuring the business can afford to buy another asset when the first one becomes useless. Depreciation does NOT increase the amount of cash in a business. However, depreciationdoes have the effect of retaining resources in the business by reducing profit and therebyreducing potential dividend payments.

(a) Cost of an Asset


The cost of an asset is the amount of cash or cash equivalents paid, or the fair value of any other consideration given, to acquire an asset at the time of its acquisition orconstruction. The elements of this cost comprise;

Its purchase price, including import duties and after deducting trade discountsand rebates

Any costs directly attributable to bringing the asset to the location and conditionnecessary for it to be capable of operating in the manner intended bymanagement

The initial costs of dismantling and removing the item and restoring the site onwhich it is located, the obligation for which is incurred at the time of acquisition.

Work through the following example to ensure you understand this definition of cost.

In the year to 31 December 200X Krang bought a new non-current asset andmade the following payments in relation to it:

Cost as per supplier's list

Agreed discount

Delivery charge

Erection charge

Maintenance charge

Replacement parts

24,000

(2,000)

200

400

600

500

Estimated costs for restoring site at end of use 1,000

The cost will not include maintenance and replacement parts, which will betreated as ongoing expenses in relation to the asset, but the site restoration costswill be included.

Therefore, cost 24,000 – 2,000 + 200 + 400 + 1,000 23,600

(b) Residual Value

This is the value which the firm could expect to recover at the end of the asset's usefullife. It is a subjective matter and if there is any doubt then it should be treated as nil.

(c) Useful Life of an Asset

This may be:

Dependent upon the extent of use.

Governed by extraction or consumption.

Reduced by obsolescence or wear and tear.

Predetermined, as in leaseholds.

This assessment is one of the greatest problems since it depends upon the extent andpattern of future use. It can be described as the period over which the present ownerwill derive economic benefit from its use.

The assessment of depreciation considers three factors:

The carrying amount of the assets, whether at cost or valuation

The expected useful economic life

The residual value


The useful economic life should be reviewed regularly and, when necessary, revised. Such a review should normally be undertaken every five years and more frequentlywhere circumstances warrant it.

(d) Methods of Depreciation

The IAS does not lay down any specific methods but states that "there is a range ofacceptable methods and management should choose the most appropriate to the assetand its use in the business". Management also need to review the depreciationmethod chosen at least each financial year end and change the method chosen ifnecessary. The new method will be applied to the net book value remaining in the books before the change.

It is not appropriate to omit a charge for depreciation.

Freehold land is not normally depreciated unless it is subject to depletion. However, the value of land may be adversely affected by considerations such as the desirability of its location, either socially or in relation to available sources of materials,labour, or sales and in such circumstances should be written down. All buildings havea finite life and should therefore be written down taking into consideration their usefuleconomic life.

(e) Disclosures

The accounts should disclose the following information regarding each major class ofdepreciable asset:

The method used

The useful economic life or depreciation method used

The total depreciation charged for the period

(f) Revaluation of assets

Assets can be revalued if their fair value can be determined reliably.

Revalued assets must still be depreciated, with the revalued amount now being treated as the cost determinant in the depreciation calculation.

If the revaluation alternative is adopted, two conditions must be complied with.

If an item of property, plant and equipment is revalued, the entire class to whichthe asset belongs must be revalued. If an asset's carrying amount is increasedunder revaluation, then the increase is credited to a revaluation surplus, but if an asset's value is decreased then the entire fall in value is recognised in profit orloss, unless the fall reverses a previous valuation, in which case it can be debitedto the remaining revaluation surplus.

Revaluations must subsequently be made with sufficient regularity to ensure that the carrying amount does not differ materially from the fair value at each reportingdate.

(g) Changes in the Method of Depreciation

Changes should only be undertaken if the new method gives a fairer presentation ofthe results and financial position.

(h) Scope of the Standard

The standard applies to all non-current assets other than:

Investment properties

Goodwill

Development costs

Investments

Accounting for Depreciation


The accounting entry is created by charging the relevant account, e.g. plant and machinerywould be charged in the manufacturing account unless there were no manufacturingaccount, in which case it would be charged in the statement of comprehensive income. Fordelivery vehicles or salesmen's cars the charge would be shown in the distribution section ofthe statement of comprehensive income.

If we choose a non-manufacturing firm as an example, then the entry in the statement ofcomprehensive income will be:

Gross profit Distribution expenses:

Depreciation motor vehicles

Administration expenses:

Tshs.

1,000

Tshs.

29,250

Depreciation fixtures and fittings

Disclosure in the Statement of Financial Position

2,000 3,000

26,250

The following extract from a statement of financial position shows how the asset and itsrelated depreciation provision must be shown (these details may appear in notes to the final accounts):

Non-current assets

Fixtures & fittings

Tshs.

9,000

Tshs.

less Depreciation provision

Motor vehicles

less Depreciation provision

Remember the following two points:

2,000 7,000

11,000

1,000 10,000

We must charge the accounts and at the same time create the provision as a creditbalance.

When it comes to the statement of financial position, we match the asset and itsrelative provision.

Revaluation of Non-Current Assets

Where non-current assets are thought to have permanently increased in value, they may be included in the accounts at the revalued amounts. The depreciation charge is then calculated on the revalued amount. (We will deal with a permanent decrease in value –impairment – a little later in this chapter.)


Methods of Providing for Depreciation

Straight-line Method

The charge is calculated by taking the cost and deducting the residual value and dividing theresult by the years of expected use. In some cases there may only be a scrap value if the asset has been used extensively in the business or if it is of a high-tech nature.

Suppose a motor vehicle was bought on the first day of the financial year for Tshs.10,000, the disposal or trade-in price was Tshs.1,000 and the expected period of usage was four years. Ifthe vehicle is to be written off on a straight-line basis (i.e. in equal amounts each year), then:

Tshs.10,000 Tshs.1,000 Tshs.9,000 ÷ 4 a charge of Tshs.2,250 per annum

The charge per annum is often expressed as a percentage of cost less residual value.

This is a very common method. It has the benefits that it is simple, effective and produces auniform charge which affords better comparative costs. The straight-line method is ideal for assets such as leases, copyrights, etc. although it is also commonly used for plant andmachinery and motor vehicles.

The argument against the method is that an equal amount is charged each year, eventhough maintenance charges may be low in the early years of the asset's use and rise in thelater years.

Reducing Balance Method

This is also sometimes known as the fixed percentage method because a percentage is determined and applied each year to the reducing balance of the capital value.

Say we have an asset worth Tshs.10,000 and choose a rate of 50%. In Year 1 the charge will beTshs.5,000, but in the following year the charge will be calculated on the reduced capital value ofTshs.5,000 and so would be Tshs.2,500 – the year after, the charge would be Tshs.1,250 and so on. Those who favour this method claim that the high charge in the earlier years offsets lowermaintenance costs, and in the later years the higher maintenance costs are offset by thereduced depreciation charge.

You should also note that this method never writes off the asset completely.

Sum of the Years Digits

This is not as popular a method in Britain as it is in the USA. It follows the same principle as the reducing balance method but it is easier to use because there is no difficult computation when assessing the amount to be charged.

Again, if we buy an asset for Tshs.10,000 with a life of four years and the residual value is estimated to be Tshs.2,000, we would write down the asset over four years by weighting earlieryears' charges higher than later years. Therefore, over four years the charge in year 1 wouldbe assigned a value of 4, in year 2 a value of 3, in year 3 a value of 2, and year 4 a value of1, as follows:

4 + 3 + 2 +1 10 or 4 (4 + 1) ÷ 2 10

For example:

Year 1: 4/10ths Tshs.8,000 3,200

Year 2: 3/10ths Tshs.8,000 2,400

Year 3: 2/10ths Tshs.8,000 1,600

Year 4: 1/10ths Tshs.8,000

Total

800

Tshs.8,000

E. IAS 38: INTANGIBLE ASSETS


This standard deals with intangible assets in the statement of financial position. Here, weexamine the treatment of goodwill as an example of such assets. We shall return to this standard in the next chapter to consider research and development, which IAS 38 also covers.

How does Goodwill Arise?

Where the cost of an acquisition exceeds the fair values of the net assets acquired, positivepurchased goodwill will arise, as the following example illustrates:

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

Cost of the acquisition

Fair value of assets acquired:

Non-current assets

Inventories

Other monetary items

Positive goodwill

300

150

40

10 200

100

Purchased positive goodwill may arise due to the following factors: the location or reputationof the acquired business; its order book; the skills of its workforce; or similar reasons withwhich you should be familiar from your foundation studies.

Purchased negative goodwill may also arise when the cost of an acquisition is less than thefair value of the net assets acquired. This is likely to constitute a "bargain purchase" and is likely to arise in relation to the fair values of non-monetary assets such as fixed assets and stocks. After all, a purchaser is unlikely to pay less than the fair values of any monetaryitems acquired!

The following example illustrates the calculation of purchased negative goodwill:

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

Cost of the acquisition

Fair value of assets acquired:

Non-current assets

Inventories

Other monetary items

Negative goodwill

160

160

40

10 210

50

The concept of negative goodwill may seem rather strange to you. It could arise if abusiness has acquired a bad reputation for its standards of service, or if its products are ofconsistently poor quality. A purchaser will therefore have a problem in reversing the factors leading to the negative goodwill, before the benefits from the investment are seen.

Non-purchased goodwill is that which an entity generates on its own account. As IAS 38 defines an intangible asset as an identifiable non-monetary asset without physical substance,then non-purchased goodwill is not to be recognised in the entity's financial statements. Thisis because it is not identifiable. Note that this means that a great deal of the businessesvalue is not reflected on the statement of financial position. Think of the value that could beput on the goodwill of businesses such as McDonalds or Microsoft to illustrate this point. Thereal difference between non-purchased goodwill (or inherent goodwill as it is quite often


referred to) and purchased goodwill is that purchased goodwill can be reliably measured –the price the buyer paid for it.


Three criteria need to be satisfied before an item should be recognised as an intangible asset – identifiability, control and reliable measurability. Once recognised as an intangible,the item is initially recorded in the statement of financial position at cost. The intangible assetis then amortised over its useful life in the same manner as we depreciate non-currenttangible assets. The business can revalue intangible assets to fair value if they wish, butthey will still have to be amortised based on this fair value.

There is one difference between the treatment of tangible and intangible assets in relation toamortisation. This is where IAS 38 recognises intangible assets with infinite lives. Remember that, to calculate amortisation/depreciation, we need to know the useful economiclife to the business. If an intangible asset is judged to have an indefinite life, then it is not amortised, but this life will have to be reviewed regularly and the asset tested for impairmentannually.

For clarity then:

Positive purchased goodwill is to be capitalised and amortised in the incomestatement over its useful economic life unless it is determined to have an indefinite life. In this case it will be reviewed for impairment annually.

There is, though, a major exception to this that you must carefully note:

Where purchased goodwill occurs in a business combination (see chapters 10 and 11) the goodwill is not amortised, but tested for impairment. (This is a requirement of IFRS 3: Business combinations.)

Purchased intangible assets may be capitalised provided they are capable of being reliablymeasured. The usual approach to the assessment of the value of a purchased intangible willbe to assess the fair value by reference to replacement cost or market value. Therefore, it isexpected that there is an active market in which the items are traded. Again these may bejudged to have an indefinite life. Non-purchased goodwill is not to be recognised.

Non-purchased intangible assets may be capitalised provided they have a readilyascertainable market value. Items such as franchises and quotas are examples of this. Unique items such as brand names are unlikely to have a readily ascertainable market valueand are thus not examples of purchased intangible assets which may be capitalised.

Amortisation Treatments

IAS 38 specifies the way in which amortisation should be treated.

(a) Where the life of an item is considered to be limited

Amortisation is carried out on a systematic basis over the useful economic life of theitem. As you might expect, the assessment of the useful economic life is fraught with difficulty and some items could have indefinite lives. (For example, a purchasedfranchise agreement may only legally apply for a defined contractual period, in which case that period would be used for amortisation.)

In any event, an entity must be able to justify its choice of useful economic life (auditors will have great difficulty here) and it is possible that the business will be called to account where useful economic life is considered to be excessive or inappropriate.

An impairment review will be required for items whose life is considered limited only inthe year after acquisition; adjustments may then be required. However, an impairmentreview will be required annually for indefinite life intangibles.


Clearly, a prudent assessment of useful economic life is needed.

(b) Where the life is considered to be indefinite

In this case, goodwill is not amortised at all. Where goodwill is considered to have anindefinite life, an annual impairment review is required leading to possible adjustments.

(c) Where negative goodwill exists

As positive goodwill is charged against profits when it is amortised, then we would expect negative goodwill to be credited to profits over a suitable period. However,IFRS 3 (which deals specifically with goodwill generated in a business combination –see chapters 10 and 11) requires such negative goodwill to be recognised in thestatement of comprehensive income immediately. This, by the way, is a major changeto previous accounting practice where, indeed, the negative goodwill was released tothe income statement over its life. This change means that any previous negativegoodwill in the financial statements must be eliminated by transferring it to retained reserves.

F. IAS 23: BORROWING COSTS

Previously in this chapter we discussed the cost of an asset. Within that cost, we did notconsider whether borrowing costs, interest incurred on loans, etc. used to acquire the asset,formed part of that cost. Remember the cost of an asset is all those expenses required toenable the asset to be brought into use. Could we then make a case for considering theinterest on any loan needed as part of that cost?

IAS 23 regulates the extent to which entities are allowed to capitalise borrowing costsincurred on money borrowed to finance the acquisition of certain assets: borrowing costsmust be capitalised as part of the cost of an asset, if that asset is one which necessarilytakes substantial time to get ready for its intended use or sale.

In the case of a self-constructed asset, where we can directly allocate the borrowing costs, these can be logically regarded as part of the cost. But it is not always clear which loan applies to which asset, so should these interest/borrowing costs be regarded as part of thecost or not? Clearly, if we don't capitalise the borrowing costs as part of the cost of an asset,then they will need to be expensed to the statement of comprehensive income. Expensingall such borrowing costs would clearly be prudent.

These issues are considered by IAS 23 which, in its most recent form, was issued in 1994and minor changes made to it in March 2007.


The standard states that borrowing costs shall be recognised as an expense in the period inwhich they are incurred. That is very clear. However, the standard goes on to state "exceptto the extent that they are capitalised". Thus, the standard permits us to capitalise someborrowing costs. But which? The answer is "borrowing costs that are directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of a qualifying asset shall be capitalised as part ofthe cost of that asset".

A qualifying asset for the capitalisation of borrowing costs is one that necessarily takes a substantial period of time to get ready for its intended use or sale.

Borrowing costs are defined as those costs that could be avoided if the asset had not been acquired.

It can be quite difficult to identify a direct relationship between an asset and borrowing costs, especially if funds are borrowed generally and controlled by a central function within the


business. In these cases, the standard permits us to apply a capitalisation rate to the expenditure on the asset. This rate is a weighted average.

G. LEASED ASSETS AND IAS 17

A lease is an agreement that conveys to one part, the lessee, the right to use property, butdoes not convey legal ownership of that property. Rather, the lessee pays lease rentals toanother party, the lessor, in order to gain the use of an asset over a period of time.

However, the IASB's Framework does not define an asset in relation to legal ownership. Remember an asset is a resource controlled by an entity as a result of a past event and fromwhich future economic benefits are expected to flow to the entity. So, can a leased asset be viewed as an asset of the lessee and not that of the lessor? If it is viewed as an asset of the lessee, then this will make a considerable difference to the statement of financial position ofthe business as the asset will have to be capitalised at its fair value and then depreciated. In addition, the amount owed to the lessor under the lease agreement will need to be shown asa liability.

Classification of Leases

The standard divides leases into finance leases and operating leases. Finance leasedassets are those that we will need to capitalise onto the statement of financial position of thelessee as they fit the description of an asset.

A finance lease is a lease that transfers substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of an asset. Title may or may not eventually be transferred.

An operating lease is a lease other than a finance lease.

To decide whether a lease is finance or operating, it is important to identify whether the risk and rewards of ownership have transferred to the lessee or not. IAS 17 provides guidanceas to this. It gives the following list of situations in which a lease would normally be classifiedas a finance lease.

The lease transfers ownership of the asset to the lessee by the end of the lease term

The lessee has the option to buy the asset at a price expected to be lower than fairvalue at the time the option is exercised

The lease term is for the major part of the economic life of the asset even if title is not transferred

At the beginning of the lease, the present value of the minimum lease payments is approximately equal to the fair value of the asset

The leased assets are of a specialised nature so that only the lessee can use themwithout major modification

Gains or losses from the fluctuations in fair value are borne by the lessee.


IAS 17 requires us to recognise a finance lease in the lessee's statement of financial positionat amounts equal to the fair vale of the leased property or, if lower, the present value of the minimum lease payments determined at the inception of the lease.

A finance lease will also give rise to depreciation expenses over the useful life of the leasedasset. However, be a little careful here as the useful life of a leased asset is only theremaining period from the commencement of the lease over which the economic benefitsembodied in the leased asset are expected to be consumed by the lessee.


The interest payable on the lease needs to be allocated to accounting periods during thelease so as to produce a constant periodic rate of charge on the remaining balance of theobligation for each accounting period.

Examples

We can best demonstrate the classification and accounting for leases by the use of thefollowing examples.

Example 1

X business acquires four identical pieces of equipment on the same day as follows:

Piece 1, rented from A at a cost of Tshs.500 per month payable in advance and terminableat any time by either party

Piece 2, rented from B at a cost of eight half-yearly payments in advance of Tshs.3,000

Piece 3 rented from C at a cost of six half-yearly payments in advance of Tshs.2,400

Piece 4 purchased outright from D at a cost of Tshs.16,000

Which of the above are non-current assets of X?

Obviously, piece 4 is a non-current asset of X as this is a purchased asset. The purchaseprice also sets the fair value of the piece of equipment – Tshs.16,000.

Piece 1 is an operating lease as there is no transfer of the risks and rewards to X.

Piece 2 involves a total payment of Tshs.24,000 which in present value terms will be more thanthe fair value. Therefore, this is a finance lease and 2 is a non-current asset of X.

Piece 3 only involves a total payment of Tshs.14,400, the present value of which will be significantly less than Tshs.16,000 and this, therefore, is an operating lease.

Example 2

A lessee leases an asset for a period of five years. The rental is Tshs.650 per quarter payable inadvance. The leased asset could have been purchased for Tshs.10,000 and has a useful life of8 years. Show how the lease will be accounted for in the lessee's books for the first year. The rate of interest implicit in the lease, the constant periodic charge, is 2.95% per quarter.

In this example, the lease is a finance lease as total payments are Tshs.13,000, which in present value terms is more than Tshs.10,000. At the beginning of the lease period, the asset will becapitalised in the lessee's books by debiting non-current assets Tshs.10,000 and creditingliabilities loans Tshs.10,000.

The lease payments total Tshs.13,000 and, therefore, the total interest charge in the lease isTshs.3,000. This interest has to be allocated across the reducing balance of liability as follows:


Period Capital sum Rental paid Capital sum Finance charge Capital sum

1 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

at start

10,000

9626

9241

8845

8437 8017

7584

7139

650 650

650

650

650 650

650

650

during period

9350

8976

8591

8195

7787 7367

6934

6489

2.95%

276

265

254

242

1,037

230

217

205

191

843

at end

9626

9241

8845

8437

8017 7584

7139

6680

The annual lease charge of 4 x 650 Tshs.2,600 can now be allocated to capital repayment andexpense interest charge. In the first year, the interest charge is 1,037 and therefore capital repayment is 1,563. In the second year, the capital repayment due will be 1,757 (2,600 –843).

Thus, in the financial statements for year 1, the statement of comprehensive income will becharged with 1,037 interest and the liability will be reduced by 1,563. Of the remainingliability of 8,437, the next yearly capital repayment will be recognised as a current liability1,757.

We also need to depreciate the asset. Its value is 10,000 and we shall assume no residual value and that the useful life will be five years as this is the lesser of the lease period and the useful life of the asset – in other words, the useful life to the lessee is curtailed by the lengthof the lease period. Depreciation charge will, therefore, be 2,000 per annum.

H. IAS 36: IMPAIRMENT OF ASSETS

The essential objective of IAS 36 is to ensure that all assets are not carried at a figuregreater than their recoverable amount. Its essential requirement is that when an asset isimpaired – that is, its recoverable amount becomes less than its carrying amount in thebooks – this loss must be written off.

Figure 6.1: Impairment test

Is Carrying greater than Recoverable ?

value

either

cost

greater of

or

Fair value – Costs to sell Value in use


IAS 36 is applicable to all assets except inventories (see IAS 2), construction contracts (seeIAS 11), deferred tax assets (see IAS 12), employee benefits, insurance contracts, investment properties (see section I which follows and IAS 40), and assets held for sale inaccordance with IFRS 5. This means IAS 36 also applies to intangible assets such as goodwill. Impairment reviews are also required on those assets that have previously beenrevalued upwards.

Requirements of IAS 36

IAS 36 requires that, at each statement of financial position date, an assessment must becarried out to determine whether there are any indications of impairment of assets. If thereare indications of impairment, then the business needs to estimate the recoverable amount of the asset and compare this with the carrying amount.

IAS 36 suggests the following as indications of impairment:

An asset's market value has declined significantly more than would be expected as aresult of the passage of time or normal use.

Significant changes with an adverse effect on the business have taken place or willtake place in the technological, market, economic or legal environment in which the business operates.

Market interest rates have increased during the period and those increase are likely toaffect the discount rate used in calculating an asset's value in use and decrease the asset's recoverable amount materially.

The carrying amount of the net assets of the business is more than its marketcapitalisation.

Example

Again let us use an example to demonstrate the requirements of the standard.

A non-current asset was purchased for Tshs.2m several years ago and revalued after 5 years toTshs.3m. At this stage, a revaluation reserve of Tshs.1m was created. In the current year, an impairment review is undertaken and the recoverable amount of the asset is found to beTshs.1.2m. The impairment incurred is, therefore, Tshs.1.8m. Tshs.1m of this impairment will be charged to the revaluation reserve and Tshs.0.8m to the statement of comprehensive income.

I. IAS 40: INVESTMENT PROPERTIES

IAS 1 defines a non-current asset as any asset other than a current asset. Current assetsare defined by IAS 1 as an asset which is:

expected to be realised, or intended for sale or consumption, in the business's normaloperating cycle

held primarily for the purpose of being traded

expected to be realigned with 12 months

cash or cash equivalent.

This is all well and good, but what about a business which owns a property which it intends to hire out in the short to medium term and eventually sell. Is this a current asset or non-current asset?

The answer seems to depend on the particular operating activities of the business. If the business is actually trading in properties as an operating activity, then the property would seem to be a current asset. If the business is intending to hold the property for a number of


accounting periods, then perhaps non-current denomination better reflects the substance. However, the property is still not being consumed in supporting the operating activities of the business, presuming it is not trading in property, and therefore charging depreciation on theasset would seem to be incorrect.

IAS 40 provides the following definition:

An investment property is a property (land and/or building) held to earn rentals orfor capital appreciation rather than for use in the production or supply of goods orsale in the ordinary course of business.

Investment properties are recognised as a non-current asset in the financial statements atcost or fair value. If a business opts for the fair value model, then changes in fair value fromone period to the next will be recognised in the statement of comprehensive income. If acost model is chosen, then IAS 16 comes into force and the property is depreciated.

Once the model is chosen it should be used for all investment properties.

Note that choosing the fair value method for an investment property which is increasing invalue will enhance the profit declared by a company as the gain is taken to the statement ofcomprehensive income, whereas under the cost model, the profit declared would be reduceddue to depreciation. This is something for you to be aware of when analysing financialstatements.

(Also be aware that IAS 40 is very different to the UK SSAP 19 where a fair value method is enforced and increases in fair value are taken to an investment property reserve.)

The decision tree shown in Figure 6.2 below is useful in applying IAS 40.


Figure 6.2: Decision tree for treatment of most property under IAS GAAP

Start

Is the property held for sale in theordinary course of

business?

No

Is the propertyowner occupied?

No

Is the propertybeing constructed

or developed?

No

The property isan investment

property

Which model is chosen for all

investment properties?

Yes

Yes

Yes

Cost model

Use IAS 2(inventories)

Use IAS 16

Use IAS 16 until completion

Use IAS 16 with

disclosure from IAS 40

Fair value model Use IAS 40



4. J Limited purchased the following assets on 1 January: buildings at Tshs.150,000, plant and machinery at Tshs.75,000, fixtures and fittings at Tshs.50,000 and motor vehicles atTshs.35,000. The company's financial year ends on 31 December.

Calculate the depreciation using the straight-line method.

The percentage rates of depreciation to be applied are: buildings 2% pa, plant andmachinery 25% pa, fixtures and fittings 12½% pa, and motor vehicles 25% pa.

It is assumed that the residual values will be as follows: buildings nil, plant Tshs.2,000,fixtures Tshs.8,000 and motor vehicles Tshs.5,000.

5. Calculate the depreciation on the following assets, showing exactly how much will be charged annually in respect of each. Use the sum of the years digits methods.

(a) Plant costing Tshs.150,000 with a residual value of Tshs.10,000 and an expected usefullife of 5 years.

(b) Fixtures and fittings costing Tshs.25,000 with a residual value of Tshs.1,000 and anexpected life of 15 years.

(c) Motor vehicles costing Tshs.45,000 with a residual value of Tshs.5,000 and an expected life of 4 years.

6. Consider each of the assets described below and indicate whether or not they areinvestment properties as defined in IAS 40.

(a) Land held for long term capital appreciation rather than for short term sale in theordinary course of business

(b) Land held for a currently undetermined use

(c) Property that is being constructed or developed for future use as investment property

(d) A building owned by a business and leased out under operating leases

(e) A building that is vacant, but is held for operating lease purposes

(f) Property intended for sale in the ordinary course of business

(g) Property being constructed for third parties

(h) Owner occupied property

(i) Property leased to others under a finance lease




1. The corrected account is as follows:

Manufacturing and Trading Account

Opening inventories

Purchases

less Carriage inwards

Tshs.

90,590

4,920

95,510

Tshs.

20,590

Returns outwards

Closing inventories

Direct wages

Direct expenses

Prime cost

Indirect wages

Indirect expenses

Factory insurance

add WIP 1 Jan

less WIP 31 Dec

Cost of production

Sales

less Returns

Opening inventories

Cost of production

Closing inventories (finished goods)

Gross trading profit

2,920 92,590

113,180

19,420

93,760

14,209

9,110 23,319

117,079

10,240

9,240

2,240 21,720

138,799

2,409

141,208

5,219

135,989

150,500

2,718 147,782

18,240

135,989

154,229

24,000 130,229

17,553

2. The direct costs of the computer game are simple enough to calculate as follows:

150,000 units at $2 material costs

150,000 units at $2 labour costs

150,000 units at $2 expenses costs

Direct costs

300,000

300,000

300,000

900,000

IAS 2 only permits the inclusion of overhead costs in the valuation of inventories and,therefore, administration, selling and interest cannot be included. If we assume theproduction overheads are fixed in nature, then we must allocate these based on normalproduction capacity which, in this case, is 500,000 units.


Direct costs

Production overheads 500,000 x 150,000 500,000

Cost of finished inventory

900,000

150,000

1,050,000

The abnormal costs associated with the labour dispute will be charged as an expense in the period in which they were incurred.

3. IAS 2 requires us to value each type of inventory separately. So the answer is not 66,the lower of total cost or net realisable value.

The answer is 20 + 22 + 18 60.

4. Asset

Buildings

Plant

Fixtures & fittings

Motor vehicle

Cost

Tshs.

150,000

75,000

50,000

35,000

Residual Value

Tshs.

Nil

2,000

8,000

5,000

Depreciate on Tshs.

150,000

73,000

42,000

30,000

Depreciation

Tshs.

3,000

18,250

5,250

7,500

5. Year Plant

Tshs.

Year Fixtures and Fittings

Tshs.

Year MotorVehicle

Tshs.

1 46,666 1 3,000 1 16,000

2

3

4

5

37,333

27,999

18,666

9,336

140,000

2 2,800

3 2,600

4 2,400

5 2,200

6 2,000

7 1,800

8 1,600

9 1,400

10 1,200

11 1,000

12 800

13 600

14 400

15 200

24,000

2 12,000

3 8,000

4 4,000

40,000

6. (a), (d) and (e) are clearly investment properties.


(b) is speculative at the moment, but would be regarded as an investment property atthis stage.

Chapter 6

Further Accounting Standards and Concepts

Contents

Introduction

139

Page

141

A. IAS 8: Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors 141

Accounting Policies

Accounting Estimates

Prior Period Errors

B. IAS 10: Events after the Reporting Date

Adjusting Events

Non-adjusting Events

Standard Accounting Practice Window Dressing

C. IAS 12: Income Taxes

D. IAS 18: Revenue

Definitions

E. IAS 20: Accounting for Government Grants

F. IAS 24: Related Party Transactions

Definitions

Requirements

G. IAS 33: Earnings Per Share

Additional Share Issues During a Period

H. IAS 37: Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets

Definitions

141

142

142

142

143

143

143144

145

146

146

147

148

148

148

149

150

150

150

(Continued over)

140 Further Accounting Standards and Concepts


Measurement of Provisions 151152

I. Accounting for Research and Development Expenditure

Types of R & D Expenditure


Disclosure

152

153

153

154

J. Accounting for Inflation

Limitations of Historical Cost Reporting

Current Cost Accounting (CCA)

Financial and Operating Capital Maintenance Concepts

Answers to Questions for Practice

154

154

155

158

161

INTRODUCTION

Further Accounting Standards and Concepts 141

In this section we will look at other International Accounting Standards (IASs) andInternational Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) that you should be aware of, and outlinehow they affect financial statements. Remember that accounting standards do not themselves have the force of law. They do, however, have the backing of the majoraccounting bodies and professional accountants are expected to adhere to their provisions.

In addition, we review here the issue of accounting for inflation which, whilst not currently thesubject of an accounting standard, remains an issue of importance.

A. IAS 8: ACCOUNTING POLICIES, CHANGES INACCOUNTING ESTIMATES AND ERRORS

IAS 8 explains the criteria required for selecting and changing accounting policies and setsout the accounting treatment and disclosures required for changes and corrections toestimates or errors. It is intended to enhance the relevance and reliability of the financial statements, and the comparability of those financial statements over time and with the financial statements of other entities.

Accounting Policies

When a Standard or an Interpretation specifically applies to a transaction, other event orcondition, the accounting policy or policies applied to that item must be determined byapplying the Standard or Interpretation and considering any relevant ImplementationGuidance issued by the IASB for the Standard or Interpretation.

In the absence of a Standard or an Interpretation that specifically applies to a transaction,other event or condition, the business must use its judgement in developing and applying anaccounting policy that results in information that is relevant and reliable. In doing so, itshould refer to requirements and guidance in IASB standards and interpretations dealing withsimilar and related issues, and other definitions, recognition criteria and measurementconcepts for assets, liabilities, income and expenses as stated in relevant Standards.

Accounting policies must be consistently selected and applied for similar transactions, other events and conditions, unless a Standard or an Interpretation specifically requires or permitscategorisation of items for which different policies may be appropriate. If that is the case, theselected accounting policy must be applied consistently to each category.

Changes to an accounting policy are only permitted if the change:

is required by a standard or interpretation; or

results in the financial statements providing reliable and more relevant informationabout the effects of transactions, other events or conditions on the entity's financialposition, financial performance, or cash flows.

Any such change must be disclosed in the financial statements of the business stating:

The nature of and reasons for the change

The amount of the adjustments for each financial statement line item affected (and forbasic and diluted earnings per share if the business is applying IAS 33 – see later) inthe current period and any prior period.

If a new standard or interpretation has been issued but is not yet effective, a business mustdisclose any known or reasonably estimable information relevant to assessing the possible impact that the new standard will have in the year it is applied.


Accounting Estimates

The use of reasonable estimates is an essential part of the preparation of financial statements and does not undermine their reliability. A change in accounting estimate is an adjustment of the carrying amount of an asset or a liability, or the amount of the periodicconsumption of an asset, that results from the assessment of its present status and/or the expected future benefits and obligations associated with it. Such changes arise from newinformation or new developments and, accordingly, are not corrections of errors.

The effect of a change in an accounting estimate needs to be recognised by including it in profit or loss in either:

the period of the change, if the change affects that period only; or

the period of the change and future periods, if the change affects both.

The nature and amount of any such change must be disclosed in the financial statements. Ifthe amount of the effect in future periods is not disclosed because estimating it is impracticable, that fact should itself be disclosed.

Prior Period Errors

Prior period errors are omissions from, and misstatements in, the financial statements for one or more prior periods arising from a failure to use, or misuse of, reliable information that wasavailable when the financial statements issued and which could reasonably be expected tohave been obtained and taken into account in the preparation and presentation of thosefinancial statements. Such errors include the effects of mathematical mistakes, mistakes in applying accounting policies, oversights or misinterpretations of facts, and fraud.

The general principle in IAS 8 is that an entity must correct all material prior period errorsretrospectively in the first set of financial statements issued after their discovery by:

restating the comparative amounts for the prior period(s) presented in which the erroroccurred; or

if the error occurred before the earliest prior period presented, restating the opening balances of assets, liabilities and equity for the earliest prior period presented.

(Omissions or misstatements of items are material if they could, individually or collectively,influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of the financial statements.)

The required disclosures relating to prior period errors include:

the nature of the prior period error

for each prior period presented, to the extent practicable, the amount of the correctionfor each financial statement line item affected (and for basic and diluted earnings pershare if the business is applying IAS 33 – see later)

the amount of the correction at the beginning of the earliest prior period presented

if retrospective restatement is impracticable, an explanation and description of how the error has been corrected.

B. IAS 10: EVENTS AFTER THE REPORTING DATE

IAS 10 concerns events which arise after the date of the statement of financial position, butfor which evidence exists at the date of the statement. In the interests of accurate reporting, it is essential that these be reflected in the financial statements. If a proper understanding ofthe financial position cannot be obtained without some disclosure, then notes must beprovided to indicate those conditions existing at the date of the statement.


A post-statement of financial position event is any event which occurs between the date ofthe statement of financial position and the date on which the financial statements areapproved by the board of directors. There are two main categories of such events.

Adjusting Events

These are events which provide additional evidence relating to conditions existing at the date of the statement of financial position. They require changes in amounts to beincluded in the financial statements.

Examples are:

The subsequent determination of the purchase price or the proceeds of sale of fixedassets purchased or sold before the year end.

A valuation which provides diminution in the value of property.

Guidance concerning the net realisable value of stocks, e.g. the proceeds of sales afterthe date of the statement of financial position, or the receipt or evidence that theprevious estimate of accrued profit on a long-term contract was materially inaccurate.

The negotiation of amounts owing by debtors, or the insolvency of a debtor.

Receipt of information regarding rates of taxation.

Amounts received or receivable in respect of insurance claims which are in the course of negotiation at the date of the statement of financial position.

Discovery of errors or frauds which show that the financial statements were incorrect.

Non-adjusting Events

These are events which arise after the date of the statement of financial position and concern conditions which did not exist at the time. As a result they do not involve changes in amounts in the financial statements. On the other hand, they may be of such materiality thattheir disclosure is required by way of notes, to ensure that financial statements are notmisleading.

Examples are:

Mergers and acquisitions

Issues of shares and debentures

Purchases or sales of fixed assets and other investments

Losses of fixed assets or stocks as a result of catastrophe such as fire or flood

Decline in the value of property and investment held as fixed assets, if it can bedemonstrated that the decline occurred after the year end

Government action, such as nationalisation

Strikes and other labour disputes

Standard Accounting Practice

(a) Financial statements should be prepared on the basis of conditions existing at thestatement of financial position date.

(b) A material post-statement of financial position event requires changes in the amountsto be included in the financial statements, where it is either an adjusting event, or itindicates that application of a going concern concept to the whole or a material part ofthe company is not appropriate.

(c) A material post-statement of financial position event should be disclosed where:


It is a non-adjusting event of such materiality that its non-disclosure would affectthe ability of the users of financial statements to reach a proper understanding ofthe financial position; or

It is the reversal or maturity after the year end of a transaction entered into beforethe year end, the substance of which was primarily to alter the appearance of thecompany's statement of financial position.

(d) The disclosure should state, in note form, the nature of the event and an estimate ofthe financial effect, or a statement that it is not practicable to make such an estimate.

(e) The estimate of the financial effect should be disclosed before taking account of taxation, and the taxation implications should be explained, where necessary, for aproper understanding of the financial position.

(f) The date on which the financial statements are approved by the board of directors should be disclosed in the financial statements.

Window Dressing

The term 'window dressing' refers to the practice of manipulating a statement of financialposition so as to show a state of affairs more favourable than that which would be shown by a mere statement of the balances as they stand in the books. Over the years windowdressing became a rather uncertain term because it encompassed two rather differentsituations:

(a) The fraudulent falsification of accounts in order to show conditions existing at thestatement of financial position date in a more favourable light than should havehonestly been the case.

(b) A perfectly lawful exercise carried out at the year end which tended to make the situation, viewed from the standpoint of the user of the financial statements, appeardifferent from the real state of affairs.

The fraudulent falsification of accounts is clearly unacceptable and unlawful and is not thesubject for an accounting standard. The meaning in (b) above, however, is dealt with in IAS10 where the term 'window dressing' is taken to mean the lawful arrangement of affairs overthe year end to make things look different from the way they usually are at the year end.

The method in (b) above (i.e. adoption of special policy at end of accounting period) can beput into effect in any of the following ways:

Special efforts to collect book debts

A special effort to collect book debts just prior to the date of the published accounts, in order to show a substantial balance of cash at the bank, is a form if window dressing. If the effort is successful and easy collection of the debts proves to be possible, thecompany can claim to be in as liquid a position as is shown by the statement offinancial position.

Borrowing

An increasing bank overdraft tends to create an unfavourable impression of theprospects of a company. By paying off part of the bank overdraft just before the annualaccounts are prepared, a growing overdraft may be shown at a reasonable and steadylevel, even if the position of the company will make it necessary to increase it againearly in the new financial year.

Special loans may be raised to increase the ratio of liquid assets to floating liabilities atthe time the statement of financial position is prepared.

C. IAS 12: INCOME TAXES


This standard mainly deals with the subject of deferred taxation.

Deferred tax is basically the difference between tax calculated on accounting profits and taxcalculated in accordance with legal requirements of a legislative authority. Quite often, taxauthorities, when calculating tax charges, start with the accounting profit and adjust it forvarious matters such as depreciation. For example, in the UK, the tax authorities allowspecific allowances for the purchase of assets against reported profits rather than depreciation.

The difference between accounting profit and taxable profit is caused by:

Permanent differences – items accounted for in the financial accounts which arepermanently disallowable or non-taxable; and

Temporary differences – whereby the carrying values of assets and liabilities are different for the purposes of financial accounts on the one hand and of taxationcomputations on the other.

Let us suppose Lex purchases an asset for Tshs.1,000 and depreciates on a straight line basis over its 4 year life assuming no residual value. The depreciation charge per annum will,therefore, be Tshs.250. On the other hand, the tax authorities applicable to Lex allow a 30% written down allowance against profits. This allowance will, therefore, be year 1 Tshs.300, year 2 Tshs.210, year 3 Tshs.147, etc. and thus the accounting and taxable profits will be different.

If accounting profits were Tshs.2,000 per annum after depreciation charges every year, rising toTshs.2,250 in year 5 as no depreciation will be charged in this year, then the taxable profit,accounting tax and actual tax (presuming a tax rate of 30%) would be as follows:

Accounting profit

Accounting tax at 30%

Accounting profit before depreciation

Written down allowance

Taxable profit

Tax

Year 1

2,000

600

2,250

300

1,950

585

Year 2

2,000

600

2,250

210

2,040

612

Year 3

2,000

600

2,250

147

2,103

631

Year 4

2,000

600

2,250

103

2,147

644

Year 5

2,250

675

2,250

72

2,178

653

The above table shows us that in year 1, the accounting tax is Tshs.15 more than the actual taxand in year 5 Tshs.22 more. These differences are spread over the years.

IAS 12 requires us to account for deferred tax which is the amount required to match the accounting and tax charge. Thus, in the above example, in year 1 we would need to provide for a deferred tax liability of Tshs.15 by making an extra charge against tax in the statement ofcomprehensive income. In year 2, Tshs.12 of this deferred liability would be released.


D. IAS 18: REVENUE

What is revenue? This seems simple enough to answer – cash you are paid for sellinggoods or services. However, as always with things in accounting, the answer is not quite sosimple. We need to answer such questions as;

At what point is the sale made?

Has a sale been made or is there a different substance to the transaction?

Is a transaction that doesn't appear in legal form to be a sale, in substance a sale?

What is the value of the sale?

Can the sale of non-current assets be regarded as revenue

Definitions

IAS 18 provides us with the following clarifications:

Revenue is defined as the gross inflow of economic benefits during the periodarising in the course of ordinary activities of an entity when those inflows result inan increase in equity, other than an increase relating to contributions from equityparticipants.

So, quite clearly, income from the sale of shares is not treated as revenue.

It is also clear that as the definition refers to gross inflows, then revenue is recorded before expenses.

Revenue also results from ordinary activities, so the sale of non-current assets would not beregarded as revenue as this is not the normal business activities.

The standard states that revenue is recognised when the business has transferred to the buyer the significant risks and rewards of ownership of the goods. This answers substance vlegal from questions. Take, for example, the situation where a whisky distillery sells its entire maturing whisky inventory to a bank for a specified amount with the provision to buy thatinventory back at a future date at a given price. No one else can buy the inventory. Thiswould not be regarded as a sale as the risks and rewards of ownership have not beenpassed to the bank – they still remain with the distillery. The essence of such a transaction isthat of a loan.

IAS 18 identifies several criteria that must be met before revenue can be recognised on the sale of goods as follows:

The business has transferred to the buyer the significant risks and rewards ofownership of the goods

The business retains neither continuing managerial involvement to the degree usuallyassociated with ownership nor effective control over the goods sold

The amount of revenue can be measure reliably

It is probable that the economic benefits associated with the transaction will flow to the business

The costs incurred or to be incurred in respect of the transaction can be measuredreliably.



1. In each of the following cases identify whether and, if possible, at what amount revenuewould be recognised.

(a) A publisher sells books to a retailer on sale or return. It is impossible to estimate how many books will remain unsold.

(b) A retailer sells glasses worth Tshs.200 in exchange for Tshs.50 where the customer isrequired to return all glasses within 7 days or pay full price for those not returned. On average, 90% of glasses are returned.

(c) A recruitment agency has a contract with X to seek and appoint a new chiefexecutive. The contract is for a period of 18 months. On the appointment of theCE, the agency will receive a payment of Tshs.35,000.


E. IAS 20: ACCOUNTING FOR GOVERNMENT GRANTS

Governments often provide money to companies to export or promote local employment. These grants can be either revenue grants – those received for purposes other than the purchase of non-current assets – or capital grants for the purchase of non-current assets:

IAS 20 follows two general principles when determining the treatment of grants:

Grants should not be recognised until the conditions for receipt have been compliedwith and there is reasonable assurance the grant will be received;

Grants should be matched with the expenditure towards which they were intended to contribute.

Government grants should be recognised in the statement of comprehensive income so as tomatch them with the expenditure towards which they are intended to contribute. There aretwo possible methods of achieving this and both are permitted by the standard:

Firstly the grant could be set up as a deferred income account and amounts will bereleased to the income statement to match the usage of the asset.

The other method is to deduct the amount of the grant in arriving at the carryingamount of the asset.

Grants relating to leased assets in the accounts of lessors should be accounted for in accordance with the requirements of IAS 17.

The following information should be disclosed in the financial statements:

The accounting policy adopted for government grants.

The effects of government grants on the results for the period and/or the financialposition of the enterprise.

Where the results of the period are affected materially by the receipt of forms of government assistance other than grants, the nature of the assistance and, to theextent that the effects on the financial statements can be measured, an estimate ofthose effects.


F. IAS 24: RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

Quite often related parties enter into business transactions that unrelated parties might not. Such related party transactions occur regularly in business combinations – that between holding and subsidiary businesses (see chapters 10 and 11). Transactions that might occurin these relationships are;

Assets and liabilities might be transferred at values above or below market value

One party may make a loan to another at a beneficial rate

Services carried out by one party may be at a reduced rate.

If these sort of situations occur it would be useful, when we are analysing financial statements, to be aware of them and this is the area covered by IAS 24.

Definitions

A party is related to another entity if:

Directly or indirectly through one or more intermediaries the party controls, is controlledby, or is under common control with the entity, has an interest in the entity that gives itsignificant influence over it, or has joint control over the entity

The party is an associate of the entity (as defined in IAS 28)

The party is a joint venture in which the entity is a venturer (see IAS 31)

The party is a member of the key management personnel of the entity or its parent

The party is a close member of the family of an individual referred to in any of the above

The party is an entity that is controlled, jointly controlled or significantly influenced by,or for which significant voting power in such entity resides with, directly or indirectly an individual referred to above

The party is a post-employment benefit plan for the benefit of employees.

Close members of the family of an individual are further defined as an individual's domestic partner and children, children of the individual's domestic partner, and dependants of theindividual or domestic partner.

Requirements

These are in two areas:

Where no transactions have occurred between the parties, but control exists, then therelationship must be disclosed

Where transactions have occurred, the nature of the relationship, type of transaction,and elements of the transaction must be disclosed. Elements required to be disclosedare the amount of transaction, amount of outstanding balances, provision for doubtful debts and expense recognised during the period in respect of bad or doubtful debts, together with the name of the entity's parent and key management personnel.


G. IAS 33: EARNINGS PER SHARE

Earnings per share (EPS) is widely regarded as the most important indicator of a company's performance. It is important that users of the financial statements are able to compare both:

the EPS of different entities

the EPS of the same entity in different accounting periods.

IAS 33 requires earnings per share to be shown on the face of the statement ofcomprehensive income. It states that basic earnings per share shall be calculated as:

EPS Profit or loss attributable to ordinary shareholders

Weighted average number of ordinary sharesoutstandin g during the period

An entity also has to disclose on the face of the income statement the diluted earningsper share (DEPS) which requires adjustments to be made to both earnings and weightedaverage number of shares for the effects of all dilutive ordinary shares

An example of the income statement presentation could be as follows:

Statement of Comprehensive Income (extract)

Basic earnings per ordinary share of 25p

Year 2

16.25p

Year 1

13.0p

Fully-diluted earnings per ordinary share of 25p 12.85p

Notes to Accounts (extract)

The basic earnings per share are calculated on earnings of Tshs.1,300,000 (Yr 1Tshs.1,040,000) and eight million ordinary shares in issue throughout the two yearsended 31 December Yr 2.

The fully-diluted earnings per share are based on adjusted earnings ofTshs.1,430,000 after adding back interest net of corporation tax on the 8% convertibleloan stock. The maximum number of shares into which this stock becomes convertible on 31 December Yr 4 is 3.125 million, making a total of 11.125 millionshares issued and issuable.

Example

Shalmar had issued share capital on 31 December 200X as follows:

500,000 Tshs.1 preference shares carrying a dividend of 7% and 4,000,000 ordinary Tshs.0.25shares.

Profit after tax for the period ended 31 December 200X was Tshs.435,000.

On 1 October 200X Shalmar had issued a further 1 million ordinary shares at fullmarket value.

The numerator of the EPS figure will be:

43,500,000 – preference dividend of 3,500,000 40,000,000.

The denominator will be 3,000,000 x12

,

9 + 4,000,000 x 3 3,250,000 12

Therefore, EPS is:

40,000 000

,3,250 000

12.3p


Additional Share Issues During a Period

Businesses quite often issue bonus shares and rights shares. These need carefulconsideration when determining the denominator of the EPS calculation.

As a bonus issue is made from resources already within the business for the EPS, no matterat what point the bonus issue was made during the year, we assume it was made at thebeginning of the year. Thus, if in the above example the issue on the 1 October was a bonusissue, then the denominator would become 4,000,000.

A rights issue consists of both a bonus issue of shares and a new issue. To adjust thenumber of shares for the rights issue we multiply the number of shares in issue before rightsby the fair value per share immediately before rights divided by the theoretical ex rights price value per share. An example will demonstrate this rather complicated sounding calculation.

Example

Rose as at 30 June 200X has 600,000 ordinary shares in issue with a current market valueof Tshs.2 per share. On 1 July 200X, Rose makes a four for six rights issue at Tshs.1.75. Calculatethe weighted average number of shares in issue for the period ended 31 December 200X.

We need to calculate the theoretical ex-rights price as follows:

Market valuation of equity before rights 600,000 x Tshs.2 1,200,000

Proceeds from rights issue 400,000 x Tshs.1.75 700,000

1,000,000 1,900,000

,1,900 000

Therefore, the theoretical ex-rights price is: ,1,000 000

Tshs.1.90

Next we calculate the weighted average number of shares:

600000 x 6 x

12

2.

1 90

+ 1,000,000 x 6 815,789 12

H. IAS 37: PROVISIONS, CONTINGENT LIABILITIES ANDCONTINGENT ASSETS

IAS 37 effectively bans something known as big bath accounting – the creation of provisions where no obligation to a liability exists and the use of provisions to smooth profits.

Definitions

A provision is a liability of uncertain timing or amount. Remember from the framework that aliability is a present obligation of the business arising from past events, the settlement ofwhich is expected to result in the outflow of resources embodying economic benefits.

So what is an obligation? An obligation can either be legal or constructive. A legal obligationis one that derives from a contract, legislation or other operation of law. A contract can also become onerous. This occurs when the unavoidable costs of meeting the obligations under the contract exceed the economic benefits expected to be received from it.

A constructive obligation is an obligation that derives from an entity's actions where:

By an established pattern of past practice, published policies or a sufficiently specific current statement, the business has indicated to other parties that it will accept certainresponsibilities; and

As a result the business has created a valid expectation on the part of those otherparties that it will discharge those responsibilities.

A contingent liability is:


A possible obligation that arises from past events and whose existence will be confirmed only by the occurrence or non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future events not wholly within the control of the business; or

A present obligation that arises from past events, but is not recognised because it is not probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be required tosettle the obligation, or the amount of the obligation cannot be measured with sufficientreliability.

It can be quite difficult sometimes to decide whether an item is a provision or contingentliability, etc. so we provide you with a decision tree here that might help.

Figure 7.1: Decision tree to determine existence of provision or contingent liability

Start

Present obligation as a result of an obligating event?

Yes

Probableoutflow?

Yes

Reliableestimate?

Yes

Provide

No

No

No (rare)

Possible obligation?

Yes

Remote?

No

Disclose contingent

liability

No

Yes

Do nothing

A contingent asset is a possible asset that arises from past events and whose existence willbe confirmed only by the occurrence or non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future events not wholly within the control of the business


Now we have dealt with the definitions we must consider how to account for these items. Ifthe conditions for a provision are met (see the decision tree) and a reliable estimate can bemade of the amount, then this amount will be recognised in the statement of comprehensiveincome for the year and shown as a provision on the statement of financial position.

A contingent liability is not recognised in the financial statements, but it is disclosed asfollows:

A brief description of the nature

An estimate of the financial effect


An indication of the uncertainties relating to the amount or timing of outflow

The possibility of any reimbursement.

A contingent asset is not recognised in the accounts, but is disclosed if the inflow of economic benefits is probable. Note here that IAS 37 provides no definition for "probable"nor for "possible" or "remote".

Measurement of Provisions

How do we measure the "reliable estimate" required when we recognise a provision. IAS 37 informs us that the best estimate is determined in the judgement of management byexperience of similar transactions. Thus, management will need to keep details of previous warranties, bad debts, etc. to inform their judgement on the amount of such provisions required.


2. Identify how the following items should be treated in the financial statements of the stated business at year end 31 December 200X.

(a) An airline business is required by law to overhaul its aircraft once every fouryears. The aircraft were purchased a year ago.

(b) An entity has guaranteed a loan for another business. In March 200X thisbusiness placed itself in liquidation and there would appear to be insufficientfunds from the liquidation to repay the loan.

(c) A business leases a factory under an operating lease. Production is moved fromthe factory in March 200X, but the old factory cannot be relet nor the leasecancelled.

(d) No bill has been received for internet access supplied in the last quarter of the year.

3. A business sells goods under warranty. Past experience indicates that 75% of goods sold will have defects. 15% will have minor defects and 10% major defects. If minordefects occurred in all the items sold, the costs of rectification would be Tshs.2m and for major defects Tshs.5m. What is the amount of the provision that should be recorded in the financial statements at the statement of financial position date.


I. ACCOUNTING FOR RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENTEXPENDITURE

The accounting treatment of R & D is contained in IAS 38 Intangible assets. We examinedthis in the last chapter and here we consider the detail of how it applies to the specific issueof R & D.

Research is original and planned investigation undertaken with the prospect of gaining newscientific knowledge and understanding.


Development is the application of research findings or other knowledge to a plan or designfor the production of new or substantially improved materials, devices, products, processes systems or services before the start of commercial production or use.

The accounting policies to be followed in respect of research and development expendituremust have regard to the fundamental accounting concepts, including the accruals conceptby which revenue and costs are accrued, matched and dealt with in the period to which theyrelate, and the prudence concept by which revenue and profits are not anticipated but arerecognised only when realised in the form either of cash or of other assets, the ultimate cashrealisation of which can be established with reasonable certainty. As a result of the prudenceconcept, expenditure should be written off in the period in which it arises unless itsrelationship to the revenue of a future period can be established with reasonable certainty.

Types of R & D Expenditure

The term 'research and development' is used to cover a wide range of activities. Classification of the related expenditure is often dependent on the type of business and itsorganisation. However, it is generally possible to recognise three broad categories of activity,which are defined in SSAP 13 as follows:

(a) Pure (or Basic) Research

Experimental or theoretical work undertaken primarily to acquire new scientific ortechnical knowledge for its own sake, rather than directed towards any specific aim orapplication.

(b) Applied Research

Original or critical investigation undertaken in order to gain new scientific or technicalknowledge and directed towards a specific aim or objective.

(c) Development

Use of scientific or technical knowledge in order to produce new or substantiallyimproved materials, devices, products or services, to install new processes or systemsprior to the commencement of commercial production or commercial applications, or toimprove substantially those already produced or installed.


(a) The cost of non-current assets acquired or constructed in order to provide facilities for research and development activities over a number of accounting periods should be capitalised and written off over their useful life through the income statement.

Depreciation written off in this way should be treated as part of research anddevelopment expenditure.

(b) Expenditure on pure and applied research (other than that referred to above) should be written off in the year of expenditure through the income statement.

The argument for doing so is that this form of expenditure can be regarded as part of a continuing operation, required to maintain a company's business and its competitiveposition; and as no particular accounting period will benefit, it is appropriate to write offsuch expenditure when incurred.

(c) Development expenditure should be also written off in the year of expenditure exceptin the following circumstances when it may be deferred to future periods:

There is a clearly defined project, and

The related expenditure is separately identifiable, and

The outcome of the project has been assessed with reasonable certainty as to:


(i) Its technical feasibility, and

(ii) Its ultimate commercial viability considered in the light of factors such aslikely market conditions (including competing products), public opinion,consumer and environmental legislation, and

(iii) The aggregate of the deferred costs, any further development costs, andrelated production, selling and administration costs is reasonably expected to be exceeded by related future sales or other ventures, and

(iv) Adequate resources exist, or are reasonably expected to be available, toenable the project to be completed and to provide any consequentialincreases in working capital.

In the circumstances above, development expenditure may be deferred to the extent that its recovery can be reasonably regarded as assured.

Deferred development expenditure for each project should be reviewed at the end ofeach accounting period and where the circumstances which have justified the deferral of the expenditure no longer apply, or are considered doubtful, the expenditure, to theextent to which it is considered to be irrecoverable, should be written off immediately,project by project.

Development expenditure should be amortised over its useful life as soon as commercial production begins.

Disclosure

(a) The accounting policy on research and development expenditure should be stated, andexplained in the notes to the financial accounts.

(b) The standard requires the amount of R & D costs to be charged to the statement ofcomprehensive income (although some enterprises have exemption from this). What is needed is disclosure analysed between the current year's expenditure and amountsamortised from deferred expenditure. The standard emphasises that the amountsdisclosed should include any amortisation of fixed assets used in R & D activity

J. ACCOUNTING FOR INFLATION

In recent years accountants and other interested parties have become increasingly aware ofthe problem posed by the impact of inflation on financial accounts. The problem can beanalysed into two main factors:

Maintaining intact in real terms the value of capital invested.

Showing a true and fair view of trading results when certain charges, notablydepreciation, are based on historical cost.

After many years of debate, the UK Accounting Standards Committee issued SSAP 16 on Current Cost Accounting in 1980. This has subsequently been abandoned, so companies can produce final published accounts without supplementary current cost statements. However, it will be useful here to briefly review some of the main points of what remains anissue in accounting. The IASB have not issued a standard on accounting for inflation (exceptfor hyperinflationary economies). However, it is still the subject of much debate, especially inrespect of "fair value".

Limitations of Historical Cost Reporting

By this point in your studies, you will have no doubt become aware of the limitations of cost reporting using the historical accounting convention. Those limitations include:

(a) Unrealistic non-current Asset Values


The values of some assets, particularly land and property, may increase substantiallyover the years, especially in times of high inflation. This makes comparisons between organisations using ratios such as return on capital employed very dangerous. Youmust ensure that you are comparing like with like. Also, it is not sensible for a businessto undervalue its assets.

(b) Invalid Comparisons over Time

Because of the changing value of money a profit of Tshs.50,000 achieved this year is not worth the same as Tshs.50,000 profit earned five years ago. Again, there is the problem ofcomparing like with like.

(c) Inadequate Depreciation

The annual depreciation charge may not be a true indicator of the economic value ofthe asset used in that year.

(d) Holding Gains Not Disclosed

Assume that we buy an article on 1 January for Tshs.100 and sell it on 31 March for Tshs.200. Historical cost accounting tells us that a profit of Tshs.100 has been made and we may betempted to withdraw Tshs.100 and spend it on private needs. However, if at 31 March it costs us Tshs.150 to replace the article sold, we cannot now do so because we have onlyTshs.100 left. The true position at 31 March when the article was sold was a holding gainof Tshs.50 and an operating profit of only Tshs.50.

(e) Gains on Liabilities and Losses on Assets Not Shown

This means that we will pay creditors in money worth less than when we bought goods but, similarly, debtors will pay us in money worth less than when we sold goods.

You should be able to appreciate that the effect of the above problems will lead to anoverstatement of what might be considered to be the correct profit figure. This may lead tocompanies being pressed by shareholders to declare higher dividends than is prudent andalmost certainly will lead to higher taxation!

Current Cost Accounting (CCA)

The purpose of preparing current cost accounts was to provide more useful informationthan that available from purely historical cost accounts, for the guidance of themanagement and shareholders of a business and others in matters of financial viability,return on investment, pricing policy, cost control and gearing.

CCA is based on the concept of capital represented by the net operating assets of a business, i.e. non-current assets, inventory and monetary working capital. These are no different from a historical cost approach but in current cost accounts the non-current assetsand inventory are expressed at current cost. The net operating assets represent in accounting terms the operating capability of the business and will be financed by a mixture ofshareholder's capital and borrowings. Any changes to input prices of goods and services affect the operating capability of a business and the current cost accounting approach isdesigned to reflect this.

(a) Application of CCA

The CCA objectives were achieved by determining the current cost profits for anaccounting period and presenting asset values in the statement of financial positionbased on current price levels. This then provided for users of the financial statementsa realistic view of the assets employed in the business, and enabled the relationshipbetween current cost profit and net assets employed to be established.


The preparation of current cost accounts did not affect the use of existing techniquesfor interpretation (see next chapter). The same tools for analysis could be adopted, as appropriate, for both current and historical cost figures. The results, however, should be more meaningful on a current cost basis when making comparisons between entities in respect of gearing, asset cover, dividend cover, return on capital employed,etc.

CCA was not a system of accounting for general inflation and equally did not show theeconomic value of a business. This is because it did not measure changes in the general value of money, or give any indication of the market value of the equity.

(b) CCA Technique and Methods

Current Cost Operating Profit

This is the surplus calculated before taxation and interest on net borrowingarising from ordinary activities in a financial period, after allowing for the impact of price changes on funds needed to maintain the operating capability of thebusiness.

Trading profit before interest calculated on a historical cost basis had to beadjusted with regard to three main aspects to arrive at current cost operatingprofit. The main adjustments were in respect of depreciation, cost of sales, andmonetary working capital.

Depreciation Adjustment

This was the difference, caused by price changes, between the value to the business of the proportion of non-current assets consumed during a period, andthe amount of depreciation charged for that period on a historical cost basis.

The total depreciation charged in a financial period on a current cost basisrepresented the value to the business of that proportion of non-current assetsconsumed in generating revenue for that period.

Cost of Sales Adjustment (COSA)

This was the difference, caused by price changes, between the value to thebusiness of inventory consumed during an accounting period and the cost of the inventory charged on a historical cost basis.

The total inventory value charged in a financial period on a current cost basisrepresented the value to the business of the inventory consumed in generatingrevenue for that period.

Monetary Working Capital Adjustment (MWCA)

The aggregate monetary value arising from day-to-day operating activities as distinct from transactions of a capital nature, i.e.:

Trade debtors, prepayments and trade bills receivable

plus

Inventory not subject to Cost of Sales Adjustment (COSA)

less

Trade creditors, accruals and trade bills payable

When credit sales are made, funds are tied up in debtors, and conversely if inputgoods and services are obtained on credit, funds needed for working capital are less than they would have been if such inputs had to be paid for immediately. These aspects are an integral part of an enterprise's monetary working capital and had to be taken into account when determining the current cost profit.


The adjustment represented the additional (or reduced) finance needed on a current cost basis during a financial period as a result of changes in prices ofgoods and services used to generate revenue for that period.

(c) Gearing Adjustment

A gearing adjustment had to be made before arriving at the current cost profitattributable to shareholders, where a proportion of the net operating assets was financed by borrowing. The adjustment, where applicable, would normally be a credit(but could be a debit if prices fell) and was calculated by:

Using average figures for the financial period to express net borrowing as aproportion of net operating assets; and

Using this proportion to calculate the shareholders' portion of charges (or credits) made to allow for the impact of price changes on the net operating assets.

No gearing adjustment arose where a company was wholly financed by shareholders'capital.

It could be argued that, rather than applying the gearing adjustment only to realisedholding gains etc., it could also (ignoring accruals and prudence) be applied to allholding gains no matter whether realised or unrealised. The feeling behind this is thatas the gearing adjustment ignores unrealised gains, the profit figure only partiallyreflects gains attributable to the shareholder involvement.

Remember that the net figure of the gearing adjustment and interest takes out theeffect of outside interest in a business, to produce the current cost net profit attributableto shareholders. Gearing only applies where there is a net borrowing. Where there are net monetary assets, no gearing is used.

This idea can be challenged on the basis that if gains can be made from borrowing then losses can be made from having surplus monetary assets and, because of this,the current cost profit could be overstated.

(d) Indices and Valuation

There are basically two methods of effecting any adjustment to reflect price changes: the use of indices and revaluation. Much will depend on the industry, the enterprise,the class or category of asset involved, and on the circumstances. Whichever methodis selected, it is important for it to be appropriate and consistent, taking one financialperiod with the next.

Where indices were to be used, reference was to be made to two HMSO publications:

Price Index Numbers for Current Cost Accounting

Current Cost Accounting – Guide to Price Indices for Overseas Countries

Indices would probably be appropriate for COSA and MWCA but for fixed assets and depreciation, revaluation could be more appropriate in some cases. If revaluation was to be used, the accountant or auditors had to seek the technical assistance ofengineers and surveyors.

(e) Valuation of Assets

The profit figure and its significance depends on the concept of capital maintenanceselected. The basic approach to current value accounting is that a business shouldonly strike its operating profit after providing in full for the replacement cost of the


assets used up in earning that profit. Unrealised holding gains should be deducted butreported separately.

The underlying values to be placed on the assets are defined as their value to thebusiness. In all cases this will be net current replacement cost, or the recoverable amount if below the net current replacement cost. The recoverable amount may in turn be either the net realisable value or the amount recoverable from its further use in thebusiness. The amount recoverable from an asset's further use is alternatively knownas its economic value.

The underlying concept of "value to the business" has been expressed as a deprivalvalue. In other words, the amount of loss a business would suffer if it weredeprived of the asset in question. Should the business intend to continue to use theasset, then the deprival value would be its net replacement cost. On the other hand, ifit intended to put the asset out of use then its deprival value would be either the net realisable value from sale or the cash flow benefits from continuing to use the asset.

Let's define these values further:

Replacement cost – In the case of non-current assets, the replacement cost isthe gross replacement cost less an appropriate provision for depreciation toreflect the amount of its life already used up.

Net realisable value – This is the amount the asset could be sold for, afterdeducting any disposal costs.

Economic value (or utility) – This represents what the asset will be worth to thecompany over the rest of its useful life.

Financial and Operating Capital Maintenance Concepts

Operating capital can be expressed in a number of ways, although it is usual to express itas the productive capacity of the company's assets in terms of the volume of goods andservices capable of being produced. The maintenance of operating capital may be best understood by looking at examples:

A book trader buys and sells one publication only. He incurs no costs other than the cost of purchasing books and has no assets other than unsold books, which means that his operating capital consists entirely of unsold books.

Under the historical cost convention he will recognise a profit if the revenue from the sale of a book exceeds the cost he incurred when acquiring that book. Under theoperating capital maintenance concept, he will recognise a profit only if the revenueexceeds the cost of buying another book to replace the one sold. The cost of thisreplacement is the cost of maintaining the operating capital.

A mini-cab driver's only costs are the depreciation of the mini-cab and the cost of the petrol. His operating capital consists of the mini-cab and the petrol in its tank.

Under the historical cost convention he will recognise a profit if the fares during a period exceed the historical (i.e. original) cost of the petrol and of the element of themini-cab consumed in earning those fares (i.e. the historical cost depreciation charge). Under the operating capital maintenance concept, he will recognise a profit only if the fare exceeds the current (i.e. replacement) cost of the petrol and of the element of themini-cab consumed (i.e. the current cost depreciation charge).

Profit under the operating capital maintenance concept depends upon the effects of specificprice changes on the operating capital, that is the net operating assets of the business. Some systems also take into account the way in which these net assets are financed.

The alternative capital maintenance concept is that of financial capital maintenance.


Financial capital maintenance in money terms is the familiar foundation to historical costaccounting.

A system of accounting which measures whether a company's financial capital (i.e.shareholders' funds) is maintained in real terms, and which involves the measurement ofassets at current cost, is known as the real-terms system of accounting. The method isappropriate for all types of company and is particularly suitable for value-based and othertypes of company that do not have a definable operating capital. The basic approach toprofit measurement under the real-terms system is to:

(a) Calculate the shareholders' funds at the beginning of the period based on current costasset values.

(b) Restate that amount in terms of pounds of the reporting date (by adjusting (a) by the relevant change in a general index such as the RPI).

(c) Compare (b) with the shareholders' funds at the end of the year based on current costasset values.

This comparison indicates whether or not the real financial capital has been maintained. If the year-end figure is larger than the restated opening figure, a real-terms profit has beenmade.

Which of the two concepts of capital maintenance – operating or financial – should a company adopt?

Both are useful in appropriate circumstances. They have different objectives and the choice of which to use depends in part on the nature of the company's business.

Some companies may wish to provide information based on both concepts. A real-termssystem can incorporate both concepts. Operating profit is reported using the operatingcapital maintenance concept but then incorporates various gains and losses that result from changes in the value of the assets and liabilities of the business, to yield a final measure oftotal gains which is based on real financial capital maintenance.

A company that is seeking to measure the real return on its shareholders' capital will do this by comparing its capital at the end of the period with opening shareholders' invested capital restated in terms of constant purchasing power. In this way the company will show itsshareholders whether it has succeeded not only in preserving their initial investment, but inincreasing it. Alternatively, where the company's aim is to demonstrate its capacity tocontinue in existence by ensuring that, at the end of the accounting period, it is as capable ofproducing a similar quantity of goods and services as it was at the beginning, profit would beregarded as the surplus remaining only after its operating capital had been maintained.

Users' Needs

A company may determine its reporting objective based on its perception of the users of its accounts. To shareholders in general, a financial capital maintenance view mayseem the most natural. They may be uneasy with the operating capital maintenanceconcept, which charges against profit the full cost of replacement of assets used when those assets have risen in cost, but does not credit to profit any of the gain derivedfrom buying those assets at historical costs which were below current cost. Managers and employees, however, may consider shareholders to be only one of the manystakeholders in a company and consider the company's major objective as maintainingits ability to produce goods and services.

Employees and management therefore could well look at a company's objectives in terms of maintaining operating capital.

Nature of Company


The selection of reporting method is often influenced by the nature of the company's business. Financial capital maintenance is more suitable for companies in which assetvalue increases are viewed as an alternative to trading as means of generating gains. It is particularly suitable for companies which do not have an easily definable operatingcapital to maintain, or for companies that do not have the maintenance of theiroperating capital as an objective. Some companies involved in unique ordiscontinuous ventures, such as the extraction or construction industries or commoditytrading, may find it difficult if not impossible to define their operating capital.

The true measure of the performance of such companies in times of inflation is theirability to produce real profits, above the level of those nominal profits which arisesimply as a result of general inflation. The consistent measurement of real gainsrequires not only that opening capital be adjusted by a general index, but also thatassets be valued at their current costs.

A company could maintain its operating capital while the current cost of its assets falls. A case could, therefore, be made for all companies to report the change in their realfinancial capital even after determining profit using an operating capital maintenancemethod.

The real-terms system is able to provide both a profit figure on an operating capital maintenance concept and a broader figure which encompasses gains on holding assets, tothe extent that these are real gains after allowing for inflation. Which of these figures is found to be most useful will depend on the circumstances. For example, in the case of amanufacturing company which intends to maintain its present operating capital, current costoperating profit may be an important piece of information to an investor wishing to estimate future earning capacity (while the real gain or loss on assets held may be relativelyunimportant). Conversely, for a property company, in which capital appreciation of properties may be as important a factor as rents earned, the wider concept of total gains may be considered relatively more important.

One objection which may be made against the total gains concept is that, like operatingcapital, it relies heavily on asset valuations which may be subjective. Moreover, in the real-terms system, annual changes in such valuations directly affect reported total gains, whereas in the operating capital approach they are taken to current cost reserve and affect reported current cost profit only gradually through the depreciation adjustment. The objection aboutthe subjectivity of asset valuations may have greater force in particular circumstances, forexample, the partly-used assets of a manufacturing operation will probably be more difficultto value at current cost than will the assets of a property investment company. However, thereal-terms system, in which changes in asset values affect reported total gains, is perhapsmore likely to be used by companies whose assets are relatively easy to value at currentcost. Despite the practical problems that sometimes arise, it can be argued that greaterusefulness compensates for less objectivity.



1. (a) The risks and rewards do not pass in this case until the retailer has sold the books. No revenue is recognised until the books are sold by the retailer.

(b) In this case the glasses have not been sold, but rather the right to use them. Revenue of Tshs.50 plus Tshs.20 would be recognised.

(c) The revenue of Tshs.35,000 will not be recognised until the service is actuallycomplete – i.e. when the CE appointed.

2. (a) This is not a provision or a contingent liability as, at the date of the statement offinancial position, there is no obligation to overhaul the aircraft independent of future action. The business could sell the aircraft to avoid the overhaul.

(b) The business has an obligation to fulfil the guarantee. A provision should berecognised for the amount of the guarantee.

(c) This is an onerous contract. A provision is required to reflect the unavoidable lease payments.

(d) This is an accrual

3. The value of the provision will be:

(75% x 0) + (15% x Tshs.2m) + (10% x Tshs.5m) Tshs.0.8m

Chapter 7

Assessing Financial Performance

Contents

A. Interpretation of Accounts

Matters of Interest

The Perspective

B. Ratio Analysis

Common Accounting Ratios Sample Set of Accounts

C. Profitability Ratios

Profit : Capital Employed

Secondary Ratios Expense Ratios

Non-current Asset Turnover Ratio

D. Liquidity Ratios

Working Capital or Current Ratio (Current Assets : Current Liabilities)

163

Page

165

165

166

167

168168

170

170

171172

172

172

173

Quick Asset or Acid Test Ratio (Current Assets less Inventory : Current Liabilities) 173

E. Efficiency Ratios

Inventory Ratios (Closing inventory : Cost of Sales per Day)

Inventory Turnover

Debtors Ratio

Creditors Ratio

F. Capital Structure Ratios

Shareholders' Funds : Total Indebtedness

Shareholders' Funds : Non-current Assets

Capital Gearing Ratio Cost of Capital

174

174

174

175

175

176

176

176

176177

(Continued over)

164 Assessing Financial Performance

G. Investment Ratios

Ordinary Dividend Cover

Earnings per Share Dividend Yield Ratio

Price : Earnings Ratio

Other Useful Ratios

H. Limitations of Accounting Ratios

177177

178178

178

179

179

I. Worked Examples

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

181

181

184

186

J. Issues in Interpretation

Financial Dangers and their Detection

Interpretation of Statement of Comprehensive Income

Interpretation of Statement of Financial Position

Capital Gearing

Capital Position

Answer to Question for Practice

188

188

190

190

191

194

197

Assessing Financial Performance 165

A. INTERPRETATION OF ACCOUNTS

Interpretation – or comprehension, assessment or criticism – of accounts usually means the interpretation of statements of financial position and of comprehensive income (often referredto as "final accounts" or "financial statements") or their equivalent.

Such accounts may be either:

Published accounts, i.e. those prepared for the information of shareholders, etc; or

Internal accounts, i.e. those prepared for the information of the directors andmanagement.

The second type, being the accounts upon which the policy of the concern is based, areusually in much greater detail than the first.

In either case, greater reliance can be placed on accounts which have been audited by aprofessional firm of standing; in particular accounts drawn up by a trader himself are alwaysopen to question.

The primary object of interpretation of accounts is the provision of information. Interpretationwhich does not serve this purpose is useless.

The type of information to be provided depends on the nature and circumstances of the business and the terms of reference. By the latter we mean the specific instructions given bythe person wanting the enquiry to the person making it. Of course, if the person making theenquiry is also the person who will make use of the information thus obtained, he will beaware of the particular points for which he is looking.

The position of the ultimate recipient of the information must be especially noted. Thus, suppose that you are asked by a debenture holder to comment on the statement of financial position of an enterprise in which he/she is interested. It would be a waste of time to reportat length on any legal defects revealed in the statement of financial position. You wouldnaturally pay attention to such points as particularly concerned the debenture holder – forexample, the security of his loan to the enterprise and the extent to which his interest on thedebentures is "covered" by the annual profits. This does not mean that legal defects shouldbe ignored. It is very important that they should be mentioned (although briefly), for failure to comply with legal requirements may be indicative of more serious shortcomings, possiblydetrimental to the security of the debenture holder.

Matters of Interest

The interpreter must consider and form conclusions on the following matters.

(a) Profitability

How does the profit in relation to capital employed compare with other and alternativeuses of the capital?

(b) Solvency

Can the business pay its creditors, should they demand immediate payment?

Does the enterprise have sufficient working capital?

Is it under- or over-trading?

(c) Financial Strength

What is the credit position of the enterprise?

Has it reached the limit of its borrowing powers?

Is it good policy to retain some profits in the business?


(d) Trends

Are profits rising or falling?

What are the future profit prospects, based on recent planning and investment?

(e) Gearing and Cover

What is the gearing (see later) of the enterprise?

What does this imply for the future dividend prospects of shareholders?

The Perspective

So vital is this matter of approach to the task of interpretation that we shall now considercertain special matters in which various persons will be particularly interested. For the sakeof illustration, we will deal with their positions in relation to the accounts of a UK limitedcompany.

(a) Debenture Holder

Debentures may be secured on non-current assets and/or current assets; they maycover uncalled and unissued capital as well. Much depends on the terms of the issue. As a secured creditor, therefore, the debenture holder is primarily concerned with therealisable value of the assets which form the security. He will therefore pay attentionto the following:

(i) Bases of valuation of assets; whether depreciation has been provided out of profits and, if so, whether it is adequate.

(ii) Whether any provision, such as a sinking fund, has been made for repayment ofdebentures (if not irredeemable) or for replacement of non-current assets.

(iii) Adequacy of working capital (for if no cash resources exist, the interest cannot bepaid).

(iv) Profits earned; although debenture interest is a charge against profits, itspayment in the long run depends on the earning of profits.

He will be interested in (iii) and (iv) from the point of view of annual interest.

Point (iv) particularly concerns a debenture holder whose security takes the form of afloating charge over all of the assets, for the assets (his security) are augmented ordepleted by profits and losses.

(b) Trade Creditor

As a general rule, a trade creditor will rely on trade references or personal knowledgewhen forming an opinion on the advisability of granting or extending credit to acompany. He is not often concerned with the accounts, which he rarely sees, but if he does examine the accounts he will be as much concerned with existing liabilities aswith assets. In particular, he will note the following:

(i) The existence of secured debts.

(ii) The net balance available for unsecured creditors.

(iii) The existence of uncalled capital and undistributed profits.

(iv) The adequacy of working capital.

Profits are of minor importance in this connection, but a series of losses would provide a warning.

(c) Banker


In deciding whether to grant overdraft facilities to a company, a banker will study withgreat care all the points mentioned in (a) and (b) above. He will also wish to beassured that the company can pay off the overdraft within a reasonable time. This may necessitate an estimate as to future profits, dividends, capital commitments, othercommitments, e.g. loan repayments, leasing obligations, and whether any assets canbe pledged as security.

(d) Shareholder

The average shareholder is interested in the future dividends he will receive. Future profits are of secondary importance, so long as they are adequate to provide thedividend.

Past dividends provide the basis on which future dividends may be estimated, just as past profits afford a similar indication as to future profits. Estimates may, however, be upset because of radical changes in the nature of trade, production methods, generaleconomic conditions, etc.

It is usually recognised that the single most influential factor in determining a company's share price is the amount of dividend paid. Any shareholder will want toensure that the level of dividend paid is sustainable, i.e. that that much is not just beingdistributed in order falsely to support the market price of the shares.

The "cover" is a useful way of comparing or appraising a company's dividend policy. This ratio is obtained by dividing the after-tax profits by the amount of the dividend.

B. RATIO ANALYSIS

In order to measure the success or failure of a business, financial analysts often use figuresobtained from the annual accounts. Some figures will be more useful to the analyst thanothers. Absolute figures are usually of little importance, so it is necessary to comparefigures by means of accounting ratios in order to interpret the information meaningfully.

The purpose of calculating accounting ratios is to try to shed light on the financial progress orotherwise of a company by discovering trends and movements in the relationships between figures. The trends revealed will have implications for a company's progress. For example,by comparing the movements of the number of days' sales held in stock from one year toanother, an increasing propensity to manufacture for stock may be noticed. This could beinferred from a continuing increase in the number of days' sales held in stock, but it would notbe apparent from an examination of stock and sales figures in isolation. A tendency tomanufacture for stock could imply a drop in demand for a company's product, which is aserious matter when considering a company's prospects.

Accounting ratios are only a guide and cannot form the basis for final conclusions – they onlyoffer clues and point to factors requiring further investigation. The ratios obtained are subjectto the same weaknesses as the financial statements from which they are computed. Theyare of little value unless they are compared with other ratios.

Thus, it is very important to realise that there is no "correct ratio" for any particular business. What is far more significant than a particular ratio is, say, movement in that ratio from year toyear; e.g. a steady decline over the years in a firm's working capital is symptomatic offinancial weakness, rather than being the weakness itself. A person's weight is not in itself ofgreat significance, but weight considered in relation to height and age becomes significant when it changes dramatically.

Ratios are, therefore, used to enable comparisons to be made:

to compare the performance of the business with previous years.


to compare the actual performance of the business with the budgeted or plannedperformance.

to compare results with the performance of similar businesses.

It is very important, also, to realise that financial accounting statements do not provideunlimited information or ready conclusions. The accounts display only those aspects of theorganisation that can be translated into money terms. This is, of course, only part of thepicture. Other assets are not usually reflected in the accounts, e.g. skills of the workforce.

Thus, we may establish that a business has improved its performance over previous years. However, this does not necessarily mean that the result is satisfactory. It may be moremeaningful to compare actual performance with planned performance or, alternatively,compare performance with similar firms in the same industry.

If we adopt the latter method, we must remember that all the information that is required may not be available from an ordinary set of published accounts, and also that accounting rulesare capable of different interpretation. Therefore, when examining published accounts, wemay not be comparing like with like and it is essential to be aware of this fact when makingcomparisons and drawing conclusions.

It is vital to ensure that the items to be compared are defined in the same terms andmeasured by the same rules. For example, one business may have revalued its assets in line with inflation, whereas another may be showing its assets at historical cost.

Common Accounting Ratios

The main ratios that should be investigated will cover the following areas:

Profitability

Liquidity

Efficiency

Capital structure

Investment

We shall examine the types of ratio in each area over the next few sections. However, firstwe need to establish a common basis for illustrating their operation.

Sample Set of Accounts

As an aid to describing the ratios employed in interpreting accounts, we shall use the following annual accounts of ABC Ltd.

ABC Ltd


Statement of Comprehensive Income

Year 4

Tshs. Tshs. Tshs.

Year 5

Tshs.

Sales

less: Production: cost of goods sold Administration expenses

900,000

630,000

135,000

1,200,000

818,000

216,000

Selling and distribution expenses 45,000 810,000 64,000 1,098,000

Net Profit

less: Corporation tax

90,000

36,000

102,000

40,800

Proposed dividends 54,000 90,000 61,200 102,000

Retained Profits NIL NIL

Statement of Financial Position as at 31 December Year 5

Tshs.

Year 4

Tshs.

Non-current Assets

Tshs.

Year 5

Tshs.

300,000 190,000

Land & Buildings Plant & machinery

662,000 180,000

10,000 500,000 Motor vehicles

Current Assets

8,000 850,000

100,000

50,000

Inventory

Trade receivables

150,000

95,000

50,000 200,000 Bank

less Current Liabilities

5,000 250,000

54,000 Proposed dividends 61,200

46,000 100,000 Trade payables

100,000 Net Current assets

600,000

Represented by:

Share Capital

Authorised –

138,800 200,000

50,000

900,000

800,000 800,000 ordinary shares of Tshs.1 each 800,000

Issued and fully paid – 500,000

54,000

Ordinary shares of Tshs.1 each

Reserves

General reserve

800,000

80,000

46,000 100,000 Retained profits

600,000

20,000 100,000

900,000


C. PROFITABILITY RATIOS

Before we start to investigate the ratios which can shed light on the profitability of a company,we need to clarify exactly which figures we need to use. The following definitions are,therefore, important.

(a) Profit

There is some debate as to what figure should be taken for profit, i.e. should the figureused be net profit before or after tax and interest? Some argue that changes incorporation tax rates over a number of years can obscure the ratio of net profit after taxto capital employed; others, that taxation management is a specialist job and that profitafter tax should therefore be used. The important thing is to be consistent and it may be better in practice to compute both ratios.

Another point to remember is that gains or losses of an abnormal nature should be excluded from net profit in order to produce a realistic ratio.

(b) Capital Employed

It is also necessary to decide which of the following items should be used as capital employed:

Total shareholders' funds, i.e. share capital plus reserves.

Net assets, i.e. total assets less current liabilities (when loans are included it isnecessary to add back loan interest to net profit).

Net assets less value of investments, i.e. excluding any capital which is additional to the main activities of the business, with a view to assessing thereturn achieved by management in their particular field (if this approach isadopted it is also necessary to deduct the investment income from the net profit).

Gross assets, i.e. total assets as in the assets side of the statement of financial position.

Again there is no general agreement as to which of the above methods should be adopted for the calculation of capital employed.

(c) Asset Valuation

A further factor to consider is that the assets are normally recorded in the statement offinancial position on a historical cost basis. A clearer picture emerges if all the assets, including goodwill, are revalued at their current going-concern value, so that net profit,measured each year at current value, can be compared against the current value ofcapital employed.

Profit : Capital Employed

The return on capital employed (ROCE) is the first ratio to calculate, since a satisfactoryreturn is the ultimate aim of any profit-seeking organisation. The return on capital employedis sometimes called the primary ratio.

We will use "Net profit before tax : Net assets" as the basis for the calculation. The formulaand results for ABC Ltd are as follows:

ProfitCapital employed

Year 4

90,000 600,000

15%

Year 5

102,000 900,000

11.33%

What conclusions can we draw from the above ratios?


(a) We need to consider the decline in profitability in Year 5 in relation to the currenteconomic climate. It may be that the decline can be accounted for by the fact that theindustry as a whole is experiencing a recession, so the ratio of this company should becompared with that of similar firms.

(b) Another factor to consider is that ABC Ltd appears to have spent Tshs.362,000 on additional land and buildings. If the buildings were purchased in December Year 5 itwould be wrong to include this additional amount as capital employed for Year 5. Insuch circumstances it is advisable to use average capital employed rather than the year-end figure. This illustrates the fact that ratios are only a guide and cannot form the basis for final conclusions.

Secondary Ratios

The decline in the return on capital employed in Year 5 may be due either to a decline in the profit margins or to not utilising capital as efficiently in relation to the volume of sales. Therefore, the two secondary ratios which we shall now examine are Net profit : Sales and Sales : Capital. (It can also be useful to calculate the gross profit margin, i.e. Gross profit :Sales.)

(a) Net Profit : Sales (Net Profit Margin or Percentage)

This ratio measures average profit on sales. The percentage net profit to sales for ABCLimited was 10% in Year 4 and 8.5% in Year 5, which means that each Tshs.1 sale made an average profit of 10 pence in Year 4 and 8.5 pence in Year 5.

The percentage profit on sales varies with different industries and it is essential tocompare this ratio with that of other firms in the same industry. For instance,supermarkets work on low profit margins while furniture stores work on high profit margins.

(b) Sales : Capital Employed

If profit margins do decline, the return on capital employed can only be maintained byincreasing productivity unless there is a greater proportionate increase in capital employed.

The ratio measures the efficiency with which the business utilises its capital in relationto the volume of sales.

A high ratio is a healthy sign, for the more times capital is turned over, the greaterwill be the opportunities for making profit.

A low ratio may indicate unused capacity.

Like the Net profit : Sales ratio, this ratio varies considerably according to the type ofbusiness concerned. Again, a supermarket may work on low profit margins with a veryhigh turnover while a furniture store works on higher profit margins with a lowerturnover.

SalesCapital employed

Year 4

900,000600,000

1.5 times

Year 5

1,200,000900,000

1.33 times

This indicates that each Tshs.1 capital employed produced on average a sale of Tshs.1.50 in Year 4 and Tshs.1.33 in Year 5.

What are the possible reasons for the decline in this ratio?

It may be that additional capital has not been justified by increased sales.


Alternatively, there may have been expansion of plant facilities based onexpectation of future sales.

Expense Ratios

The next question we may ask is "Why have profit margins on sales declined?" To answerthis question, we must calculate the following expense ratios:

Production expenses : Sales

Administration expenses : Sales

Selling and distribution expenses : Sales

Net profit : Sales

Year 4

%

70

15

5

10

100

Year 5

%

68.16

18.00

5.34

8.50

100.00

We could analyse these items still further by examining the individual items of expense fallingwithin each category, e.g. Material costs of production : Sales, Office salaries : Sales.

On the basis of the above information, we may be justified in investigating the administrativeexpenses in detail to account for the increased percentage in Year 5.

Non-current Asset Turnover Ratio

In order to find out why capital has not been utilised as efficiently in relation to the volume ofsales, we now consider the fixed asset turnover ratio (Sales : non-current assets). If the ratio is low this may indicate that assets are not being fully employed. The accounts of ABCreveal the following ratios:

SalesFixed assets

Year 4

900,000500,000

1.8 times

Year 5

1,200,000 850,000

1.4 times

This indicates that each Tshs.1 invested in non-current assets produced on average a sale ofTshs.1.80 in Year 4 and Tshs.1.40 in Year 5. In practice, it may be advisable to compare the ratio for each individual non-current asset and not merely total non-current assets. The reasons for the decline of Sales : Capital employed may apply equally to this ratio.

D. LIQUIDITY RATIOS

The objects of any business are to earn high profits and remain solvent. Becauseaccountants realise revenue when the goods are delivered and match expenses with revenue, it follows that profits may not be represented by cash. Therefore, a company may be successful from a profitability point of view but may still have liquidity problems.

The following areas should be examined when investigating the liquidity position of a company:

(a) Working Capital

Has the company sufficient funds to meet its working capital requirements?

(b) Immediate Commitments

Has the company sufficient resources to meet its immediate commitments?

(c) Inventory Control

Is the company carrying excessive inventories?

(d) Debtors and Creditors Control


Is the company maintaining adequate credit control of debtors and creditors? Don'tforget that debtors are quite often referred to as trade receivables and creditors tradepayables under the international accounting regime.

The two main liquidity ratios – the current and quick asset ratios – are examined below. Note, though, that inventory turnover and the debtors and creditors ratios examined in the next section (under efficiency ratios) may also be used to provide information about liquidity.

Working Capital or Current Ratio (Current Assets : Current Liabilities)

This ratio compares current assets, which will become liquid in 12 months, with liabilities due for payment within 12 months (i.e. it measures the number of times current assets covercurrent liabilities). Therefore, the ratio measures the margin of safety that managementmaintains in order to allow for the inevitable unevenness in the flow of funds through thecurrent asset and liability accounts.

Creditors will want to see a sufficiently large amount of current assets to cover currentliabilities. Traditionally it has been held that current assets should cover current liabilities atleast twice, i.e. 2:1, but this depends on the type of business and the requirements ofindividual firms. Generally, a low ratio indicates lack of liquidity and a high ratio indicates inefficient use of capital.

An investigation of the accounts of ABC Ltd reveals that current assets cover currentliabilities twice in Year 4 and 1.25 times in Year 5.

The decline in Year 5 may cause concern but whether this ratio is held to be satisfactorydepends on the length of the period from when the cash is paid out for production until cash is received from the customer. It may well be that any planned increase in production isbeing held back because of lack of funds, and that additional permanent capital is requiredby means of an issue of shares or debentures.

Quick Asset or Acid Test Ratio (Current Assets less Inventory : Current Liabilities)

It is advisable to investigate not only the ability of a company to meet its commitments overthe next 12 months but also its ability to meet immediate commitments. Only assets whichcan be quickly turned into cash are included, so inventories are excluded from current assetssince they may have to be processed into finished goods and sold to customers on credit.

Ideally we would expect to see a ratio of 1:1. If the ratio were below 1:1 and creditors pressed for payment, the company would have great difficulty in meeting its commitments. Ifthe ratio were above 1:1, it could be argued that the company was carrying too high aninvestment in funds which are not earning any return. The ratios for ABC Ltd are 1:1 in Year 4 and 0.5:1 in Year 5.

The ratio for Year 5 appears to be a cause for concern, though much depends on how longthe debtors and creditors accounts have been outstanding. Nevertheless, if creditors pressed for payment the company would not have sufficient funds available to pay them. Do not forget, however, that the ratios are taken from figures recorded at one point in time and the position may have been considerably different on 1 January Year 6.


E. EFFICIENCY RATIOS

Inventory Ratios (Closing inventory : Cost of Sales per Day)

Excessive inventories should be avoided since, apart from incidental costs (e.g. storage and insurance), capital will be tied up which perhaps could be invested in securities or otherwiseprofitably employed. Also, where inventories are financed by overdraft, unnecessary interest costs are incurred. Therefore it may be advisable to calculate a ratio which will give us an approximation of how many days' usage of inventories we are carrying at one particular pointin time.

Example

Assuming the cost of sales figure is Tshs.365,000, dividing by the days in the year, a figure ofsales cost per day of Tshs.1,000 is obtained.

Assuming this rate of sales continues and the statement of financial position stock figure is,say, Tshs.80,000, you can see that we have sufficient inventory requirements for 80 days.

If the company is a manufacturing company, different types of inventories are involved. Therefore the following inventory ratios should be prepared:

Raw Material

This is Raw Material inventory : Purchases per day.

Work in Progress

This is Work in Progress inventory : Cost of production per day.

Finished Goods

This is Finished Goods inventory : Cost of sales per day.

The average number of days' inventory carried by ABC Ltd are as follows:

Closing stock

Year 4

100,000 58 days

Year 5

150,000 67 days

Cost of sales 365

630,000 365

818,000 365

From these figures we can see that ABC Ltd appears to have been carrying larger inventoryrequirements in Year 5. Remember, however, that these figures have been taken at onepoint in time and the position may have been completely different on 1 January Year 6. ABCmay have purchased in bulk at special terms, or there may be an impending increase in the price of raw materials. Therefore, the increase in Year 5 may not necessarily be a bad thing. Nevertheless, this ratio does highlight the inventory-holding period and, if the increasecannot be accounted for, an investigation into the inventory control systems may be warranted.

Inventory Turnover

A ratio known as the inventory turnover ratio is used to measure the average time it takes for inventory to turn over. This is calculated as follows:

Inventory turnover ratio Sales at costprice

Average of opening and closing stock


Therefore if the opening inventory is Tshs.8,000 and the closing inventory is Tshs.6,000 the average inventory is:

Tshs.8,000 Tshs.6,000 Tshs.7,000.2

If the sales for the period cost Tshs.35,000 then the inventory has turned over by

35,000 5 times during the period. 7,000

If we divide this turnover ratio into 365, we can calculate that the inventory turns over, on average, every 73 days. This can be used as an efficiency indicator.

Debtors Ratio

Debtors ratio Debtors

Average credit sales per day

Cash may not be available to pay creditors until the customers pay their accounts. Therefore an efficient credit control system ensures that the funds tied up in debtors are kept to aminimum. It is useful to calculate a ratio which will give us an approximation of the numberof sales in the debtors figure at one particular point in time.

The ratios of ABC Ltd are:

Year 4

50,000

900,000 365

20 days

Year 5

95,000

1,200,000 365

29 days

It appears that debtors were taking longer to pay their accounts in Year 5, but whether this isgood or bad depends on what ABC considers to be an acceptable credit period. Again, thisratio represents the position at one particular point in time and may not be representative ofthe position throughout the year. It may well be that the credit control department concentrates on reducing the debtors to a minimum at the year-end, so that the figuresappear satisfactory in the annual accounts. Therefore there is a need for more detailedcredit control information to be provided at frequent intervals. Nevertheless, this ratio gives an approximation of the number of days debtors are taking to pay their accounts and it may be helpful to use this ratio for comparison with competitors.

Creditors Ratio

CreditorsCreditors ratio Average credit purchases per day

The above calculation could be made to compare how long ABC are taking to pay their creditors in the two years. The actual cost of purchases is not disclosed in the data given butif we take the production cost of goods sold as an alternative, we find:

Year 4

46,000 27 days

Year 5

138,000 62 days

630,000 365

818,000 365


F. CAPITAL STRUCTURE RATIOS

Consider the case of X, who starts a business. If he requires various assets worth Tshs.10,000(inventory, etc.) where can he obtain the money to finance the business?

Should he provide all the capital himself or should he obtain most of it from partiesoutside the business? (For example, a loan of Tshs.7,000 at 10% plus Tshs.2,000 from tradecreditors and Tshs.1,000 from himself.)

What effect will such a capital structure have on the future of the business?

If there is a business recession, has the business sufficient earnings to meet theannual Tshs.700 interest cost on the loan?

If X requires more funds, how will trade creditors and lending institutions view the fact that X has provided only 10% of the total funds of the business?

These problems suggest that there is a need for the financial analyst to investigate thecapital structure of a business.

Shareholders' Funds : Total Indebtedness

This ratio –known as the Proprietorship Ratio – shows what proportion of the total funds hasbeen provided by the shareholders of the business and what proportion has been providedby outside parties. Potential investors and lenders are interested in this ratio because theymay wish to see the owners of the business owning a large proportion of the assets (normallyover 50%).

The ratios for ABC Ltd are:

Shareholde rs' fundsTotal indebtedne ss shareholders and creditors

Year 4

600,000 700,000

86%

Year 5

900,000 1,100,000

82%

Certainly a large proportion of the funds has been provided by the owners of ABC butwhether this ratio is good or bad depends on many other factors (e.g. the current economicclimate and taxation policy regarding dividends and fixed-interest payments).

Shareholders' Funds : Non-current Assets

This ratio reveals whether any part of the non-current assets is owned by outsiders. If non-current assets exceed shareholders' funds, it is apparent that part of the non-current assetsis owned by outside parties, which may be interpreted as a sign of weakness. This does not appear to be the case for ABC Ltd, since shareholders' funds were Tshs.600,000 in Year 4 andTshs.900,000 in Year 5, while non-current assets were Tshs.500,000 and Tshs.850,000.

Capital Gearing Ratio

Fixed-interest capital (i.e. preferenceshares and debentures)Ordinary share capital

This ratio measures the relationship between the ordinary share capital of a company andthe fixed-interest capital.

A company with a large proportion of fixed-interest capital is said to be high-geared.

A company with a high proportion of ordinary share capital is low-geared.

Where the capital structure of a company is low-geared, preference shareholders anddebenture holders enjoy greater security, while potential dividends payable to ordinary


shareholders will not be subject to violent fluctuations with variations in profits. The opposite applies to a high-geared capital structure (i.e. less security for preference shareholders and debenture holders, and violent fluctuations in dividends for ordinary shareholders).

The relationship between ordinary share capital and fixed-interest capital is important to anordinary shareholder because of the effects on future earning prospects. Some fixed-interest capital is desirable, provided this capital earns a profit in excess of the fixed-interest charges it creates. Any such excess profit will rebound to the ordinary shareholders, whothereby enjoy a higher return than they would if the whole capital had been contributed bythem.

We shall consider aspects of capital structure later in the chapter.

Cost of Capital

Because each type of capital carries its own interest rate, we can easily calculate the cost ofcapital. For example:

Capital Tshs.

Ordinary shares (expected dividend 15%) 50,000

Dividend/Interest Tshs.

7,500

10% Preference shares

8% Debentures

40,000

10,000

100,000

4,000

800

12,300

The cost of capital is Tshs.12,300 on capital of Tshs.100,000, i.e. 12.3%.

As we have seen, debenture interest is a charge against profits, so this means a high-geared company's taxable profits are reduced more, and it will pay less tax and be able to pay higher dividends, than a low-geared company with the same amount of profit.

G. INVESTMENT RATIOS

Investment ratios provide valuable information to actual or potential shareholders. These ratios are also of interest to management, since a company depends upon potential investors for further funds for expansion. We will now calculate the appropriate investment ratios fromthe annual accounts of ABC Ltd.

Ordinary Dividend Cover

Profit after tax less Preference dividendOrdinary dividend

This ratio indicates how many times the profits available for ordinary dividend distributioncover the actual dividend paid. This ratio is important to the investor for two reasons:

It gives the investor some idea of security of future dividends.

Investors can check to ensure that management are not paying out all earnings but arepursuing a prudent policy of ploughing back some part of the annual profit.

Investors and would-be investors may use these ratios as a basis for future investment decisions. Therefore the ratios may have a direct effect on the demand for, and the marketprice of, the shares. For this reason, the Board of Directors should always endeavour tomaintain a careful balance between the payment of dividends and reinvestment.


(a) If dividends are too low or are infrequent, the market price of the shares may fall.

(b) Generous distribution of dividends may inhibit the ability of a company to expand without resort to fresh capital or loans, besides depleting current liquid resources.

In practice a dividend cover of 2-3 times is commonly found. We can see that ABC Ltd has distributed all of the profits after tax in the form of dividends in both years. This is not a goodsign.

Earnings per Share

Profits after tax less Preference dividendsNumber of ordinary shares

The ratio is based on the same information as the ordinary dividend cover, but expresses it ina different form.

Investors and potential investors are particularly interested in the total net profit earned in theyear which could have been received if the directors had paid it all out as dividend. Such anamount, compared with what the directors have in fact paid out per share, gives an indicationof the dividend policy of the company. An investigation of the accounts of ABC Limited in Year 5 reveals an earnings per share of 7.65 pence, i.e.

Tshs.61,200800,000

Dividend Yield Ratio

Nominal value of share Dividend %Market value

Dividends declared are always based on a percentage of the nominal value of issued sharecapital. Therefore in Year 5 ABC Ltd has declared a dividend of 7.65%, but the true return aninvestor obtains is on the current market value rather than on the nominal value of the share. If the current market value of the shares of ABC Ltd is Tshs.1.20, this indicates that theshareholders are obtaining a yield of 6.375%:

Nominal value Tshs.1.00Current market

value Tshs.1.20

7.65% 6.375%

Whether this is satisfactory depends on the yield acceptable to the investor and the potential for future capital growth. In particular, this ratio should be considered in the light of other investment ratios (e.g. earnings per share) rather than in isolation.

Price : Earnings Ratio

This ratio may be calculated as:

Market price per shareEarnings per share

Total market value of issued share capitalor Profits after corporation tax and preference dividends

The ratio is ascertained by comparing the market price of an ordinary share with the earnings per share (after deduction of corporation tax and preference dividends). This may be expressed as so many years' purchase of the profits (in other words, assuming stability ofmarket price, an investor's capital outlay will, at the present level of earnings, be recoupedafter so many years, in the form of either dividends received or capital growth by virtue ofretained profits). On the assumption that a person who buys a share is buying a proportion


of earnings, the larger the PE ratio, the higher is the share valued by the market. In otherwords, the ratio indicates how many times the market price values earnings.

Assuming a market value of Tshs.1.20, the price : earnings ratio of ABC Ltd is:

1.20

15.7 i.e.

7.65%

pence

Other Useful Ratios

Other useful ratios, which do not apply to ABC Ltd, are:

(a) Preference Dividend Cover

Profit after taxPreference dividend

This ratio reveals the number of times preference dividends are covered by earnings and thus indicates the preference shareholders' security, so far as income isconcerned.

(b) Debenture Interest Cover

Net profit + Debenture interestRate of interest Loans outstanding

This ratio allows debenture holders to assess the ability of a company to meet its fixed-interest payments. Because debenture interest is a charge and not an appropriation ofprofits, it is necessary to add back the interest to net profit to determine profit before interest.

H. LIMITATIONS OF ACCOUNTING RATIOS

Before we go on to examine some worked examples of accounting ratios, we should notethat ratios are subject to certain limitations, which must be recognised if maximum benefit is to be derived from them. These limitations stem from the limitations of the accounts fromwhich the ratios are derived – for example:

(a) The Ephemeral Nature of Statement of Financial Position Information

The statement of financial position is prepared at, and it is true for, one date only. Fromthis, it follows the ratios derived from the statement of financial position are true for onedate only. Thus, it is particularly dangerous to rely on such ratios for companiesinvolved in seasonal trades.

The statements of financial position of a holiday camp organisation, for example, wouldpresent very different pictures according to whether they were drawn up in mid-summeror mid- winter. In mid-summer, it would not be surprising to discover large stocks beingcarried and considerable sums owing to suppliers, whereas in mid-winter these itemswould probably have disappeared. The ratios calculated from a summer statement offinancial position would, therefore, differ from those calculated from a winter one.

(b) The Effect of Inflation

Inflation and changing monetary values do not hamper ratio interpretation if the figures being expressed in terms of ratios are all equally subject to inflation. Unfortunately, this is not always the case, especially where fixed assets are not revalued for considerableperiods. Care must be taken to allow for changing monetary values when reasons for changes and trends are being sought and, thus, ratio analysis of current cost accountscan be valuable.


We shall return to the subject of current cost accounting and the limitations of the historic cost convention later in the course.

(b) Imprecise Terminology

The accounting profession is guilty of a certain looseness of terminology, andaccounting terms are not always given the same meanings by different companies. When making inter-company comparisons, care should be taken to ensure that like isalways compared with like – otherwise, comparisons will be valueless.

(d) Quality of Employees

Ratios do not measure the loyalty, quality or morale of a company's employees, which is a very important factor when assessing its prospects.

I. WORKED EXAMPLES

Example 1


You are given summarised information about two firms in the same line of business, A and B.

Tshs.

Firm A

Tshs. Tshs. Tshs.

Firm B

Tshs. Tshs.

Land

Buildings 120

80 260

200

less Depreciation

Plant

less Depreciation

Inventories

Trade receivables

Bank

Trade payables

Bank

Capital b/forward

Profit for year

less Drawings

Land revaluation

Loan (10% pa)

Sales

Cost of sales

Required

40 80

90

70 20

180

80 100

–

180

110

50 160 20

200

100 30

130

30

100

–

100

200

1,000

400

– 200

150

40 110

570

100 90

10

200

120

– 120 80

650

300 100

400

40

360

160

130

650

3,000

2,000

(a) Produce a table of 3 profitability ratios and 3 liquidity ratios for both businesses.

(b) Write a report briefly outlining the strengths and weaknesses of the two businesses. Include comment on any major areas where the simple use of the figures could bemisleading.


Answer

(a) Table of Ratios

Profitability Ratios

Return on capital employed:

Operating profit (beforeinterest) × 100Total assets less currentliabilitie s

Net profit percentage:

Firm A

30 × 100 200

15%

Firm B

100 × 100 650

15.4%

Operating profit (after interest) × 100Sales

30,

1000

× 100 100,

3 000

× 100

Gross profit percentage:

3% 3.3%

,

Gross profit × 100Sales

600 × 100 ,

1000

1000,

3 000

× 100

Liquidity Ratios

Current ratio:

Current assetsCurrent liabilitie s

Quick ratio:

Current assets InventoryLiquid current liabilitie s

Inventory turnover ratio:

Cost of salesAverage stock (using closing stock figures)

(b) Report

To: Chief Executive

From: Administrative Manager

60%

180 1.125160

100 0.6:1160

40080

5 times

33.3%

200 1.7:1120

100 0.8:1120

2,000100

20 times

Date:

Subject: Analysis of Firms A and B for year ended 30 June

In accordance with your instructions, I have analysed and interpreted the final accounts of A and B for the year ended 30 June. My detailed analyses are shown in the appendix to this report.

Analysis of Results

(a) Profitability


The return on capital employed for each firm was similar at 15% for A and15.4% for B. These returns seem slightly low but are above the returnsthat could be achieved on many forms of investment. We do not have anyprevious years' figures to compare them with, so it is difficult to draw aconclusion from only one year's results.

The most significant difference between A and B lies in the gross profit percentages of 60% and 33.3% respectively. A must have a better pricingpolicy or a means of purchasing goods for resale at more favourable rates.

However, the net profit percentage is similar for both at 3% and 3.3% respectively. This low net profit percentage is a concern for A in particulargiven its favourable gross profit percentage. A appears not to be controlling overhead expenses as effectively as B.

(b) Liquidity

The current ratios were 1.125:1 and 1.7:1 respectively. Both seem a littlelow given the norm of 2:1 but A in particular gives cause for concern.

Again both liquidity ratios at 0.6:1 and 0.8:1 are a little low compared withthe norm of 1:1. Without knowing the specific trade of A and B it is difficultto conclude whether those ratios are acceptable but again A givesparticular cause for concern.

The inventory turnover ratio of B at 20 times per annum is four timesgreater than A at 5 times per annum. It seems unusual to have such a difference in turnover rates given that A and B are in the same line ofbusiness. It would appear that B has chosen a high inventory turnover but lower gross profit margin than A. Both, however, obtained the same return on capital employed.

Difficulties in Use of Figures Alone

Only closing inventory figures are available so their use instead of averageinventory figures could give a misleading inventory turnover ratio. For example, a high year-end inventory build-up could explain A's low inventory turnover ratio.

We are not told the different accounting policies used by each firm. Thereforewe may not be strictly comparing like with like. A, for example, may adopt a very different depreciation policy from B. In addition, B has revalued land whereas A has not.

We have no information on aspects of each business such as staff quality andturnover, geographical location, attitudes to the environment etc. This wouldneed to be considered in addition to the figures.

Conclusion

The return on capital employed for each business is not unacceptable although itcould be improved. A's control of overhead expenses gives cause for concern and needs to be examined further. Liquidity of A gives additional cause forconcern, although that of B is also lower than would be expected.


Example 2

Roundsby Ltd is a construction firm and Squaresby Ltd is a property company which specialises in letting property to professional firms. The following information is relevant:

Tshs.1 ordinary shares

Tshs.1 preference shares (10%)

Retained profits

8% debentures

Operating profit for the year

Current market price per ordinary share

The rate of corporation tax is 25%

Tasks

Roundsby Ltd

Tshs.

600,000

15,000

600,000

75,000

300,000

Tshs.3.65

Squaresby Ltd

Tshs.

150,000

450,000

75,000

450,000

300,000

Tshs.10.20

(a) (i) What do you understand by the term gearing?

(ii) Calculate the gearing ratios for both Roundsby Ltd and Squaresby Ltd.

(b) Prepare a schedule for each company in which you indicate the profit remaining afterallowing for debenture interest, taxation and the preference dividend.

(c) Calculate the earnings per share for each company.

(d) Calculate the price earnings ratio for each company.

Answer


(a) (i) Gearing is the relationship of fixed-cost capital to equity capital, normallyexpressed by the ratio:

Long - term loans + Preference share capital × 100 Total ordinary shareholde rs' funds

(ii) Roundsby:

Squaresby:

15,000 + 75,000 7½% 600,000 + 600,000

450,000 + 450,000 400% 150,000 + 75,000

(b) The schedule is as follows:

Operating profit

Debenture interest

Profit before tax

Tax (25%)

Profit after tax

Preference dividend

Profit available to ordinary shareholder

Tshs. ,

RoundsbyTshs.

300,000

(6,000 )

294,000

(73,500 )

220,500

(1,500 )

219,000

Squaresby Tshs.

300,000

(36,000 )

264,000

(66,000 )

198,000

(45,000 )

153,000

(c) EPS: Roundsby

Squaresby

219 000,

600 000Tshs. ,

153 000,

150 000.

36.5 pence

102 pence

(e) PE ratio: Roundsby

Squaresby

Tshs.3 65Tshs. .

0 365Tshs. .

10 20Tshs. .

1 02


Example 3

The following are extracts from the final accounts of a trading company over the last twoyears:

Statement of Comprehensive Income Data

Purchases (all on credit)

Sales (all on credit)

Cost of sales

Gross profit

Net profit before tax

Statement of Financial Position Data

Year 1

Tshs.

216,000

675,000

210,000

465,000

130,000

Year 1

Year 2

Tshs.

285,000

834,000

272,000

562,000

200,000

Year 2

Non-current Assets

Current Assets

Inventories

Debtors

Current Liabilities Trade creditors

Bank Overdraft

Taxation Proposed Dividends


Mortgage

Capital and Reserves

Tshs.1 ordinary shares Retained profits

Tasks:

Tshs.

11,000 95,000

106,000

(28,000 )

(39,000 )

(10,000 )

(25,000 )

(102,000 )

Tshs.

620,000

4,000

624,000

(100,000 )

524,000

300,000

224,000

524,000

Tshs.

24,000 106,000

130,000

(39,000 )

(77,000 )

(20,000 )

(30,000 )

(166,000

Tshs.

800,000

(36,000 )

764,000

(90,000 )

674,000

300,000

374,000

674,000

(a) Calculate two profitability ratios for both years.

(b) Calculate two liquidity ratios for both years.

(c) Calculate two efficiency ratios for both years.


(d) Briefly comment on the financial performance of the company over the two years.

(e) Briefly discuss the options available to the company to eliminate the negative workingcapital.

Answer

(a) Two from:

Gross profit percentage

Net profit percentage

Return on capital employed

Year 1

465 × 100 69% 675

130 × 100 19%

675

130 × 100 25%

524

Year 2

562 × 100 67% 834

200 × 100 24%

834

200 × 100 30%

674

(NB There are acceptable variations to the basis of calculating the ROCE.)

(b) Current ratio

Acid test (Quick ratio)

(c) Two from:

Rate of inventory turnover

(using closing inventory)

Debtor collection period

Creditor payment period

106 : 102 1.04 : 1

95 : 102 0.93 : 1

210 19 times 11

95 × 365 51 days 675

28 × 365 47 days

216

130 : 166 0.78 : 1

106 : 166 0.64 : 1

272 11 times 24

106 × 365 46 days 834

39 × 365 50 days

285

(d) You should comment on improvement in profit indicators, deterioration in liquidity andlink with increase in level of inventory holding.

(e) Lease assets rather than purchase them

Use debt factoring

Raise more long-term finance through loans or share issue


J. ISSUES IN INTERPRETATION

Financial Dangers and their Detection

(a) Declining Sales

The analyst will not have access to much of the information available to the directorsbut can still scent any dangerous sales trends from published accounts. Companies are required to include their annual revenue (or net sales – i.e. sales less returns),together with an analysis of the revenue on major activities for all but the smallercompanies. Particular attention should be given to the make-up of sales, in order to spot whether total revenue is being maintained or increased by expanding trade in unprofitable areas, thus hiding a loss of business in more profitable fields. A company'ssales should be compared with the total output of the industry concerned, to seewhether it is holding its own with competitors.

As in all matters of accounting interpretation, one should not lose sight of the effect of inflation on revenue.

(b) Excessive Expenses

Three main tests can be applied to a set of company accounts in order to determinewhat is happening to the company.

Comparison of each item in the statement of comprehensive income with thecorresponding figure for the past two, three or more years.

Calculation of the percentage which each profit and loss item forms of the sales total – again, for comparison purposes.

Subjection of each available item in the statement of comprehensive income to adetailed analysis. Let us take wages as an example: figures relating to numbers employed, staff functions, overtime charges, and labour charges in relation to therevenue in each department should all be obtained if possible and compared withthose of previous years and those of other, comparable, companies.

(c) Shortage of Working Capital

A shortage of working capital can soon bring a company to a halt, no matter howprofitable its product. Indeed, inability to pay creditors through shortage of workingcapital is particularly dangerous when companies are expanding rapidly.

To detect a possible shortage of working capital, a careful watch should be kept on the ratio of current assets to current liabilities. If, year by year, trade creditors are growing faster than trade debtors, inventory and bank balances, one may well suspect that,before long, the business will be short of working capital. The speed with which a company collects its debts and turns over its inventory are also indicators of the working capital's adequacy.

(d) Excessive Inventories

It is essential for the health of a company that capital should not be locked upunnecessarily in inventory. The comparison of inventory turnover rates from year to year will reveal whether the inventory management of a company is deteriorating orimproving; and this will be an indicator of the general management standards of thecompany.

In the second place (and perhaps this is more important) any tendency to manufacturefor inventory may be revealed. It should go without saying that manufacturing goods tobe held in finished inventory is a very dangerous practice. The manufacture of thegoods will involve the company in expenditure on materials, wages, expenses, etc. butno receipts will be obtained to pay for these items.

(e) Slow-paying Debtors


A danger similar to manufacturing for inventory, but not quite as pernicious is that of "dilatory" debtors. Any increase in the length of time debtors take to pay could indicateone of the following:

a decline in the number of satisfied customers (implying a drop in standards ofmanagement, manufacturing or delivery)

a drop in the standard of debt control or

perhaps most serious, a falling-off in favour of the company's product, forcing thecompany to maintain turnover by selling on credit to customers to whom it couldnot, usually, offer credit.

(f) Non-current Assets Needing Replacement

The usual method of presenting non-current assets in the accounts of limitedcompanies is to show them at cost less aggregate depreciation at the date of thestatement of financial position. Additions and disposals of non-current assets are also shown.

In considering the non-current assets of a company, you must assess their real value, condition, and future life, in order to estimate when replacement will be necessary. This is important because the company needs sufficient finance available to effect thenecessary replacements without seriously depleting working capital.

It is difficult to find a substitute for personal knowledge of the assets concerned – thisis, obviously, a problem in the examination. However, an outline of the position can beseen by tracing the movements in a company's non-current assets over the years andby comparing them with those of other companies in the same industry.

(g) Diminishing Returns

These are suffered when a successful company expands past its optimum size. Fromthen onwards, every successive "dose" of capital put into the company yields a smallerreturn. This, to a certain extent, is what happened to the Cyril Lord carpet businesswhen it entered the retailing field.

In searching for the tendency to expand beyond the optimum point, a close watchshould be kept on the trend of net earnings as a percentage of capital employed. Anyreduction in the percentage accompanied by an increase in capital employed must be treated with considerable suspicion.

(h) Over-trading

"Over-trading" means that a business has insufficient funds to carry out its operations at a satisfactory level. It implies that the working capital ratio is too low, and it maymean that a business cannot meet its maturing financial obligations to its creditors.

Over-trading is caused by a rapidly expanding business outgrowing its initial assetstructure and capital resources. The remedy would be the raising of temporary loans,short-term finance or, more probably, additional permanent capital.

We have, so far, mentioned the term "over-trading" only in passing, although we havestressed the importance of retaining an adequate balance of working capital. As this is a point to look for when assessing a set of accounts, you should be able to identify quickly any symptoms of over-trading.

From the banker's point of view, a call for extended or increased overdraftfacilities may suggest over-trading. Alternatively, the hard core of the bank balance or bank overdraft may shift in such a way as to suggest a strain onresources.


From the customer's viewpoint, a call for additional credit may denote a shortage of funds. Similarly, an extended credit period may also suggest over-trading.

When inventory shows a significant increase over a previous period, thissometimes indicates failure to sell the goods. Funds are being invested in the production process but the money is not returning as quickly in the form of sales.

Be always on the alert for any signs of strain on liquid resources. You should be ableto recognise weaknesses in accounting documents in the same way as a doctoridentifies symptoms of illness.

Interpretation of Statement of Comprehensive Income

The two most important figures in the statement of comprehensive income are at opposite extremes – sales at the top and final net profit at the foot. Remember the effect of conceptsand accounting bases, particularly, in assessing the value of the latter.

When considering the income statements of a company over a period of three to five years,the following questions should be asked.

(a) (i) Is the revenue steady, increasing or falling?

(ii) If it is steady, why isn't it increasing?

(iii) If it is increasing or falling, why?

(iv) Is this state of affairs likely to continue?

(v) If not, what will stop it?

(b) (i) Is the pattern of sales the same throughout the period, or has there been achange in composition?

(ii) Is the business still selling the same sort of thing as it always did, or has it turnedto new markets?

(c) Has the gross profit percentage been affected? A distinction must be drawn herebetween a fall in gross profit percentage and a fall in total gross profit.

(i) A fall in gross profit percentage may be overcome by increased sales so thatthe final net profit does not suffer. It will, however, bring a corresponding fall in the net profit sales ratio.

(ii) A reduction in total gross profit is likely to be more disastrous, in view of the effects of fixed costs.

(d) How do selling and distribution costs vary with changes in revenue? One might expect there to be a significant fixed component, together with a fairly large variable one. Certainly, such costs should normally increase (or fall) less than proportionately torevenue.

(e) Are the ratios of net profit to sales and net profit to capital employed reasonable,bearing in mind the nature of the business?

(f) Do the accounts suggest that there may have been changes in the conduct of the business?

(g) Do the accounts give any hint that there has been lack of prudence in earlier years?

Interpretation of Statement of Financial Position

The danger points to look for when examining a statement of financial position may besummarised as follows.

(a) Cash Position


Shortage of liquid resources will cause a company considerable trouble.

(b) Inventory Position

(i) Excessive inventories may be the result of overtrading or weak inventorycontrol.

(ii) Shortage of inventory may be a sign of lack of liquid funds.

Remember that different industries have different inventory-holding policies and thatseasonal factors may have to be taken into consideration.

(c) Average Collection Period

The average collection period will rise if there is poor credit control or weakness in collection. On the other hand, the average collection period may fall if the concern'scredit policy is dictated by a shortage of funds.

(d) Working Capital

Working capital will fall if non-current assets are purchased without increasing thecapital funds of the company.

(e) Money Owed

Increases in the amount owed to creditors are, usually, a sign that the business has been forced to "borrow" funds by delaying payment of its debts.

Capital Gearing

Some companies have to have far more non-current assets than others, and this affects the type of capital structure adopted. The term used to describe the relationship between thedifferent classes of capital is capital gearing. We distinguish two main types of capital gearing, as follows:

High Gearing

This is where a company has a large proportion of fixed interest and fixed dividendcapital, e.g. loan capital and preference shares.

Low Gearing

This is where a company has a large proportion of ordinary share capital plus reserves and undistributed profits.

The gearing ratio is:

Fixed Interest Capital Fixed Dividend Capital

Ordinary Share Capital ReservesAn example of the calculation of gearing ratios is given below.


The total capital of two companies, Sea and Breeze, is divided up as follows:

Share Capital

Sea

Tshs.

Breeze

Tshs.

8% Preference shares Tshs.1 each 40,000 10,000 Ordinary shares Tshs.1 each

Reserves

Undistributed profits

Loan Capital

7% Debentures of Tshs.1 each

15,000

5,000

40,000

100,000

40,000 40,000

50,000

30,000

10,000

100,000

,

Gearing ratio 15,000 5,000

:4 1

10,000 10 000

,50,000 30 000

:0.25 1

Therefore Sea is a high-geared company and Breeze is a low-geared company.

When considering whether to have a high-geared or low-geared capital structure, thefollowing points are important:

(a) Control

If the directors are to run the company with the minimum amount of interference, it isgenerally advisable to have a low-geared capital structure. High gearing can bedifficult sometimes if preference shareholders and debenture holders prove to beunhelpful when controversial decisions have to be made.

(b) Nature of Operations

The nature of the operations in which a company is engaged will also affect thegearing. Some companies are engaged, for example, in the manufacture ofcomplicated machinery and need a very large investment in non-current assets. Onthe other hand, many companies have very few non-current assets, especially in a service industry.

When a company has a large investment in non-current assets it may be possible toobtain funds by issuing secured debentures, which is a relatively cheap method ofobtaining money. Thus this type of company may often be a high-geared company.

(c) Effect on Earnings

Fluctuations in profits have disproportionate effects upon the return to ordinaryshareholders in high-geared companies. This can affect the pricing of ordinary shares on the Stock Exchange, which in turn may influence directors, who will be looking forstability in the price of the company's ordinary shares, when faced with raising morecapital.

An example will illustrate the effect of gearing upon earnings:


Ordinary share capital plus reserves

Loan capital: 10% debentures

Company X

(low-geared)

Tshs.000

10,000

10,000

Company X

Company Y

(high-geared)

Tshs.000

2,500

7,500

10,000

Company Y

Year 1 Year 2 Year 1 Year 2

Operating profit

Tshs.000 Tshs.000 Tshs.000 Tshs.000

(before deduction of loan interest) 2,000 3,000 2,000 3,000 less Loan interest – – 750 750

Available for distribution to ordinaryshareholders

Return on ordinary share capital

2,000 3,000

20% 30%

1,250 2,250

50% 90%

We can see that the increase in profits in Year 2 has a much greater effect on the return on ordinary share capital in Company Y than in Company X. Similarly, adecrease in profits would produce a much more severe effect in Company Y.

(d) Stability of Business Profits

An increase in a company's level of gearing is accompanied by an increase in financial risk, because fixed interest has to be paid regardless of business performance. If thedemand for the product being manufactured/sold is stable, with the result that the profit being earned does not vary much from year to year, it may be possible to have a highly geared capital structure. Conversely, when a business is of a fairly speculative nature,a low-geared capital structure will generally be essential.

(e) Cost of Capital

The ordinary shareholders will want to achieve an adequate return on capital given therisk they are bearing. Since preference shareholders and debenture holders have a first call on earnings, they can be paid a lower rate than the ordinary shareholders. Therefore it is useful to have a reasonable proportion of fixed interest capital, both toreduce costs and to enable the ordinary shareholders to be paid quite a high return oncapital invested, providing profits are adequate.

The company must consider all the above factors when deciding on capital structure. It is particularly important to analyse gearing because many companies increase theirdependence on borrowed funds in order to try to push up earnings per ordinary share (see(c)). While profits are rising this can prove successful, but if there is a slump in trade, fixedinterest must still be paid and many company collapses are due to an inability to meetcommitments to debenture holders. This risk in respect of high-geared companies needs tobe recognised and matched against the possibility of continued regular growth in companyprofits.


Capital Position

(a) Capital Structure

For a company to be successful, it is essential that its capital structure is satisfactoryand tailored to its needs. In examining a set of company accounts, you should ascertain whether the capital structure is satisfactory. The points to look for are as follows.

If the business is of a speculative nature, a large proportion of the capital ought tobe made up of ordinary shares.

Interest on debentures and other prior charges should not be unreasonably high.

The terms of repayment of debentures, redeemable shares, etc. should be withinthe capacity of the company.

The capital structure of the company should be sufficiently elastic to allow forfuture development – by the issue of additional debentures, for example, if newassets are required.

(b) Under- and Over-capitalisation

Although it is difficult to say what is the optimum amount of capital any one companyneeds to operate successfully, it is relatively easy to recognise under- or over-capitalisation, and the dangers of these conditions.

Over-capitalisation

A company is over-capitalised when a portion of its capital resources is not fullyused in the business and does not earn an adequate return. Sufficient profits willnot be earned to justify the capital employed and, in acute cases, preferencedividends may be jeopardised.

Over-capitalisation can be caused by:

(i) Failure to write off redundant assets

(ii) Excessive valuations of goodwill and similar assets

(iii) Failure to use surplus liquid resources when branches are closed down

(iv) Unjustified capitalisation of expenditure that should have been written off(e.g. cost of advertising campaigns).

Under-capitalisation

When the capital resources of a company are not consistent with the volume ofits trading, expenditure is likely to increase because of:

(i) Bank charges

(ii) Loan interest payments

(iii) Inability to pay suppliers within the discount period.

Substantial unsecured loans and inadequate or out-of-date plant indicate under-capitalisation.

One of the dangers of under-capitalisation is that the company may not be able totake advantage of attractive new opportunities when they arise.

(c) Return on Capital Employed

In order to appreciate a company's capital position (to see whether it is adequatelycapitalised or over- or under-capitalised) a computation of the return earned on actualcapital employed is very useful. By "actual capital employed" we mean the capital


employed in the business, obtained by replacing the book values at which assets and liabilities appear in the statement of financial position with market values. Furthermore,in a calculation of this sort, intangible assets such as goodwill are ignored.

Question for Practice

This question is to help you think in a practical way about financial tactics.

The accountant of Wiley Ltd has prepared the following estimated statement of financial position as at 31 December, Year 2.

Wiley Limited Estimated Statement of Financial Position as at 31 December, Year 2

Freehold property

Tshs. Tshs.

600,000

Tshs.

Depreciation

Current assets

Inventory (marginal cost)

Debtors

Current liabilities

Overdraft

Trade creditors

Debentures (repayable Year 10)

Capital

Called-up ordinary shares Tshs.1Reserves

Profit for Year 2

100,000 500,000

590,000

160,000 750,000

60,000

140,000 200,000 550,000

1,050,000

250,000

800,000

500,000

250,000

50,000

800,000

The directors are disappointed with the estimated profit for Year 2 and the financial positiondisplayed in the statement of financial position. The following suggestions are made forconsideration:

(i) To make a capitalisation issue to existing shareholders on the basis of one Tshs.1 share for every two shares held.

(ii) To increase the depreciation charged on the freehold buildings from Tshs.20,000 toTshs.30,000.

(iii) To arrange a loan for an extra Tshs.100,000 also repayable in Year 10; this is to be paid to the company on 31 December Year 2.

(iv) To value inventory at total cost Tshs.680,000 for the purpose of the accounts. The Year 1accounts included inventory at marginal cost (you will understand this term later) of Tshs.400,000 and the corresponding figure for total cost at that date was Tshs.470,000.

(v) To offer cash discounts for prompt payment in respect of future sales. If this course isfollowed, it is estimated that sales will be unaffected, but discounts of Tshs.3,000 will be


allowed during the period October – December, Year 2 and trade debtors at the end ofthe year will amount to Tshs.120,000.

Required

Taking each course of action separately, a statement showing the following:

(a) Net profit for Year 2

(b) Bank overdraft (or balance) as at 31 December Year 2

(c) Working capital as at 31 December Year 2

(d) Acid test ratio as at 31 December Year 2

Present your answer in the form of a table as shown below:

Course of Action Net Profit Bank (Overdraft) Working Capital Acid Test Ratio Balance

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

(iv)

(v)

Make suitable notes explaining the reasons for your entries in the table. Ignore taxation.

Now check your answers with those provided at the end of the chapter.


ANSWER TO QUESTION FOR PRACTICE

Course of Action Net Profit Bank (Overdraft) Working Capital Acid Test Ratio Balance

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

(iv)

(v)

Notes

Tshs.50,000

Tshs.40,000

Tshs.50,000

Tshs.70,000

Tshs.47,000

(Tshs.60,000)

(Tshs.60,000)

Tshs.40,000

(Tshs.60,000)

(Tshs.23,000)

Tshs.550,000

Tshs.550,000

Tshs.650,000

Tshs.640,000

Tshs.547,000

0.8 : 1

0.8 : 1

1.4 : 1

0.8 : 1

0.7 : 1

(i) Involves purely a book adjustment. No money changes hands.

(ii) Affects only new profit.

(iii) Involves Tshs.100,000 cash coming into the business and therefore affects the last threecolumns.

(iv) Requires a restatement of both opening and closing inventories at total cost.

Profit is Tshs.50,000 + (Tshs.680,000 Tshs.590,000) (Tshs.470,000 Tshs.400,000)

(v) Cash discounts reduce trade debtors at close by Tshs.40,000 but only Tshs.37,000 will actuallybe received in cash, and Tshs.3,000 must be charged to profits, hence the net profitreduction. The overdraft is reduced by Tshs.37,000 cash received. Tshs.40,000 debtorreduction and Tshs.37,000 overdraft reduction means a Tshs.3,000 drop in working capital.

Liquidity or acid test ratio Tshs.120,000 ÷ Tshs.(140,000 + 23,000)

Chapter 8

Business Funding

Contents

A. Capital of an Enterprise

Features of Share Capital

Types of Share

Types of Capital

Share Issues

Bonus Issues

Rights Issues

Redeemable Shares

Purchase of Own Shares

Advantage of Purchasing/Redeeming Shares

B. Dividends

Preference Dividends

Ordinary Dividends

Interim Dividends

C. Debentures

Types of Debenture

Rights of Debenture Holders

Gearing

Issues at Par and at a Discount

Redemption of Debentures

Restrictions on Borrowings

D. Types and Sources of Finance

Balancing Fixed and Working Capital

Types of Business and Capital Structure

Long-term Funds

Shorter-term Funds

Interest Rate Exposure

Sources of External Finance

Examples of Business Financing

199

Page

201

201

201

202

203

205

205

206

208

208

208

208

208

209

209

209

210

210

210

211

211

211

211

212

212

214

214

214

215

(Continued over)

200 Business Funding

E. Management of Working Capital

Working Capital Cycle

Striking the Right Balance

216216

217

A. CAPITAL OF AN ENTERPRISE

Business Funding 201

(Within this chapter all references to companies are UK based in respect of terminology and legal requirements)

Virtually every enterprise must have capital subscribed by its proprietors to enable it tooperate. In the case of a partnership, the partners contribute capital up to agreed amountswhich are credited to their accounts and shown as separate liabilities in the statement offinancial position (balance sheet).

A limited company obtains its capital, up to the amount it is authorised to issue, from itsmembers. A public company, on coming into existence, issues a prospectus inviting thepublic to subscribe for shares. The prospectus advertises the objects and prospects of thecompany in the most tempting manner possible. It is then up to the public to decide whetherthey wish to apply for shares.

A private company is not allowed to issue a prospectus and obtains its capital by means ofpersonal introductions made by the promoters.

Once the capital has been obtained, it is lumped together in one sum and credited to sharecapital account. This account does not show how many shares were subscribed by A or B;such information is given in the register of members, which is a statutory book that allcompanies must keep but which forms no part of the double-entry book-keeping.

Features of Share Capital

Once it has been introduced into the company, it generally cannot be repaid to the shareholders (although the shares may change hands). An exception to this is redeemable shares.

Each share has a stated nominal (sometimes called par) value. This can be regardedas the lowest price at which the share can be issued.

Share capital of a company may be divided into various classes, and the articles ofassociation define the respective rights of the various shares as regards, for example, entitlement to dividends or voting at company meetings.

Types of Share

(a) Ordinary Shares

The holder of ordinary shares in a limited company possesses no special right other than the ordinary right of every shareholder to participate in any available profits. If nodividend is declared for a particular year, the holder of ordinary shares receives noreturn on his shares for that year. On the other hand, in a year of high profits he may receive a much higher rate of dividend than other classes of shareholders. Ordinaryshares are often called equity share capital or just equities.

Deferred ordinary shareholders are entitled to a dividend after preferred ordinary shares.

(b) Preference Shares

Holders of preference shares are entitled to a prior claim, usually at a fixed rate, onany profits available for dividend. Thus when profits are small, preferenceshareholders must first receive their dividend at the fixed rate per cent, and any surplusmay then be available for a dividend on the ordinary shares – the rate per centdepending, of course, on the amount of profits available. So, as long as the businessis making a reasonable profit, a preference shareholder is sure of a fixed return eachyear on his investment. The holder of ordinary shares may receive a very low dividendin one year and a much higher one in another.


Preference shares can be divided into two classes:

Cumulative Preference Shares

When a company is unable to pay dividends on this type of preference share inany one year, or even in successive years, all arrears are allowed to accumulateand are payable out of future profits as they become available.

Non-cumulative Preference Shares

If the company is unable to pay the fixed dividend in any one year, dividends onnon-cumulative preference shares are not payable out of profits in future years.

(c) Redeemable Shares

The company's articles of association may authorise the issue of redeemable shares. These are issued with the intention of being redeemed at some future date. Onredemption the company repays the holders of such shares (provided they are fullypaid-up) out of a special reserve fund of assets or from the proceeds of a new issue ofshares which is made expressly for the purpose of redeeming the shares previouslyissued. Redeemable shares may be preference or ordinary shares.

(d) Participating Preference Shares

These are preference shares which are entitled to the usual dividend at the specified rate and, in addition, to participate in the remaining profits. As a general rule, theparticipating preference shareholders take their fixed dividend and then the preferredordinary shareholders take their fixed dividend, and any balance remaining is sharedby the participating preference and ordinary shareholders in specified proportions.

(e) Deferred, Founders or Management Shares

These normally rank last of all for dividend. Such shares are usually held by theoriginal owner of a business which has been taken over by a company, and they often form part or even the whole of the purchase price. Dividends paid to holders ofdeferred shares may fluctuate considerably, but in prosperous times they may be at a high rate.

You should note that this type of share has nothing to do with employee share schemes, where employees are given or allowed to buy ordinary shares in the company for which they work, at favourable rates – i.e. at less than the marketquotation on the Inventory Exchange.

Types of Capital

(a) Authorised, Registered or Nominal

These terms are synonymously used for capital that is specified as being the maximumamount of capital which the company has power to issue. Authorised capital must be stated in detail as a note to the statement of financial position.

(b) Issued (Allotted) or Subscribed Capital

It is quite a regular practice for companies to issue only part of their authorised capital. The term "issued capital" or "subscribed capital" is used to refer to the amount ofcapital which has actually been subscribed for. Capital falling under this heading willcomprise all shares issued to the public for cash and those issued as fully-paid-up tothe vendors of any business taken over by the company.

(c) Called-up Capital

The payment of the amount due on each share is not always made in full on issue, butmay be made in stages – for example, a specified amount on application and a further


amount when the shares are actually allotted, with the balance in one or moreinstalments known as calls. Thus, payment for a Tshs.1 share may be made as follows:

25c on application

25c on allotment

25c on first call

15c on second call

10c on third and final call.

If a company does not require all the cash at once on shares issued, it may call up onlywhat it needs. The portion of the subscribed capital which has actually been requestedby the company is known as the called-up capital.

Note that a shareholder's only liability in the event of the company's liquidation is to payup any portion of his shares which the company has not fully called up. If ashareholder has paid for his shares, he has no further liability.

(d) Paid-up Capital

When a company makes a call, some shareholders may default and not pay theamount requested. Thus the amount actually paid up will not always be the same as the called-up capital. For example, suppose a company has called up 75c per shareon its authorised capital of 20,000 Tshs.1 shares. The called-up capital is Tshs.15,000, but ifsome shareholders have defaulted, the actual amount paid up may be only Tshs.14,500. In this case, the paid-up capital is Tshs.14,500, and the called-up capital Tshs.15,000.

Paid-up capital is therefore the amount paid on the called-up capital.

(e) Uncalled Capital or Called-up Share Capital Not Paid

If, as in our example, a company has called up 75c per share on its authorised capital of Tshs.20,000 Tshs.1 shares, the uncalled capital is the amount not yet requested on shares already issued and partly paid for by the public and vendors. In this example the uncalled capital is Tshs.5,000.

Share Issues

When a company issues shares, it can call for the whole value of the share or shares boughtto be paid in one lump sum, or it can request the payment to be made in instalments. Generally, a certain amount is paid upon application, a certain amount on notification that thedirectors have accepted the offer to subscribe (the allotment), and a certain amount on eachof a number of calls (the instalments). For our purposes we only need to look at shares which are payable in full upon application.

(a) Shares at Par

This means that the company is asking the investor to pay the nominal value, e.g. if acompany issues 100,000 ordinary shares at Tshs.1, which is the par value, then the cashreceived will be Tshs.100,000. We can follow the entries in the accounts:

Cash

Share capital

Dr

Tshs.

100,000

Cr

Tshs.

100,000


The statement of financial position (balance sheet) will show:

Current assets

Cash

Share capital

Authorised, issued and fully paid 100,000 Tshs.1 shares

Tshs.

Tshs.100,000

Tshs.100,000

The basic rules of double entry apply and as you can see the basic formula is the same:

Capital (Tshs.100,000) Net assets (Cash: Tshs.100,000)

(b) Shares at a Premium

A successful company, which is paying good dividends or which has some otherfavourable feature, may issue shares at a price which is higher than the nominal value. For example, as in the last example, if the Tshs.1 share is issued it may be that theapplicant wil be asked to pay Tshs.1.50. The additional amount is known as a premium.

The entries in the accounts will now be:

Cash

Share capital

Share premium a/c

Dr

Tshs.

150,000

Cr

Tshs.

100,000

50,000

The statement of financial position will show:

Current assets

Cash

Share capital

Authorised, issued and fully paid 100,000 Tshs.1 shares


Notes:

Tshs.

150,000

100,000

50,000

150,000

The share premium is treated separately from the nominal value and must be recorded in a separate account which must be shown in the statement of financialposition. The Companies Act requires that the account is to be called the share premium account, and sets strict rules as to the uses to which this account canbe put.

The basic formula will now be:


Capital (Tshs.150,000) Net Assets (Cash: Tshs.150,000)

and this means that the additional sum paid belongs to the shareholders and assuch must always be shown together with the share capital.

Bonus Issues

When a company has substantial undistributed profits, the capital employed in the business is considerably greater than the issued capital. To bring the two more into line it iscommon practice to make a bonus issue of shares. Cash is not involved and it adds nothingto the net assets of the company – it simply divides the real capital into a larger numberof shares. This is illustrated by the following example.

A company's statement of financial position is as follows:

Tshs.000

Net assets

Ordinary shares


1,000

500

500

1,000

We can see that the real value of each share is Tshs.2, i.e. net assets Tshs.1,000 ÷ 500, but note that this is not the market value – only what each share is worth in terms of net assets owned compared with the nominal value of Tshs.1. Now suppose the company issued bonus shares on the basis of one new share for each existing share held. The statement of financial position will now be as follows:

Tshs.000

Net assets

Ordinary shares

1,000

1,000

Each shareholder has twice as many shares as before but is no better off since he ownsexactly the same assets as before. All that has happened is that the share capital representsall the net assets of the company. This does, of course, dilute the equity of the ordinary shareholders, but a more substantial share account can often enable a company to obtainfurther finance from other sources. It can also be used as a defence against a takeoverbecause the bidder cannot thereby obtain control and distribute the reserves.

Rights Issues

A useful method of raising fresh capital is first to offer new shares to existing shareholders, at something less than the current market price of the share (providedthat this is higher than the nominal value). This is a rights issue, and it is normally based onnumber of shares held, as with a bonus issue, e.g. one for ten. In this case, however, there is no obligation on the part of the existing shareholder to take advantage of the rights offer,but if he does the shares have to be paid for. The Companies Act requires that, before anyequity shares are issued for cash, they must first be offered to current shareholders.


Example

A company with an issued share capital of Tshs.500,000 in Tshs.1 ordinary shares decides to raisean additional Tshs.100,000 by means of a one-for-ten rights issue, at a price of Tshs.2 per share. The issue is fully subscribed and all moneys are received. The book-keeping entries are:

Dr: Cash

Cr: Share capital a/c

Cr: Share premium a/c

Tshs.100,000

Tshs.50,000

Tshs.50,000

Note the credit to share premium account. You should also note that neither bonus nor rightsissues can be allotted if they would cause the authorised capital to be exceeded.

Redeemable Shares

Redeemable shares may not be issued at a time when there are no issued shares of thecompany which are not redeemable. This means that there must be at all times some shares which are not redeemable.

Only fully-paid shares may be redeemed and, if a premium is paid on redemption, then normally the premium must be paid out of distributable profits, unless the premium effectivelyrepresents a repayment of capital because it was a share premium paid when the shares were issued. In that case the share premium may be deducted from the share premiumaccount.

When shares are redeemed, the redemption payments can be made either:

(a) From the proceeds of a new issue of shares, or

(b) From profits.

If (b) is chosen then an amount equal to the value of the shares redeemed has to betransferred from the distributable profits to an account known as the capital redemptionreserve.

The Act makes it clear that when shares are redeemed it must not be taken that there is a reduction of the company's authorised share capital.

By issuing redeemable shares the company is creating temporary membership which comesto an end either after a fixed period or at the shareholder's or company's option. When thetemporary membership comes to an end the shares that are redeemed must be cancelledout. To avoid the share capital contributed being depleted, a replenishment must be made as mentioned earlier, i.e. by an issue of fresh shares or by a transfer from the statement ofcomprehensive income (profit and loss account).

(Note: In the illustration which follows we have adopted a "standard" statement of financial position which we will discuss later. For the present, you need not be concerned with regard to how the statement of financial position is constructed.)

Example


On 31 July the statement of financial position of Heathfield Industries plc was as follows:

Notes:

Non-current assets

Current assets

Current liabilities

Capital and Reserves40,000 Tshs.1 ordinary shares

30,000 redeemable Tshs.1 shares fully

paid

Retained profits

Tshs.

47,000

(12,000 )

Tshs.

135,000

35,000

170,000

40,000

30,000

100,000

170,000

The bank balance which is included in the current assets stands at Tshs.20,000.

It is the intention of the directors to redeem Tshs.15,000 of the redeemable shares, theredemption being made by cash held at the bank.

After the redemption the statement of financial position would look like this:

Non-current assets

Current assets

Current liabilities

Capital and Reserves40,000 Tshs.1 ordinary shares

15,000 Tshs.1 redeemable shares

Capital redemption fund *

Retained profits

Tshs.

32,000

(12,000 )

Tshs.

135,000

20,000

155,000

40,000

15,000

15,000

85,000

155,000

* Under the Companies Act, when redeemable shares are redeemed and the funds toredeem are not provided by a new issue of shares, i.e. the cash is available, then there should be a transfer to this reserve from the statement of comprehensiveincome. This prevents the share capital being reduced, which is illegal other than bystatutory procedures.

Notes:

You will see that the basic formula is not changed. We still have:

Capital Tshs.170,000 Net assets Tshs.170,000

and after an equal amount has been taken from both sides (the reduction in cash and areduction in the redeemable shares) we have:

Capital Tshs.155,000 Net assets Tshs.155,000


There are very strict rules regarding the capital redemption reserve and the onlytransfer without court approval is by way of creating bonus shares.

You may wonder why there are so many strict rules. This is because the CompaniesActs are there to protect the shareholders.

Purchase of Own Shares

The Companies Act authorises a company to purchase its own shares provided that it is soauthorised by its articles. There are three main rules:

(a) It may purchase, but this does not mean subscribe for, shares.

(b) It cannot purchase all its shares leaving only redeemable shares.

(c) Shares may not be purchased unless they are fully paid.

Note: Redeeming or purchasing shares may appear to be the same thing, particularly as the same accounting procedures are adopted. The difference is that when shares that are redeemable are issued it is made quite clear at the point of issue that they will be redeemed. On the other hand, shares issued without this proviso cannot be redeemed. Such sharescan be bought back, but there is yet another golden rule, which is that a company cannot buyback all its shares and it must, after the purchase, have other shares in issue which are notredeemable. This is to prevent a company redeeming/purchasing all its shares and endingup with no members.

Advantage of Purchasing/Redeeming Shares

The main advantage of buying back or redeeming shares for public companies is when thereare large cash resources and it may be useful to return some of the surplus cash to theshareholders. This will avoid the pressures put on directors to use cash in uneconomic ways.

B. DIVIDENDS

The shareholder of a company gets his reward in the form of a share of the profits and his share is called a dividend.

Preference Dividends

The preference shareholder is one who is entitled to a specific rate of dividend before the ordinary or equity shareholders receive anything. The rate which will be paid is established when the shares are issued and is usually expressed as a percentage of the nominal value,e.g. 10% preference shares, which means that if the shareholder held 100 Tshs.1 preferenceshares he would receive a Tshs.10 dividend.

You should note that this type of share has declined and it is now more usual for companies to have a single class of shareholder.

Ordinary Dividends

Ordinary dividends are paid on ordinary or equity shares and the rate is usually expressed asa percentage, e.g. a 10% dividend on Tshs.500,000 ordinary shares will amount to Tshs.50,000.

The Act states that:

"All dividends shall be declared and paid according to the amounts paid up onshares on which the dividend is paid. A dividend while the company continues in business may be of any size that is recommended by the directors and approvedby the members."


The amount distributed to members is proportional to either the nominal value of the shares held, or the amount paid-up if they are partly paid.

Members may approve a dividend proposed by the directors or they can reject or reduce it,but they cannot increase a proposed dividend.

Interim Dividends

Provided the articles so authorise and there are, in the opinion of the directors, sufficientfunds to warrant paying an interim dividend, then one may be paid. This means thatapproximately halfway through the financial year, if the company is making sufficient profits, the directors have the authority to pay a dividend. The directors do not require the members to authorise such dividends. The dividends are calculated in the same way as the finalproposed dividend after the final accounts have been prepared.

C. DEBENTURES

A debenture is written acknowledgement of a loan to a company, which carries a fixed rateof interest.

Debentures are not part of the capital of a company. Interest payable to debenture holdersmust be paid as a matter of right and is therefore classified as loan interest, a financialexpense, in the statement of comprehensive income. A shareholder, on the other hand, is only paid a dividend on his investment if the company makes a profit, and such a dividend, ifpaid, is an appropriation of profit.

Types of Debenture

(a) Simple or Naked Debentures

These are debentures for which no security has been arranged as regards payment ofinterest or repayment of principal.

(b) Mortgage or Fully Secured Debentures

Debentures of this type are secured by a specific mortgage of certain fixed assets ofthe company.

(c) Floating Debentures

Debentures of this type are secured by a floating charge on the property of thecompany. This charge permits the company to deal with any of its assets in theordinary course of its business, unless and until the charge becomes fixed orcrystallised.

An example should make clear the difference between a mortgage, which is a fixedcharge over some specified asset, and a debenture which is secured by a floatingcharge. Suppose that a company has factories in London, Manchester and Glasgow. The company may borrow money by issuing debentures with a fixed charge over theGlasgow factory. As long as the loan remains unpaid, the company's use of theGlasgow factory is restricted by the mortgage. The company might wish to sell someof the buildings, but the charge on the property as a whole would be a hindrance.

On the other hand, if it issued floating debentures then there is no charge on anyspecific part of the assets of the company and, unless and until the company becomes insolvent, there is no restriction on the company acting freely in connection with any ofits property.


Rights of Debenture Holders

The rights of debenture holders are:

They are entitled to payment of interest at the agreed rate.

They are entitled to be repaid on expiry of the terms of the debenture as fixed by deed.

In the event of the company failing to pay the interest due to them or should they havereason to suppose that the assets upon which their loan is secured are in jeopardy,they may cause a receiver to be appointed. The receiver has power to sell a company's assets in order to satisfy all claims of the debenture holders.

The differences between shareholders and debenture holders are summarised in thefollowing table:

Debenture Holder

Debentures are not part of the capitalof a company.

Debentures rank first for capital andinterest.

Debenture interest must be paidwhether there are profits or not andis a charge to the statement ofcomprehensive income.

Debentures are usually secured by acharge on the company's assets.

Debenture holders are trade payables, not members of thecompany, and usually have no control over it.

Shareholder

Shares are part of the capital of acompany.

Shares are postponed to the claims of debenture holders and other tradepayables.

Dividends are payable out of profitsonly (appropriations) but only if there is adequate profit.

Shares cannot carry a charge.

Shareholders are members of the company and have indirect control over its management.

Debentures are not capital and so they should not be grouped with the shares in thestatement of financial position.

Gearing

The gearing of a company is the ratio of fixed-interest and fixed-dividend capital (i.e.debentures plus preference shares) to ordinary (equity) share capital plus reserves. We will consider this when we look at accounting ratios later, but you should be aware that acompany's gearing can have important repercussions, as debenture interest must be paidregardless of profitability.

Issues at Par and at a Discount

Whereas shares may not be issued at a discount, debentures may. This means that thelender pays less than the nominal value.

(a) Issues at Par

This is the same as issuing shares at par, i.e. a Tshs.100 debenture would raise Tshs.100.

(b) Issues at a Discount


This means that the value raised by the issue is less than the par value, e.g. a Tshs.100debenture would raise in cash, say, Tshs.80. This discount can be deducted from theshare premium account. The entries in the accounts would look like this:

Cash

Share premium account *

Debenture

Tshs.

80

20

Tshs.

100

* Clearly there would be a balance in the account. This illustration merely shows the basic entries.

As you can see, the debenture will appear in the accounts at its full value. You may wonder why a company would take this step and there is no mystery; it is just a ploy toencourage the public to invest.

Redemption of Debentures

As debentures can be issued at par or at a discount they can also be redeemed at a value greater than that paid, e.g. if you pay Tshs.80 then the redemption value is quite likely to be Tshs.100and if you pay the par value of Tshs.100 then you might well get Tshs.120 back. Again the difference– if any – can be written off to the share premium account.

There are three ways of financing a redemption of debentures:

Out of the proceeds of a new issue of shares or debentures.

Out of the balance on the statement of comprehensive income (profit and loss account)and existing resources of the business (cash).

Out of a sinking fund built up over the years with or without investments (the investment really being a savings fund).

When shares are redeemed or purchased there is a statutory requirement to make a transferto the capital redemption reserve. The reason for this is because shares are part of thecapital of the company whereas debentures are merely long-term liabilities or loans.

Restrictions on Borrowings

Restrictions on borrowings outstanding at any time may be contained in the articles ofassociation of the company, imposed by resolution of shareholders, or included in the loanagreement or trust deed.

D. TYPES AND SOURCES OF FINANCE

Balancing Fixed and Working Capital

The assets of a business are financed by its liabilities, as shown in the statement of financial position. Every business needs:

Fixed capital – to finance fixed assets.

Working capital – to finance current assets.

Ultimately, all assets must be supported by the long-term capital base, but short-termborrowings may be used to cover temporary lulls in trade in order to maintain the return oncapital employed.


Working capital – inventories, trade receivables and cash – must be carefully managed sothat it is adequate but not excessive.

Types of Business and Capital Structure

The type of business organisation influences the capital structure. In a small business thefinancial structure tends to be relatively straightforward. On the other hand, with the large public company an extremely complicated capital structure may be present.

(a) Sole Trader and Partnership

With the sole trader or partnership, the initial funds generally come from the owners themselves. Any extra requirements for the seasonal needs or other purposes may be obtained from a bank. Remember also that credit purchases are a very important form of financing.

The fixed assets of the sole trader's business or the partnership may be obtained byleasing or by hire purchase; all that the owner of the business has to do is to establisha good credit standing.

With this type of small business, great care must be taken to ensure that overtradingdoes not occur. Overtrading is when there is a high turnover, requiring more inventoryand higher costs, with an insufficient capital base to support it. There is a great danger of overtrading when too much finance is obtained through hire purchase or the leasingof premises or other fixed assets. Payments have to be made in the form of interest orsimilar charges, and these are fixed charges which have to be covered whether thebusiness makes a profit or not.

(b) Private Limited Company

The private company requires greater cash resources and, when finance from the owners is inadequate, additional cash must be obtained from external sources. The constraint here is that shares cannot be offered to the general public.

(c) Public Limited Company

The public company can obtain funds through the issue of shares to the general public.

In determining the types of funds to be raised, every business must consider the reasons forneeding these funds and the use to which they will be put. For example, it is not likely thatshare capital would be raised to solve a short-term liquidity problem.

Long-term Funds

(a) Owners' Capital

This is the amount contributed by the owner(s) of a business, and it is supplemented byretained profits.

In the case of a limited company, a great many individuals can own shares in the company. There are two main types of shares – ordinary shares and preferenceshares, as we have seen. The decision about the proportions of ordinary shares andpreference shares (if any) to issue is not an easy one, and it will be influenced by thetype of company, as well as by other factors.

(b) Loans

There are a number of forms of longer-term loan available to a business:

Unsecured Loan

This is an advance for a specified sum which is repaid at a future agreed date. Interest is charged per annum on the total amount of the loan or on the amountoutstanding.

Secured Loans


These tend to be for larger amounts over longer periods. Security is required inthe form of a specific asset or it is spread over all the assets of the business (a"floating" charge). If the borrower defaults on the loan, the lender is allowed todispose of the secured asset(s) to recover the amount owed to him. Since there is less risk to the lender, secured loans are cheaper than unsecured ones.

Mortgage Loans

These are specific secured loans for the purchase of an asset, the asset itselfgiving security to the lender – e.g. purchase of premises.

Debentures

These, as we've seen, are a special type of company loan, broken into small-value units to allow transferability. They carry a fixed rate of interest which is acharge against profits and has to be paid irrespective of the level of profits.

Note that loan interest is a charge against profits and it is, therefore, allowable for taxpurposes, unlike dividends on shares.

(c) Venture Capital

Obtaining finance to start up a new business can be very difficult. Venture capital is finance provided by (an) investor(s) who is (are) willing to take a risk that the newcompany will be successful. Usually, a business proposal plan will need to besubmitted to the venture capitalist, so that the likely success of the business can beassessed.

The investor(s) providing venture capital may provide it just in the form of a debenture loan or, more likely, in the form of a package including share capital and a long-termloan. A member of the venture capital company is normally appointed to the board ofthe new company, to ensure some control over the investment.

(d) Leasing (longer-term)

This source of funds has grown substantially in recent years, and it is an important method of funding the acquisition of fixed assets. The business selects its required asset and the leasing company purchases it. Then the business uses the asset andpays the leasing company a rent. The payments are regular (e.g. monthly) and forfixed amounts.

A development of leasing is a process called sale and leaseback, in which the assetsowned and used by a business are sold to a leasing company and then rented backover a long period. The cash proceeds from the sale provide immediate funds for business use.

Lease purchase agreements are also possible, where part of the fixed monthlypayment goes towards the purchase of the asset and part is a rental cost.

(e) Hire Purchase (longer-term)

This is very similar to leasing, although the ultimate objective, in this case, is for thebusiness to acquire title to the asset when the final hire-purchase payment is made. The business can thus claim capital allowances on such assets, which reduce its taxliability.


Shorter-term Funds

(a) Trade Credit

Trade credit is a significant source of funds for most businesses, because payment canbe made after the receipt of goods/services. However, a balance must be achievedbetween using trade credit for funding and the problem of loss of supplier goodwill if payments are regularly late.

(b) Overdrafts

Here a bank allows the business to overdraw on its account up to a certain level. Thisis a very common form of short-term finance.

(c) Grants (these can be for long- or short-term purposes)

Grants are mainly provided by the government and its agencies. They include grantsfor special projects, e.g. energy-conservation grants for specific industries, such as mining, and grants for specific geographical areas.

(d) Leasing and Hire Purchase

These can also be arranged on a short-term basis.

(f) Factoring

This is a service provided to a business which helps increase its liquidity. The factoringorganisation will, for a fee, take over the accounts section of its client and send outinvoices and collect money from trade receivables. It also provides a service wherebythe client may receive up to, say, 80% of the value of a sales invoice as soon as it issent to the customer and the remaining money is passed on when collected by the factor.

The problem with this method is that factors are very careful about accepting clients,and they reject many organisations which approach them. Also, some personal contactwith customers is lost, which can harm trade.

Interest Rate Exposure

When considering a loan or other financial arrangement, the benefits deriving from what thatborrowing finances will be set against its forecast costs. If the economic situation changes and the difference between costs and benefits is squeezed (say by increased costs offinancing) the company will become less profitable. The general level of interest rates is avery important factor in financial planning.

Sources of External Finance

Having looked at the various types of finance available, let's now consider the organisationswhich provide or help provide funds.

(a) High Street Banks

These play a vital part in the provision of funds, particularly to small businesses. Theyprovide:

Overdrafts

Personal loans – unsecured

Personal loans – secured

Medium-term loans – designed to help businesses to expand and develop. Often, repayments can be tailored to suit the individual borrower.

(b) Merchant Banks


These provide development capital but they are very selective in the organisations theychoose to help. Normally the bankers require, as security, a seat on the board ofdirectors and active involvement in the management of the company. Developmentpurposes include expansion, buying out partners, product development, andovercoming tax problems.

(c) Specialist Institutions

There are a number of specialist institutions – e.g. 3i Group (Investors in Industry) –which provide finance, particularly for new business start-ups or management buyouts.

(d) Foreign Banks

These account for about 30% of all bank advances to UK manufacturing industries. They are often slightly cheaper than clearing bank loans. Foreign banks are unlikely tolend below Tshs.250,000.

(e) Insurance Companies

These can be used for obtaining mortgage facilities on the purchase of property.

(f) Pension Funds

Several pension funds have invested in company projects.

(g) Share Issues through the Stock Exchange

Companies wishing to raise funds through a public issue of shares invariably use theservices of an issuing house. These are experts in new issues, and they provide administrative support and advice.

(h) Local Authorities

These have certain powers to provide assistance to industry where this would benefit the local area. Finance is usually in the form of loans, improvement grants or provisionof factory space.

(j) Central Government and the European Union

There are a number of different fields in which assistance is provided from thesesources – e.g. regional aid, tax relief for investing in new companies.

Examples of Business Financing

The following is the statement of financial position of a newly opened corner shop/generalstore. Do you feel that the fixed and working capital has been correctly balanced? Commenton any different approach that you might like to see as regards financing.


Statement of Financial Position as at . . . . . . . . .

Non-current assetsLand and buildings

Fittings

Current Assets

Inventory

Cash

Current Liabilities

Bank overdraft

Trade payables


Mortgage loan

Capital

Tshs.

1,000

500

1,500

5,000

1,000

6,000

Tshs.

35,000

5,000

(4,500 )

35,500

30,000

5,500

5,500

This example is somewhat "larger than life" in that it is most unlikely that such a venturewould be financed.

Fixed and working capital has not been well balanced at all. It seems that inventory has been purchased entirely on credit and that it is at a very low level. Unless another delivery isexpected shortly it seems unlikely that Tshs.1,000 inventory would satisfy customers for very long. In addition, the bank overdraft seems to be financing fixed assets (fittings). This is amismatch of short- and long-term and is poor financing.

As to the remainder of the financing, much of the land and buildings appears to be undermortgage, with a very small capital contribution from the owners.

The venture looks doomed from the beginning. Think about the level of profit needed tomeet interest charges alone on this level of borrowing – without considering repayment.

E. MANAGEMENT OF WORKING CAPITAL

Working Capital Cycle

Working capital is the capital needed by the business to carry on its day- to-day operational activities.

Working capital is defined as current assets less current liabilities.

When a business begins to operate, cash will initially be provided by the proprietor orshareholders. This cash is then used to purchase fixed assets, with part being held to buyinventories of materials and to pay employees' wages. This finances the setting-up of the business to produce goods/services to sell to customers for cash, which sooner or later is received back by the business and used to purchase further materials, pay wages, etc.; andso the process is repeated.

Cash from tradereceivables

TRADERECEIVABLES

CASH

INVENTORY


Expenses incurred with suppliers/

employees

TRADEPAYABLES

Goods/servicesproduced

Problems arise when, at any given time in the business cycle, there is insufficient cash to paytrade payables, who could have the business placed in liquidation if payment of debts is not received. An alternative would be for the business to borrow to overcome the cash shortage,but this can be costly in terms of interest payments, even if a bank is prepared to grant a loan.

Striking the Right Balance

Working capital requirements can fluctuate because of seasonal business variations,interruption to normal trading conditions, or government influences, e.g. changes in interestor tax rates. Unless the business has sufficient working capital available to cope with thesefluctuations, expensive loans become necessary; otherwise insolvency may result. On theother hand, the situation may arise where a business has too much working capital tied up inidle inventories or with large trade receivables which could lose interest and therefore reduceprofits.

Irrespective of the method used for financing fixed and current assets, it is extremelyimportant to ensure that there is sufficient working capital at all times but that this is notexcessive. If working capital is in short supply, the fixed assets cannot be employed aseffectively as is required to earn maximum profits. Conversely, if the working capital is too high, too much money is being locked up in inventories and other current assets. Possibly,the excessive working capital will have been built up at the sacrifice of fixed assets. If this isso, there will be a tendency for low efficiency to persist, with the inevitable running down ofprofits.

The management of working capital is an extremely important function in a business. It is mainly a balancing process between the cost of holding current assets and the risksassociated with holding very small or zero amounts of them.

(a) Management of Inventories

Inventories may include raw materials, work in progress and/or finished goods. The balance to be struck here is between holding or not holding inventories.

(i) The cost of holding inventories

These include:

Financing costs – the cost of producing funds to acquire the inventory held

Storage costs

Insurance costs


Cost of losses as a result of theft, damage, etc.

Obsolescence cost and deterioration costs

These costs can be considerable, and estimates suggest they can be between 20% and 100% per annum of the value of the inventory held.

(ii) The cost of holding very low (or zero) inventories

These include

Cost of loss of customer goodwill if inventories not available

Ordering costs – low inventory levels are usually associated with higher ordering costs than are bulk purchases

Cost of production hold-ups owing to insufficient inventories

The organisation will set the balance which achieves the minimum total cost, andarrive at optimal inventory levels.

(b) Management of Trade Receivables

The management of trade receivables requires identification and balancing of thefollowing costs:

(i) Costs of allowing credit

These include:

Financing costs

Cost of maintaining trade receivables' accounting records

Cost of collecting the debts

Cost of bad debts written off

Cost of obtaining a credit reference

Inflation cost – outstanding debts in periods of high inflation will lose valuein terms of purchasing power

(ii) Costs of refusing credit

These include:

Loss of customer goodwill

Security costs owing to increased cash collection

Again, the organisation will attempt to balance the two categories of costs – although this is not an easy task, as costs are often difficult to quantify. It is normal practice toestablish credit limits for individual trade receivables.

(c) Management of Cash

Again, two categories of cost need to be balanced:

(i) Costs of holding cash

These include

Loss of interest if cash were invested

Loss of purchasing power during times of high inflation

Security and insurance costs

(ii) Costs of not holding cash

These include:

Cost of inability to meet bills as they fall due

Cost of lost opportunities for special-offer purchases


Cost of borrowing to obtain cash to meet unexpected demands

Once again, the organisation must balance these costs to arrive at an optimal level of cash to hold. The technique of cash budgeting is of great help in cash management.

Chapter 9

Financial Reconstruction

Contents

Introduction

A. Redemption of Shares

B. Accounting Treatment

C. Example of Redemption of Preference Shares

D. Example of Redemption of Ordinary Shares

E. Redemption of Debentures

Redemption by Means of a Sinking Fund – Accounting Treatment

Example of Redemption of Debentures

221

Page

222

222

223

224

226

229

229

230

222 Financial Reconstruction

INTRODUCTION

Within the UK companies are legally permitted to buy-in their own shares. This may not be the case in other countries. One key reason for a company to wish to buy-in its own shares stems from the desire of management to improve earnings per share, a financial ratio in which investors are becoming increasingly interested. Buy-in opportunities will beconsidered against financial performance, share price and capital structure. For instance, a company with a low level of gearing may find it advantageous to trade on borrowed cashwhich will improve the P/E ratio. A further option may be to provide a cash realisation for alarge shareholding of a director.

Repurchases, or buy-ins, of shares may be made by UK companies out of their distributableprofits or out of the proceeds of a new issue of shares made especially for the purpose,provided that they are authorised to do so in the company's Articles of Association. A company may not, however, purchase its own shares:

Where, as a result of the transaction, there would no longer be any member of thecompany holding other than redeemable shares.

Unless they are fully paid and the terms of the purchase provide for payment on purchase.

From a tax point of view, the share buy-in is a partial distribution, and a partial return ofprescribed capital.

The change in the capital base will cause management to rethink its investment decisions,gearing, interest cover, earnings, etc. This is particularly important as the financial institutions focus more attention on income and gearing as an indicator of financial risk.

A. REDEMPTION OF SHARES

The issued share capital of companies, like the fixed capital of partners, should be regardedas a permanent fund in the business. However, the Companies Act allows for the issue ofpreference shares which are redeemable and for a company, if authorised by its Articles, toissue redeemable shares of any class, thus providing the company with greater flexibility. The Articles must specify the terms of redemption, i.e. the time and the price to be paid. Preference shares are used in the illustration that follows. The principles are the same forredeemable ordinary shares.

Public companies may only redeem or purchase their own shares out of distributable profits, or out of the proceeds of an issue of new shares made expressly for that purpose. Privatecompanies may redeem or purchase their own shares out of capital, but only to the extentthat the purchase price exceeds available distributable profits and the proceeds of a newshare issue.

Where shares are not redeemed wholly out of the proceeds of a new issue of shares, inorder that the capital of the company is not depleted, a sum is required to be transferred to acapital redemption reserve (CRR), equal to the difference between the nominal value of theshares redeemed and the aggregate proceeds of any new shares issued. The CRR cannot be used to pay a dividend to shareholders – its only use is to make a bonus issue of shares to the existing shareholders. The purpose of this is again to prevent a reduction of capital.

Note that any premium payable by the company on redemption of shares must be provided in all cases out of the share premium account, if one exists, or out of profits available forappropriation (payment of a dividend), i.e. the premium cannot be provided out of the proceeds of a new issue of shares, neither can it be carried forward in the statement offinancial position and written off out of future profits.

B. ACCOUNTING TREATMENT

Financial Reconstruction 223

The accounting entries necessary to redeem preference shares are set out below by way ofa series of steps:

Description

Debited

Accounts

Credited

1. Making a bonus issue of shares General reserve Bonus account

Bonus account Share capital account

or double entry direct

General reserve

2. Making a fresh issue – nominal value Cash

Share capital account

Share capital account

3. Redemption of preference shares General reserve or Capital redemptionotherwise than out of proceeds of fresh Income statementissue of shares (Statement of

comprehensiveincome)

reserve (CRR)

4. Upon commencing redemption ofpreference shares – nominal value ofshares to be redeemed

5. Upon repaying shareholders (full sum due including any premium onredemption)

6. Balance on preference shareredemption account, being premium

Preference sharecapital account

Preference shareredemption account

Share premiumaccount and/orIncome statement

Preference shareredemption account (a temporary ledgera/c opened just forpurposes of the redemption)

Cash

Preference shareredemption account


C. EXAMPLE OF REDEMPTION OF PREFERENCESHARES

A company's share capital comprises:

Ordinary shares

Preference shares 10% redeemable

Authorised

Tshs.

100,000

50,000

150,000

Called Up

Tshs.

50,000

50,000

100,000

In addition, the balance on the share premium account is Tshs.750 and on the statement ofcomprehensive income (income statement) Tshs.42,500.

The preference shares are redeemable at a premium of 2% at any time during the yearended 31 October, and the following transactions took place:

31 March: 25,000 of the preference shares were redeemed

31 October: 20,000 ordinary shares were issued at a premium of 1p per share

31 October: The balance of the preference shares was redeemed

The ledger accounts to record the above transactions and the statement of financial positionextract at 31 October, will be as follows:

Ordinary Share Capital Account

Tshs

. 1 Nov Balance b/f Cash

Tshs.

50,000

20,000

31 Mar Redemption a/c

31 Oct Redemption a/c

31 Mar Preference share

Preference Share Capital Account

Tshs.

25,000 1 Nov Balance b/f

25,000

50,000

Share Premium Account

Tshs.

1 Nov Balance b/f

Tshs.

50,000

50,000

Tshs.

750 redemption a/c

31 Oct Preference shareredemption a/c

500

450

950

Cash 200

950

Capital Redemption Reserve

Tshs.


Tshs.

31 Mar CRR

31 Oct CRR

31 Mar Income statement

31 Oct Income statement

Statement of Comprehensive Income

Tshs.

25,000 1 Nov Balance b/f 4,800

25,000

4,800

29,800

Tshs.

42,500

Preference shareredemption a/c Balance c/d

50

12,650

42,500

Balance b/f

42,500

12,650

NB This account is shown in this form for simplicity of explanation.

Preference Share Redemption Account

Tshs. Tshs. 31 Mar Cash

31 Oct Cash

Workings

CRR Transfers

25,500 31 Mar Preference sharecapital Share premium a/c

25,500

25,500 31 Oct Preference sharecapital

Share premium a/c

Income statement

25,500

25,000

500

25,500

25,000

450

50

25,500

Date

31 Mar

31 Oct

Preference Shares Redeemed (Nominal)

25,000

25,000

50,000

New Issue of Shares(Aggregate Proceeds)

–

20,200

20,200

CRR Transfer

25,000

4,800

29,800


Statement of Financial Position (extract at 31 October)

Share Capital and Reserves Called-up share capital CRR

Tshs.

29,800

Tshs.

70,000

Income statement 12,650 42,450

112,450

Authorised capital would be shown by way of a statement of financial position note.

D. EXAMPLE OF REDEMPTION OF ORDINARY SHARES

The statement of financial position of Mutter Vater plc at 31 December Year 1 showed thefollowing extract:

Tshs.


Authorised ordinary share capital (Tshs.1 each)

Called-up ordinary share capital

7% redeemable ordinary shares at 50p each

Share premium account (arising on issue of 7% redeemable ordinary shares)

General reserve

During Year 2 the following transactions took place:

200,000 (by way of note)

80,000

60,000

2,000

186,000

1 March: (1) The redeemable shares were all redeemed at a premium of 20p per share.

(2) 20,000 Tshs.1 8% debentures were issued at 95, to help pay for theredemption. (95 means at a discount of 5%.)

(3) 40,000 ordinary shares were issued at an issue price of Tshs.1.40 to assist inpaying for the redemption.

1 July: A bonus issue of one for every four ordinary shares held was made using thebalance on the capital redemption reserve and general reserve.

The relevant ledger account entries (excluding cash) and the final statement of financial position extract will be as follows:

Year 2

Mutter Vater plc

Ordinary Share Capital Account

Tshs. Year 2


Tshs.

1 July Balance c/d 150,000 1 Mar Balance b/f

Application and allotment account

1 July 1 for 4 Bonus issue:

CRR

General reserve

150,000

7% Redeemable Ordinary Shares Account

80,000

40,000

4,000

26,000

150,000

Year 2

1 Mar Redemption of ordinaryshares

Tshs.

60,000

Year 2

1 Mar Balance b/f

Tshs.

60,000

Year 2

1 Mar Redemption of ordinary


Tshs. Year 2

1 Mar Balance b/f

Tshs.

2,000 shares a/c Debenture discount Balance c/d

2,000 1,000

15,000

18,000

Application and allotment account 16,000

18,000

Year 2

1 Mar Balance c/d

8% Tshs.1 Debenture Account

Tshs. Year 2

20,000 1 Mar Cash

Debenture discount

20,000

Debenture Discount Account

Tshs.

19,000

1,000

20,000

Year 2 Tshs. Year 2 Tshs.

1 Mar 8% Debentures 1,000 1 Mar Share premiumaccount

1,000


Redemption Of Ordinary Shares Account

Year 2 Tshs. Year 2 Tshs.

1 Mar Cash 84,000 1 Mar Ordinary shares

Premium on redemption: Share premium General reserve

84,000

General Reserve

60,000

2,000

22,000

84,000

Year 2

1 Mar Redemption of equity

Tshs. Year 2

1 Mar Balance b/f

Tshs.

186,000 shares CRR

22,000 4,000

1 July Ordinary share capital 26,000

Year 2

Balance c/d 134,000

186,000

Capital Redemption Reserve

Tshs. Year 2

186,000

Tshs.

1 July Ordinary share capital 4,000 1 Mar General reserve

Extract from Statement of Financial Position as at 1 July Year 3

Tshs.

Creditors: Amounts falling due after more than one year

Ts

hs

.

4,000

8% Tshs.1 Debentures




General reserve

20,000

150,000

15,000

134,000 299,000

NB Authorised share capital details would be shown by way of a note to the statement offinancial position.

Calculations: Tshs.

New issue proceeds 40,000 × Tshs.1.40 56,000

Nominal sum of redemption

Transfer to CRR

60,000

4,000

E. REDEMPTION OF DEBENTURES


Debentures are a written acknowledgment of a loan to the company, given under seal, andcarrying a fixed rate of interest. Debentures do not form part of the share capital of the company and may be issued at a premium or discount. They are, however, shown in the ledger and hence the statement of financial position at their nominal value, interest beingcalculated on this figure.

The debenture trust deed will specify whether debentures will be redeemed at par or at apremium and the way the company will actually redeem the debentures. Along with the share capital and reserves, the debentures finance a company's operating assets. Thusalthough there is no statutory requirement to establish the equivalent of a CRR, the financingmust be maintained. This can be achieved by either:

The proceeds of a new issue of shares or debentures; or

Annual appropriations from the statement of comprehensive income to a debentureredemption account.

The cash needed to redeem the debentures must also be found. This can be accumulated by investing an amount each year equal to the appropriation to debenture redemptionaccount. This is also known as the sinking fund method.

Redemption by Means of a Sinking Fund – Accounting Treatment

The accounting entries necessary to redeem debentures are set out by way of a series ofsteps below:

Sinking Fund Maintenance

Description

Debited

Accounts

Credited

1. Amount appropriated to sinking fundeach year

Amount transferred to sinking fundinvestment account

Income statement

Sinking fundinvestment account

Sinking fund account

Ordinary cash

2. Interest received from sinking fund Sinking fund cash Sinking fund account

3. Reinvesting income received

4. Sale of sinking fund investment

5. Profit on sale of sinking fundinvestments


Sinking fund cash


Sinking fund cash


Sinking fund account

Loss on sale of sinking fund investments

Sinking fund account Sinking fundinvestment account


Actual Debenture Redemption

Description

Debited Accounts

Credited

1. Nominal value of debentures redeemed

Debenture account Debenture redemptionaccount

2. Amount paid to redeem debentures Debenture redemption Sinking fund cash account

3. Profit on redemption debentures(redeemed at a discount)

4. Loss on redemption debentures(redeemed at a premium)

5. Nominal amount of debentures redeemed

6. Balance of sinking fund account

Debenture redemption Sinking fund account account

Sinking fund account Debenture redemptionaccount

Sinking fund account Non-distributablereserves

Sinking fund account Income statement

7. Balance on sinking fund cashaccount

Ordinary cash Sinking fund cash

Note: the balance on 6 and 7 above should be equal.

Example of Redemption of Debentures

X Co. has Tshs.50,000 5% debentures redeemable at 31 October Year 2. On 1 November Year 1 a sinking fund stands in the books at Tshs.45,000 represented by investments.

During the year ended 31 October Year 2 the following transactions occurred:

Investments which cost Tshs.5,000 were sold for Tshs.6,000.

Tshs.5,000 debentures redeemed for Tshs.4,900 which included Tshs.100 of accrued interest.

Tshs.3,000 income from sinking fund investments was received.

Interest on debentures for half-year paid.

The balance of the investments remaining were sold for Tshs.47,500.

Balance of debentures redeemed at a premium of 2%.

Interest on debentures for half-year paid.

The necessary ledger accounts recording the above transactions will be as follows.

Note that the book-keeping rules are based on the following equation:

Sinking fund (investments plus cash) Asset accounts (a credit balance) (debit balances)

5% Debentures Account

Tshs.

Debenture redemption account 5,000 Balance b/f

Debenture redemption account 45,000

50,000

Debenture Redemption Account

Tshs.


Tshs.

50,000

50,000

Tshs.

Sinking fund cash Sinking fund account

(profit on purchase)

Sinking fund cash

Reserves

4,800 Debenture account

200

5,000

45,900 5% Debenture account Sinking fund account 2%

premium

45,900

Sinking Fund Account

Tshs.

5,000 Balance b/f

5,000

5,000

45,000

900

45,900

Tshs.

45,000 Debentures redemption

account 2% premium 900 Sinking fund investment account

1,000

Reserves

Income statement

Balance b/f

Sinking fund

45,000 Debenture redemption account

5,800 Sinking fund cash – income Sinking fund investment account

56,700

Sinking Fund Investment Account

Tshs.

45,000 Sinking fund cash

Sinking fund cash

200

3,000

7,500

56,700

Tshs.

6,000

47,500 (profit on sale investment)

Sinking fund account (profit on sale investment)

1,000

7,500

53,500 53,500


Sinking Fund Cash

Tshs. Tshs.

Sinking fund 6,000 Debenture redemption account 4,800

Investment account ordinarycash (reimbursement ofaccrued interest) 100

Debenture interest account 100

4,900

Sinking fund account Sinking fund investment account

3,000 Debenture redemption account (45,000 + 2% × 45,000)

45,900

– proceeds 47,500 Ordinary cash 5,800

Sinking fund cash – accrued interest on redemption ofdebentures

56,600

Debenture Interest Account

Tshs.

Income statement – debentureinterest for year

100

56,600

Tshs.

2,600

Ordinary cash – interest for half- year (5% × 50,000 × ½)

Ordinary cash – interest for half- year

1,250

1,250

2,600 2,600

Non-Distributable Reserves

Tshs.

Sinking fund Sinking fund

Tshs.

5,000 45,000

50,000

Chapter 10

233

Group Accounts 1: Regulatory and Accounting Framework

Contents

Introduction

A. IAS 27: Consolidated and Separate Financial Statements

Definitions

Presentation of Consolidated Accounts

Accounting Requirements of IAS 27

B. IFRS 3: Business Combinations

Scope

Application of the Purchase/Acquisition Method

C. IAS 28: Investments in Associates

Identification of Associates Standard Accounting Practice for Associated Companies

Example of Normal Presentation for an Associate

D. IFRS 3: Fair Values in Acquisition Accounting

E. Alternative Methods of Accounting for Group Companies

Acquisition Method

Proportional Consolidation

Equity Method

F. Merger Accounting

Features of Merger Accounting Preparation of Financial Statements using Merger Accounting Principles

Page

234

234

234

235

235

236

236

236

237

237238

239

240

241

242

243

244

244

244245

234 Group Accounts 1: Regulatory and Accounting Framework

INTRODUCTION

Many companies have more than one type of business activity and trade in differentgeographical locations. In these circumstances there are often advantages in establishingseparate companies to undertake separate activities or to trade in other countries. The shares in the individual companies, the subsidiaries, are usually owned by a holdingcompany which may or may not be quoted on the stock market.

Each, as we have seen in chapter 3, has to prepare its own individual published accounts. In the holding company's accounts the investments in the subsidiary companies will be carriedat cost and the only income recognised in its accounts concerning the subsidiaries will bedividends receivable.

Over the years the subsidiaries will hopefully earn profits and, if these are not all paid in theform of dividends, will accumulate assets. Hence the holding company's accounts will notreflect the true value of the investment nor its earnings.

The solution adopted to this problem was for the holding company to prepare an additional set of consolidated or group accounts which would reflect the "economic substance overthe legal form" of the group. The consolidated accounts would show the assets and liabilitiesof the group as if they were owned directly by the holding company.

Over the years the various definitions concerning group companies have evolved along with the criteria for preparing group accounts. The rules dealing with the preparation of group accounts are now contained in:

IFRS 3: Business combinations

IAS 27: Consolidated and separate financial statements

IAS 28: Investments in associates

We will consider all of these over the last part of your course.

A. IAS 27: CONSOLIDATED AND SEPARATE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

IAS 27 deals with the content of the consolidated financial statements, not with the methods of accounting for business combinations nor the issue of goodwill on consolidation. These latter issues are dealt with in IFRS 3.

Definitions

IAS 27 broadly defines a subsidiary undertaking as an entity, including an unincorporated entity such as a partnership, that is controlled by another entity (known as the parent).

So what is control?

Control is defined in the standard as the power to govern the financial and operating policiesof an entity so as to obtain benefits from its activities. The parent can control a subsidiary if :

It owns, directly or indirectly through subsidiaries, over more than half of the votingpower of an entity unless it can be clearly demonstrated that such ownership does notconstitute control

It owns half or less than half of the voting power but has power over more than half thevoting power by virtue of an agreement with other investors

It has the power to govern the financial and operating policies of the entity under astatute or agreement

Group Accounts 1: Regulatory and Accounting Framework 235

It has the power to appoint or remove the majority of the members of the board ofdirectors or equivalent governing body also indicates control

It has the power to cast the majority of votes at meetings of the board of directors orequivalent governing body also indicates control.

Clearly note, therefore, that a business may own less than 50% of the equity shares in another, but if it has control as defined above then the other entity will constitute a subsidiary.

Consider the following examples to test your understanding of this concept of control.

Example 1

A owns 100% of the equity of C, who in turn owns 20% of the equity of B. A also owns 33% of the equity of B. Voting rights in A, B and C are in relation to equity ownership.

Is B a subsidiary of A?

Example 2

A owns 42% of the voting rights of B and also has the power to appoint or remove fiveof the nine members of the its board of directors.


Exercise 3

A owns 49% of the voting rights of B.


Answers

In example 1, the answer is YES. As a controls C totally, then it also controls20% of B. If we add this to A's own holding, then we have a total of 53% which is more than the half required to give control.

In example 2, the answer is also YES. A clearly controls the board of directors. If A only had the power to remove 4 members of the board, then B would not be a subsidiary as control would not have been established.

In example 3, this time the answer is NO. A does not control over half of B.

Minority interest (or non-controlling interest) is that portion of the profit or loss and net assetsof a subsidiary attributable to equity interests that are not owned, directly or indirectly throughsubsidiaries, by the parent.

Presentation of Consolidated Accounts

A parent is required to present consolidated financial statements in which it consolidates itsinvestments in subsidiaries, except where:

(a) the parent is a wholly owned or partly owned subsidiary of another entity

(b) the parent's debt or equity instruments are not traded in a public market, or the parentis not in the process of issuing any class of instruments in a public market

(c) the ultimate or any intermediate parent produces consolidated statements available forpublic use that comply with IFRS.

Accounting Requirements of IAS 27

IAS 27 identifies the consolidation procedures as follows.

Eliminate the carrying amount of the parent's investment and the parent's share ofequity in each subsidiary


Allocate the profit or loss for the period on the face of the statement of comprehensiveincome between the parent and the minority interest

Identify minority interest in consolidated subsidiaries' net assets and present themwithin equity on the statement of financial position, but separately from parent equity

Eliminate intergroup balances and transactions in full

Prepare the consolidated statements using uniform accounting policies

Include the subsidiaries income and expenses only from the date of acquisition to datewhen control ceases

Make adjustments where reporting dates between parent and subsidiary are longer that three months.

We deal with the practical application of these in some detail when preparing consolidatedaccounts in chapter 11, so you will need to remember the points in this list.

B. IFRS 3: BUSINESS COMBINATIONS

IFRS 3 governs accounting for business combinations other than joint ventures and a number of other unusual arrangements.

It requires all business combinations to be accounted for by applying the purchase method of consolidation. This method is also known as acquisition accounting or the parent method. It basically requires the acquirer (the parent) to recognise the acquiree's (the subsidiary's) assets and liabilities at their fair values at the acquisition date, and also to recognise purchased goodwill.

Remember that, in the preparation of individual financial statements, fair values are notrequired to be used – original cost is the norm – and, therefore, recognising the subsidiary'sassets and liabilities at fair value will give rise to a revaluation reserve within the consolidatedaccounts. This revaluation need not appear in the individual financial statements of thesubsidiary.

Scope

IFRS 3 is applied to all business combinations except:

Business combinations in which separate entities are brought together to form a jointventure

Business combinations under common control

Business combinations involving two or more mutual entities

Business combinations in which separate businesses are brought together to form areporting entity by contract alone without obtaining of an ownership interest.

A business combination can be structured in many different ways, but the result of nearly allof them is that one business will be the parent and one the subsidiary, at least according tothe standard. Many accountants have disputed this and, for a time, when it was difficult to identify parent and subsidiary and it was felt that a merger had actually occurred, thenmerger accounting was permitted. Merger accounting is now NOT permitted under IFRS 3.

Application of the Purchase/Acquisition Method

Applying the purchase method involves the following steps:

Identify an parent – identify which party has control of the other


Measure the cost of the business combination at fair value – the amount paid for thesubsidiary. Note that this may not be a cash transaction and it is more likely to involvethe issue of parent equity shares to purchase the subsidiary shares

Allocate, at the acquisition date, the cost of the business combination to the assetsacquired and liabilities assumed.

The cost of a business combination needs to be measured at fair value. Thus, if the parentissues equity shares to acquire the subsidiary, then these will be valued at the market valueon the date of acquisition.

The acquisition date is the date on which the parent effectively obtains control and, therefore,if the purchase of the subsidiary has been made in stages, then the cost of the combinationis the aggregate cost of the individual transactions at the fair value on the date of the transaction.

Consider the following examples.

Example 1

A acquired 20% of the voting shares of B in year 1, paying Tshs.150,000, 10% in year 2,paying Tshs.200,000, and 25% in year 3, paying Tshs.800,000.

A has, in total, acquired 60% of B at a fair value of Tshs.1,150,000.

The cost of the acquisition is then allocated to the fair values of the assets and liabilities acquired. What this means is that we compare the two fair values and, ifthere is a difference, then this is identified as purchased goodwill.

Example 2

A acquired 75% of the net assets of B, paying a fair value of Tshs.1m. The fair value of B's net assets at the date of acquisition was Tshs.2m.

A has only acquired 75% of the net assets, so we need to compare 75% x 2m with the Tshs.1m paid. This will result in a goodwill of Tshs.0.5m

Where we have stage payments, the goodwill will be calculated at each stage and thenaggregated.

Goodwill is any excess of consideration transferred over and above the fair value of the netassets and liabilities acquired. IFRS 3 states that this purchased goodwill is recognised in the consolidated statements as an asset. Subsequent to this initial recognition, impairmentreviews are carried out annually on the goodwill and, if an impairment is found, this amount ischarged to the statement of comprehensive income. Amortisation of goodwill is not permitted by the standard.

If the goodwill is negative, that is the net assets are more than the fair value paid, then thisnegative goodwill is credited to the statement of comprehensive income in the period of acquisition.

C. IAS 28: INVESTMENTS IN ASSOCIATES

Identification of Associates

An associate is an entity (other than a subsidiary or a joint venture) over which the investorhas significant influence.

Significant influence is the power to participate in the financial and operating policy decisions of the investee, but is not control or joint control over those policies. This definition isamplified in IAS 28 as a situation where the investor holds 30% or more of the voting power


of the investee and, if such a situation exists, significant influence will be presumed unless itcan be clearly evidenced otherwise and vice versa.

Significant influence is usually evidenced by:

Representation on the board of directors or equivalent governing body

Participation in policy making processes

Material transactions between the investor and the investee

Interchange of managerial personnel

Provision of essential technical information.

Consider the following examples to see if you have understood this associate relationship. For each case identify whether B is an associate of A.

Examples

1. A owns 20% of B and appoints one out of seven directors. The remaining voting rights are held equally by two entities that both appoint three directors.

2. B manufactures widgets for A. A designs the widgets and normally 85% of B's sales are made to A. A owns 15% of the voting rights of B.

Answers

In example 1, B is not an associate of A as A has very little influence. The other twoentities exert all the influence.

In example 2, B is reliant on A for its business and, therefore, A exerts significant influence. B is an associate of A.

Standard Accounting Practice for Associated Companies

IAS 28 requires that associate undertakings are included in the consolidated accounts usingthe equity method of accounting, except where:

the investment is acquired and held exclusively with a view to disposal in the nearfuture

the associate operates under severe long-term restrictions that significantly impair itsability to transfer funds to the investor.

Particular issues to be included are as follows.

(a) Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

The investing group should include the aggregate of its share of the associate's profit after tax ,less any impairment of the associate in the year.

(b) Consolidated Statement of Financial Position

The investment should be carried at the total of:

(i) The investing group's share of the net assets other than goodwill of the associated undertakings, stated, where possible, after attributing fair values tothe net assets at the time of acquisition of the interest in the associatedundertakings; and

(ii) The investing group's share of any goodwill in the associated undertaking's ownfinancial statements.

These two items can be shown as one aggregate amount.


(c) Where the Investing Company Does Not Have Any Subsidiaries

If the investing company does not have any subsidiaries it will not prepare consolidatedaccounts. The holding company's own accounts would recognise the dividends receivable and carry the investment at cost.

This does not reveal the underlying profitability of the investment. IAS 28 requires thatan investing company that does not prepare consolidated financial statements shouldincorporate the associate in its individual accounts in the same manner is it would inconsolidated accounts.

Example of Normal Presentation for an Associate

The following example provides an illustration of the normal presentation of an associate.

Note that the format shown for the consolidated statement of comprehensive income isillustrative only.

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

Group revenueCost of sales

Gross profit

Administrative expenses

Group operating profit

Share of operating profit in associates

Interest receivable (group)

Interest payable

Group

Associates

Profit on ordinary activities before tax

Tax on profit on ordinary activities *

Profit on ordinary activities after tax

Minority interests

Profit on ordinary activities after taxation and minority interest

Equity dividends

Retained profit for group and its share of associates

Tshs.m

(26 )

(12 )

Tshs.m

200

(120 )

80

(40 )

40

24

64

6

(38 )

32

(12 )

20

(6 )

14

(10 )

4


Consolidated Statement of Financial Position

Tshs.m

Non-current assets

Tangible assets 480 Investments in associates 20

Current assets

Inventory 15

Debtors 75

Cash at bank and in hand 10

100

Creditors (due within one year) (50 )

Net current assets


Creditors (due after more than one year)

Provisions for liabilities and charges

Capital and reserves

Called up share capital


Retained profits

Shareholders' funds (all equity)

Equity minority interest

Notes:

Tshs.m

500

50

550

(250 )

(10 )

290

50 150

50

250

40

290

Note that minority interest is presented as part of equity, but separate from group equity.

D. IFRS 3: FAIR VALUES IN ACQUISITION ACCOUNTING

One of the objectives of IFRS 3 is to ensure that when a business is acquired by another, allthe assets and liabilities at the time of the acquisition are recorded at their fair values. All subsequent gains and losses should be reported as post-acquisition results of the newgroup.

This means that post-acquisition reorganisation costs have to be charged in the post-acquisition group statement of comprehensive income, rather than setting up a provision forsuch expenses. The reasoning behind this is that such costs are not considered to be an identifiable liability of the acquired business, but a subsequent commitment entered into bythe acquirer.

Fair value is the amount at which an asset or liability could be exchanged in an arm's length transaction between informed and willing parties, other than in a forced or liquidation sale. The fair values of monetary items should take into account amounts expected to be paid orreceived. The fair value of non-monetary items will usually be the replacement cost, unless the item concerned has a readily ascertainable market value. In any event fair values shouldnot exceed the recoverable amounts from use of the item concerned. This implies that the


discounted value of future earnings from an asset could be used as a basis for establishingits fair value.

The assets and liabilities recognised should be those which existed at the date of acquisition. The measurement of fair values should reflect the conditions at the acquisition date.

Provisions for future operating losses should not be set up.

Any costs associated with reorganising the acquired business are treated as post-acquisitionitems and are not dealt with as part of the fair value exercise at acquisition.

IFRS 3 considers the fair value of certain specific assets and liabilities and how they shouldbe valued as follows:

Tangible non-current assets should be based on market value or depreciatedreplacement price, but should not exceed the recoverable amount of the asset.

Intangible assets should be based on replacement cost in an active market, which isnormally replacement value. If no active market exists then the best informationavailable should be used.

Inventories and work in progress should be based on selling prices less the sum ofcosts of disposal and a reasonable profit allowance for the selling effort of the acquirerbased on profit for similar goods. Raw materials should be valued at currentreplacement cost.

Quoted investments should be valued at market price.

Monetary assets and liabilities should be valued by reference to market prices andmay involve discounting.

Contingencies – reasonable estimates of expected outcomes may be used.

Pensions and other post retirement benefits – a deficiency should be recognised infull, but a surplus should only be recognised as an asset to the extent that it isreasonably expected to be realised.

The cost of acquisition is the cash paid and the fair value of any other purchaseconsideration given, together with the expense of acquisition.

Where the amount of the purchase consideration is dependent on future events, the cost of acquisition is to be based on a best-estimate basis. When the outcome is known, the cost of acquisition and goodwill should be adjusted.

Fees and other costs incurred in making an acquisition should be included in the cost of acquisition. Internal costs, and other expenses that cannot be directly attributed to the acquisition, should be charged to the statement of comprehensive income.

E. ALTERNATIVE METHODS OF ACCOUNTING FORGROUP COMPANIES

We've seen how group accounts are prepared when one company holds a controlling interest in another company. If a subsidiary is wholly-owned this should be relatively straightforwardas all of the subsidiary's assets and liabilities belong to the group and these can simply beincluded in the group accounts.

However, a problem arises when the group only has a partial interest in another company,i.e. some of the shares in the subsidiary are held by parties outside the group. In thisinstance there are three possible methods of consolidating the company concerned:

The acquisition method – the method required by IASs for consolidation of subsidiaries


Proportional consolidation – not permitted by IASs

The equity method – only permitted for consolidation of associate businesses.

We will now consider these in turn, using a simple set of financial statements for the investingand investee company. At this stage do not worry about the detailed accounting treatmentsinvolved, concentrate upon mastering the essential differences.

Acquisition Method

The acquisition method consolidates a subsidiary company as if, instead of acquiring thecompany's shares, the holding company acquired the subsidiary's net assets.

The proportion of the subsidiary owned by parties outside the group (i.e. the minority or non-controlling interest) is shown either as a deduction from the group's net assets or as anaddition to shareholders' funds.

Example

H plc acquired 75% of S Ltd's share capital on the date of S Ltd's incorporation. The twocompanies' statements of financial position as at 31 December Year 3 were:

Tangible non-current assets

Investment in S Ltd Net current assets

Represented by:

Tshs.1 Ordinary shares

Retained profits *

H plc

Tshs.000

1,200

75

600

1,875

500

1,375

1,875

S Ltd

Tshs.000

500

120

620

100

520 *

620

* This is all post-acquisition profit as S was acquired at its incorporation date.

The acquisition method requires all of the assets under group control to be shown in theconsolidated statement of financial position:

H plc Consolidated Statement of Financial Position as at 31 December Year 3

Tshs.000

Tangible non-current assets (1,200 + 500) 1,700 Net current assets (600 + 120) 720

2,420

The consolidated accounts are prepared from the perspective of H plc's shareholders. Thusonly H plc's equity is shown. The investment in S Ltd is cancelled against S Ltd's sharecapital. The share capital and reserves are therefore:


Tshs.000 Tshs.000

Tshs.1 Ordinary shares – H plc only

Retained profits:

H plc 1,375

500

S Ltd (75% × 520)

Minority interest (25% × 620) (a 25% share of S Ltd net assets)

390 1,765

2,265

155

2,420

There are several versions of the acquisition method – the two main ones being proprietaryand entity:

The proprietary method views the consolidated accounts as being primarily preparedfor the shareholders of the controlling group. Thus, the minority interest under this method is shown as a quasi-liability.

The entity method makes no distinction between the shareholders and, therefore, the minority interest will also be allocated some goodwill at the date of acquisition bygrossing up the group share of goodwill.

Note that the entity method is not used under IASs. Nor is the true version of the proprietarymethod used by IASs, as the current IASs reflect the minority interest under equity, albeitseparate from group equity. We deal with the exact rules for acquisition accounting underIASs in chapter 11.

Proportional Consolidation

Note that this is not permitted by IASs.

Proportional consolidation only includes the group's share of the subsidiary's assets andliabilities. Thus, if proportional consolidation was used in the above example theconsolidated statement of financial position would be:


Tshs.000

Tangible non-current assets (1,200 + (75% × 500)) 1,575 Net current assets (600 + (75% × 120))

Represented by:


Retained profits – as above

690

2,265

500

1,765

2,265

Note that a minority interest figure does not appear under proportional consolidation as weare only including that proportion of S that has been acquired, not the whole of it.


Equity Method

This method is used for associates under IASs.

The equity method is also known as one-line consolidation. As this name suggests, the consolidated statement of financial position only includes one item relating to the companybeing consolidated. Instead of carrying the investment in the company at cost, it is restatedeach year to account for any change in the net assets of the company concerned.

The consolidated statement of financial position includes the investment as the group's share of the company's net assets plus any goodwill arising on acquisition.

Applying the equity method to the above example, we would obtain the followingconsolidated statement of financial position:


Tshs.000


Investment in S Ltd (75% × 620)

Net current assets

Represented by:


Retained profits – as above

1,200

465

600

2,265

500

1,765

2,265

Note that under the equity accounting method, the composition of S Ltd net assets is notshown in the H plc consolidated statement of financial position and is therefore "hidden"using this "one-line" technique.

F. MERGER ACCOUNTING

The major feature of consolidation procedures using acquisition accounting is that the profits are split between pre- and post-acquisition items. Pre-acquisition profits are taken to cost of control and are thus effectively frozen. This may mean that distributable profits are thusreduced as far as the group is concerned. Against this background, the techniques ofmerger accounting arose.

Remember, though, as we noted above, that this method is not permitted under InternationalAccounting Standards.

Features of Merger Accounting

(a) Net assets are not revalued to fair value as in acquisition accounting.. So post-mergerprofits may be higher because depreciation and similar charges will be lower as aresult.

(b) Following from (a) above, merger accounting results will give higher returns oncapital.

(c) No share premium account is necessary on the issue of share to acquire theacquiree as they are assumed to have been issued at nominal value.


(d) No distinction is drawn between pre- and post-acquisition profits; the businesscombination is accounted for as if the businesses had always been together. A practical example of this is where a merger takes place part-way through an accountingperiod – the results of the combining entities are shown in the consolidated accounts in full for the year of combination.

(e) The accounting policies of the companies combining are adjusted so they are uniform.

(f) If there is a difference between the nominal value of shares issued plus the fair value ofany other consideration, compared with the nominal value of shares acquired, this difference is treated as a movement on reserves or as a merger reserve. (This will befurther explained in a numerical example.) There is therefore no goodwill onconsolidation as may arise under acquisition accounting.

In summary, a merger is a very rare type of business combination where two or more parties combine for mutual trading advantages in what is effectively an equal "partnership". None ofthe parties involved can be portrayed as the acquirer, and the newly merged company is regarded as an entirely new entity, not the continuation of one of the combined entities.

Note that IFRS 3 does not recognise the existence of this type of situation. It clearly statesthat "an acquirer shall be identified in all business combinations". Thus, IFRS 3 has quiteliterally outlawed the use of merger accounting for the preparation of international financial statements, but you still might find it used in individual countries who prepare their accountsunder their own country GAAP.

Preparation of Financial Statements using Merger Accounting Principles

In order to understand the techniques of merger accounting, we will now work through a consolidation example using acquisition accounting and merger accounting methods.

(Note that, for now, concentrate on the differences between the approaches – we shallexamine the principles of consolidation in detail in the next chapter.)

The statements of financial position of A plc and B plc are as follows:

A plc B plc

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

Net assets

Tshs.1 ordinary shares

Retained profits

(a) Acquisition Accounting

600

480

120

600

360

180

180

360

Immediately after preparing its accounts, A plc issued 240,000 ordinary shares at Tshs.2each to acquire all of the shares in B plc. The assets of B plc are stated at fair value. . Goodwill is calculated as:

Tshs.000

Purchase consideration 240,000 shares at Tshs.2 480

100% ordinary shares and reserves

Goodwill

360

120


The consolidated statement of financial position is:

Goodwill

Net assets (600 + 360)

Share capital (480 + 240) *

Share premium *

Reserves (120)

Tshs.000

120

960

1,080

720

240

120

1,080

* Increase in A plc's share capital following acquisition of B plc.

(b) Merger Accounting

Using the same data, the 240,000 ordinary shares would be accounted for at nominal value, no share premium account would be created. No goodwill account would arise. The nominal value of the new shares issued (Tshs.240,000) exceeds the nominal value ofthe shares acquired (Tshs.180,000) by Tshs.60,000 which is deducted from reserves.

The consolidated statement of financial position is:

Tshs.000

Net assets

Tshs.1 ordinary shares (480 + 240)

Reserves (120 + 180 – 60)

960

720

240

960

Finally, suppose that only 170,000 ordinary shares were issued to acquire 100% of B. The nominal value of shares issued (Tshs.170,000) is less than the nominal value of sharesacquired (Tshs.180,000) and this creates a non-distributable capital (merger) reserve(Tshs.10,000). The consolidated statement of financial position then becomes:

Tshs.000

Net assets

Ordinary shares 480 + 170

Reserves 120 + 180

Merger reserve

960

650

300

10

960

Chapter 11

Group Accounts 2: The Consolidated Accounts

Contents

Introduction

A. The Consolidated Statement of Financial Position

Basic Consolidation Procedures

Cost of Control (Goodwill)

Partly-owned Subsidiaries Preference Shares and Debenture Stock

Revaluation of Subsidiary's Assets on Acquisition

Adjusting for Unrealised Intra-Group Profits/Losses

Intra-Group Dividends and Investments

B. The Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

Principles of Consolidation

Preparation of a Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

C. Group Accounts – Example

Answers to Questions for Practice

247

Page

248

248

248

250

253255

255

257

258

263

263

265

271

277

248 Group Accounts 2: The Consolidated Accounts

INTRODUCTION

In this last chapter of the manual (before the final chapter which provides advice, guidance and practice in relation to the examination for this subject) , we shall examine the preparationof consolidated statements of financial position and consolidated statements ofcomprehensive income.

A statement of financial position of a business shows its state of affairs at a point in time. It isa summary of the assets and liabilities of the business and how those net assets are financed. In the case of a group of companies, the consolidated statement of financial position shows the statement of affairs of the group and will be comprised of the statementof financial position of the parent company, the net assets of the subsidiaries and alsoinvestments in associated companies.

However, companies within the group are likely to be debtors and creditors of each other andthe (majority) shareholder in subsidiary companies is the holding company, so that dividends proposed by subsidiary companies are only liabilities to the group to the extent that theyrelate to minority shareholders. Furthermore, it is unusual for the price paid for the shares in a subsidiary company to equate to the net value of assets and liabilities acquired; usually apremium is paid – goodwill on acquisition.

Companies within a group which trade with each other are likely to have stocks purchasedfrom another company within the group, charged at normal selling price. This means that, asfar as the group is concerned, there is an element of unrealised profit in stocks which must be eliminated.

There are also adjustments to consider in respect of the preparation of a group statement ofcomprehensive income – the consolidated statement of comprehensive income – but not asmany as in the consolidated statement of financial position.

A. THE CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION

The basic intention of the consolidated statement of financial position is to show all assetsand liabilities of the parent and subsidiary, and any intra-group transactions between themmust be excluded.

Basic Consolidation Procedures

We will generally use the double-entry method and open a memorandum ledger to record theconsolidating entries; no adjustments are made in the books of the individual companies. Such accounts will be opened for:

Every element of shareholders' funds

Cost of control (i.e. goodwill) for each subsidiary (often referred to as "adjustmentaccount")

Minority interests

Assets containing inter-company profits (e.g. stock)

Assets revalued by the group at the date of the statement of financial position, if no adjustment has been made in the individual companies' books.

After writing up these accounts, the closing balance will be transferred to the consolidatedstatement of financial position and the assets and liabilities on the individual statements offinancial position, to which no alteration has been made, will be added together and shownon the consolidated statement of financial position (CSFP).

Example

Group Accounts 2: The Consolidated Accounts 249

Before we study in detail the points which cause complications, we will look at a simpleexample concerning a subsidiary which, at the date of the statement of financial position, hadno undistributed profits and in which all the shares are held by the holding company.

We work as follows:

(a) Combine the assets in the various statements of financial position, e.g. plant,inventories. Show the aggregate figure in the consolidated statement.

(b) Similarly, combine all outside liabilities, e.g. trade payables, debentures.

(c) In the holding company statement of financial position, we have "Shares in subsidiarycompany". If this is equal to the combined share capitals of the subsidiaries, bothcancel out.

From the following statements of financial position of Company X and Company Y, prepare the CSFP. All the shares in X were acquired by Y at the date of the statements of financialpositions.

Statements of Financial Positions at 31 December

Apply the rules:

Premises Plant

Shares in subsidiary

Inventories

Trade receivables

Cash Trade payables

Overdraft

Net assets

Share capital Undistributed profits

X

Tshs.000

35

19

–

13

9

1

(12 )

(5 )

60

60 –

60

Y

Tshs.000

24

10

60

18

16

2

(19 )

(11 )

100

80 20

100

(a) Combine the assets:

Premises (35 + 24)

Plant (19 + 10)

Inventory (13 + 18)

Trade receivables (9 + 16) Cash (1 + 2)

Tshs.000

59

29

31

25

3

147


(b) Combine the liabilities: Tshs.000

Trade payables (12 + 19) Overdraft (5 + 11)

31 16

47

(c) Cancel out "Shares in subsidiary" in Y's statement of financial position against sharecapital of X.

The result is as follows:

Consolidated Statement of Financial Position of Y and its Subsidiary X at 31 December

Tshs.000 Tshs.000 Tshs.000

Non-current Assets

Premises

Plant

Current Assets

Inventory

Trade receivables

Cash

Creditors: Amounts falling due within one year

Bank overdraft

Trade payables

Net current assets




Retained profits

16

31

31 25

3

59

47

59

29

88

12

100

80

20

100

Note that the only share capital shown in the CSFP is that of the holding company. This is always the case, no matter how involved the affairs of the group.

We will now work through a simple consolidation example which will lay the foundations for your future studies of group accounts. Make sure you fully understand the example before proceeding to the next stage.

Cost of Control (Goodwill)

In our earlier example, the item "Shares in subsidiary" in the holding company's statement offinancial position was replaced in the consolidated statement by the actual assets and liabilities represented by this investment. This was so since the net value of assets acquiredwas equal to the price paid for the shares. However, if the price paid for the shares exceeds the book value of the net assets of the subsidiary, the excess represents a premium, calledthe cost of control or goodwill on acquisition of the subsidiary.


Since the value of the net assets of a subsidiary is represented in its statement of financial position by the amount of its paid-up capital plus reserves, the cost of control is the differencebetween the cost of the investment to the holding company and the total of the nominal value of shares issued and paid up, and all undistributed profits and reserves at the date ofacquisition.

Example

From the statements of financial position of Company A and Company B immediately after A had acquired all the shares in B, which were as follows, prepare the CSFP. (Note thisexample assumes that B is a wholly-owned subsidiary, i.e. there is no minority interest.)

Non-current assets

Current assets

10,000 shares in B

less Current liabilities

Net assets

Share capital (Tshs.1 shares) Reserves


(All assets and liabilities are stated at fair values).

Consolidation Workings

A

Tshs.000

22

12

20

54

8

46

24

10

12

46

B

Tshs.000

14

8

–

22

6

16

10

4

2

16

Open memorandum ledger accounts for the share capital, reserves and undistributed profitsof the subsidiary and then apply the following double-entry procedure to ascertain theamount of goodwill:

(a) For the nominal value of 100% of shares acquired

Cr: Cost of control

Dr: Share capital

(b) For the balances existing on date of acquisition

Cr: Cost of control

Dr: Reserves

Dr: Undistributed profits

(c) For the cost of shares acquired

Cr: A – investment in B

Dr: Cost of control

The memorandum accounts are as follows:


B – Share Capital

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

Cost of control

Cost of control

Cost of control

Balance b/d

Cost of 10,000 shares in B

10 Balance b/d

B – Reserves

Tshs.000

4 Balance b/d

B – Undistributed Profits

Tshs.000

2 Balance b/d

A – Investment in B

Tshs.000

20 Cost of control

Cost of Control

Tshs.000

Share capital – B

10

Tshs.000

4

Tshs.000

2

Tshs.000

20

Tshs.000

10 (A – Investment in B) 20 Reserves – B

Undistributed profits – B

4

2

Balance Goodwill

20

4

20

Note carefully that the balances on B reserves and undistributed profits are all transferred to the cost of control account because they reflect pre-acquisition profits and reserves.

Answer


Consolidated Statement of Financial Position of A and its Subsidiary B as at ....

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

Non-current assets Intangible asset: goodwill

Tangible assets (22 + 14)

Current assets (12 + 8) 20

4

36

Creditors: Amounts falling due within one year (8 + 6) 14

Net current assets


Called-up share capital (A only) Reserves (see footnote)

Retained profits

Footnote

6

46

24 10

12

46

None of the reserves of B appear because they all relate to pre-acquisition profits. Goodwill is tested for impairment annually and impairment losses taken to thestatement of comprehensive income.

Note that it is quite possible for the cost of shares in a subsidiary to be less than the netvalue of assets acquired. In this case goodwill will be negative, i.e. a credit balance. Negative goodwill will then appear credited to the statement of comprehensive income.

Partly-owned Subsidiaries

Where the holding company does not own the whole of the share capital of the subsidiary, itis clear that if the total value of net assets of the subsidiary is included in the consolidatedstatement of financial position, some part of those assets is owned by an outside body, andthis part should be shown as a liability in the consolidated statement under "Minorityinterests".

Example

Use the information given in the previous example for company A and B, but suppose that A'sholding in B consists of only 8,000 shares at a cost of Tshs.20,000. Since A only owns 4/5ths ofthe shares of B, only 4/5ths of the reserves and undistributed profits are attributable to the group.

Consolidation Workings

B – Share Capital

Cost of control (4/5) Minority interest (1/5)

Tshs.000

8 Balance b/d

2

10

B – Reserves

Tshs.000

10

10


Tshs.000 Tshs.000 Cost of control (4/5)

Minority interest (1/5)

Cost of control (4/5)

Minority interest (1/5)

Balance b/d


Balance c/d

3.2 Balance b/d

0.8

4.0

B – Undistributed Profits

Tshs.000

1.6 Balance b/d

0.4

2.0

A – Investment in B

Tshs.000

20 Cost of control

Cost of Control

Tshs.000

20.0 B – Share capital (4/5)

Reserves (4/5)

Undistributed profits (4/5) Balance, being goodwill

20.0

Minority Interest

Tshs.000


Reserves (1/5)

Undistributed profits (1/5)

3.2

4.0

4.0

Tshs.000

2.0

2.0

Tshs.000

20

Tshs.000

8.0

3.2

1.6 7.2

20.0

Tshs.000

2.0

0.8

0.4

3.2


Consolidated Statement of Financial Position of A and its Subsidiary B as at ....

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

Non-current assets Intangible assets: goodwill


Current assets (12 + 8) 20.0

7.2

36.0

Note:

Creditors: Amounts falling due within one year (8 + 6) 14.0

Net current assets


Called-up share capital (A only) Reserves

Retained profits

Minority interest

6.0

49.2

24.0 10.0

12.0

46.0

3.2

49.2

(a) Watch out for instructions in questions regarding the treatment of impaired goodwill.

(b) The minority interest represents the minority share (1/5) of the net assets (share capital and reserves) of the subsidiary.

Preference Shares and Debenture Stock

It is quite possible that a subsidiary company will also have some preference shares anddebenture stock in issue. When the preference shares and debenture stock are owned by the group, their nominal value should be cancelled against the investment made by theholding company in those securities. If this gives rise to a premium or discount onacquisition, this should be written off against group reserves.

Preference shares held by parties outside the group should be included in minority interest.

Debentures are a form of loan creditor and debenture stock held outside the group should beshown as a long-term creditor in the consolidated statement of financial position.

Revaluation of Subsidiary's Assets on Acquisition

Goodwill is the difference between the cost of an acquired entity and the aggregate of the fairvalue of the entity's identifiable assets and liabilities. The book value of the subsidiary'sassets on the date of the acquisition may not be the same as their fair value. The assetsshould therefore be revalued and the revaluation surplus/deficit split between the group andany minority interest (in proportion to the respective holdings in the subsidiary.)

Example

The following is an example of the treatment of revaluation. The facts are as in the previous example with the exception that the non-current assets of the subsidiary have a fair value ofTshs.18,000 at the date of acquisition of the interest by A in B. The statement of financial positionof B following the revaluation adjustment will be as follows:


Tshs.000

Non-current assets at valuation 18

Consolidation workings

Current assets

less Current liabilities

Share capital

Revaluation reserve

Reserves


Cost of Control

Tshs.000

8

26

6

20

10 4

4

2

20

Tshs.000


Balance c/d


Revaluation reserve (4/5) Reserves (4/5)


Goodwill

20.0

Minority Interest

Tshs.000


Revaluation reserve (1/5)

Reserves


4.0

8.0

3.2 3.2

1.6

4.0

20.0

Tshs.000 2.0

0.8

0.8

0.4

4.0


Consolidated Statement of Financial Position of A and its Subsidiary as at ......

Non-current assets Intangible asset: goodwill


Current assets (12 + 8)

Tshs.000

20.0

Tshs.000

4.0

40.0

Notes

Creditors: Amounts falling due within one year (8 + 6) 14.0


Called up share capital

Reserves

Retained profits

Minority interest

6.0

50.0

24.0

10.0

12.0

46.0

4.0

50.0

(a) The workings of the reserves and income statement are as shown in the previousexample.

(b) The minority interest now includes the minority interest share (1.5) of the revaluationsurplus.

Adjusting for Unrealised Intra-Group Profits/Losses

Group companies will often trade with each other and will make profits in the individualcompany accounts on the transactions that take place. For example, assume we have agroup consisting of H and S who trade with a company outside the group, Z.

H has a subsidiary company S and S has a customer Z. Assume H sold goods (costTshs.100,000, selling price Tshs.125,000) to S. S then sold part of these goods to Z (cost to STshs.80,000, selling price Tshs.120,000).

The following situation exists:

Tshs.

Sale by H to S: profit is 25,000

Sale by S to Z: profit is

Apparent group profit

40,000

65,000

However, S still has goods which cost it Tshs.45,000 in inventory. As the original mark-up was 25% on the sale from H to S, then there is an unrealised profit of 20% × Tshs.45,000 as far asthe group is concerned.

Tshs.

Therefore, the apparent total profit of 65,000

is reduced by the unrealised profit still in S inventory (9,000 )

So the group realised profit is 56,000


(a) Eliminating Intergroup Profits/Losses

IAS 27 requires us to eliminate intergroup profits and losses in full. Thus, we do notneed to apportion the profit or loss between the group and minority holding. Similaradjustments must also be made when a group company sells a fixed asset at a profit toanother group company. In this instance an adjustment must also be made for the excess depreciation charged by the company due to the unrealised profit included inthe cost of the asset.

For example, if a 75%-owned subsidiary sold an asset (cost Tshs.6,000) for Tshs.10,000 to the holding company, making a profit of Tshs.4,000, the profit would be eliminated as follows:

Debit Credit

Group reserves (100% × 4,000)

Asset (reduction to cost)

Tshs.

4,000

Tshs.

4,000

If the asset is depreciated by Tshs.1,000 per annum then at the end of the first year thefollowing adjustment must be made for the excess depreciation charged:

Debit Credit

Asset – depreciation (1,000 – 600)

Group reserves (75% × 400)

(b) Eliminating Inter-company Debts

Tshs.

400

Tshs.

400

If group members trade between themselves, then consolidation adjustments will beneeded to eliminate any inter-company balances prior to the preparation of the groupaccounts. Similarly any cash in transit as yet unrecorded by the recipient company willneed to be adjusted for before the consolidated accounts are prepared.

Intra-Group Dividends and Investments

The holding company will usually receive dividend payments from its subsidiaries and willaccount for them on an accruals basis as they are declared. When preparing the consolidated accounts, the dividend payable by the subsidiary to the holding company will becancelled against the dividend receivable shown in the holding company's accounts. Onlythe dividend payments due to the holding company's shareholders and the non-controlling (minority) interest appear in the consolidated statement of financial position. Any dividend income shown in the consolidated income statementmust arise forminvestments other than those in subsidiaries or associates.

(a) Dividends Paid Out of Pre-acquisition Reserves

The holding company usually credits the dividend income from its subsidiaries to itsown statement of comprehensive income. However, sometimes the dividend payment will be out of pre-acquisition reserves.

Example

A plc acquired all of the ordinary share capital (with a nominal value of Tshs.10,000) of BLtd on 30 December, paying Tshs.100,000. On that date B Ltd's reserves were Tshs.80,000.


On 31 December B Ltd paid a dividend of Tshs.10,000 to its ordinary shareholders. Afterpaying the dividend B Ltd's statement of financial position was as follows:

Tshs.000

Net assets

Ordinary shares

Retained profits

80

10

70

80

The net assets of B have thus fallen from Tshs.90,000 at the date of acquisition to Tshs.80,000after payment of the dividend.

The goodwill on the date of acquisition would be found by doing the following cost ofcontrol calculation:

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

Cost of investment

less: Ordinary shares Retained profits

Goodwill

100

10 80

90

10

Obviously the goodwill cannot change, but B Ltd only has net assets amounting to Tshs.80,000 on 31 December. A plc could really treat the dividend received as profit, as itwas paid out of the assets acquired. The dividend must therefore be credited to thecost of the investment.

Thus we obtain: Tshs.000 Tshs.000

Cost of investment less: Dividend paid out of pre-acquisition profits

less: Ordinary shares

Retained profit

Goodwill

10

70

100 (10 )

90

80

10

The consolidation adjustment to reflect dividends paid out of pre-acquisition profits is:

Debit: Group reserves working

Credit: Cost of control account (to reflect reduction in the cost of investment)

Dividends paid out of pre-acquisition profits must not be included in group reserves onthe unconsolidated statement of financial position.

(b) Apportioning Dividends When a Subsidiary is Acquired During the Year

When a subsidiary is acquired during the year it is often not clear whether or not adividend has been paid out of pre- or post-acquisition profits. There are no strict rules as to how this should be determined and in practice several different methods are used.


For the purpose of your examination you should assume, unless directed otherwise,that the dividends paid relating to the year of acquisition accrued evenly during theyear. For example, if a subsidiary was acquired halfway through the year andproposed a dividend of Tshs.12,000 you should assume that Tshs.6,000 relates to pre-acquisition profits and the remaining Tshs.6,000 to post-acquisition profits (assumingsufficient profits were earned).

Example

C plc acquired 60% of the ordinary share capital of D Ltd at 31 December for Tshs.900,000. C plc's year ends 31 March.

An interim dividend of Tshs.60,000 was paid by D Ltd on 1 October and it proposed a final dividend of Tshs.90,000 on 31 March.

Total dividends paid/proposed in the year:

Dividends paid out of pre-acquisition profits (Tshs.150,000 × 9/12):

Tshs.150,000

Tshs.112,500

Pre-acquisition element of final dividend (Tshs.90,000 – (Tshs.112,500 – Tshs.60,000)):

Tshs.37,500

The consolidation adjustments will be to:

Reduce group reserves (Dr) by 60% × Tshs.37,500: Tshs.22,500

Reduce cost of control a/c (Cr) by 60% × Tshs.37,500: Tshs.22,500

In C plc's own accounts the effect of these adjustments will be to reduce the carrying value of the investment in D by Tshs.22,500.


1. H plc acquired 80% of S Ltd's ordinary share capital on 1 January Year 4 for Tshs.700,000. S Ltd's reserves were Tshs.600,000 on that date and the fair value of some land owned by S Ltd on that date was Tshs.200,000 in excess of book value. S Ltd has not subsequentlyrevalued the land.

The statements of financial position of the two companies as at 31 December Year 9were as follows:


Investments

Net current assets

Represented by:


10% Preference shares (issued 1 June Year 1)

Retained profits

H plc

Tshs.000

1,000

700

500

2,200

100

–

2,100

2,200

S Ltd

Tshs.000

1,400

–

400

1,800

100

50

1,650

1,800

Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position of H plc at 31 December Year 9.


2. H plc acquired 75% of S Ltd's ordinary share capital on 18 July Year 8 when S Ltd's reserves were Tshs.300,000. The statements of financial position of the two companies as at 31 December Year 9 were:


Investment in S Ltd

Inter-company a/cs

Other current assets

Represented by:


Retained profits

H plc

Tshs.000

800

420

120

520

1,860

100

1,760

1,860

S Ltd

Tshs.000

900

(100 )

360

1,160

200

960

1,160

There was cash in transit from S Ltd to H plc amounting to Tshs.20,000 at the year-end.

Goodwill has been impaired by Tshs.2,250 as at 31 December Year 9.

Prepare H plc's consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 December Year 9.

3. On 1 January Year 3 X plc acquired 60% of Y Ltd's ordinary share capital and Tshs.10,000 of Y Ltd's debenture stock. Y Ltd's reserves as at 1 January Year 3 stood at Tshs.240,000. The two companies had the following statements of financial position as at 31December Year 9:


Investment in Y Ltd (see footnote)

Net current assets

Debenture stock

Represented by:


Preference shares Share premium

Retained profits

X plc

Tshs.000

1,200.0

260.5

260.0

–

1,720.5

100.0

–100.0

1,520.5

1,720.5

Y Ltd

Tshs.000

700

350

(50 )

1,000

100

100 80

720

1,000


Footnote Tshs.000

The investment in Y comprises: Ordinary shares 250

Debentures 10.5

260.5

Prepare X plc's consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 December Year 9. Treat goodwill in accordance with IFRS 3

4. Hold plc owns 60% of the ordinary share capital of Sub Ltd. The two companies produced the following statements of financial position as at 30 June Year 8:

Plant & machinery – NBV

Investment in Sub Ltd

Inventory

Trade receivables

Bank Trade payables

Represented by:

Tshs.1 Ordinary shares Retained profits

Hold plc

Tshs.000

3,200

1,200

1,120

960

200 (900 )

5,780

2,000

3,780

5,780

Sub Ltd

Tshs.000

960

480

600

50 (530 )

1,560

200

1,360

1,560

Hold acquired the investment in Sub on 1 July Year 5. Sub's reserves at that date wereTshs.1,040,000.

On 30 June Year 8 Hold had goods in stock of Tshs.30,000 which had been purchasedfrom Sub. Sub sold these goods to Hold with a mark-up of 50%.

On 1 July Year 7 Hold sold Sub some machinery, which had cost Tshs.240,000 tomanufacture, for Tshs.300,000. Both companies depreciate machinery at 10% of cost perannum and the asset has been incorporated in Sub's books at cost less depreciation.

Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position as at 30 June Year 8,assuming goodwill as at 30 June year 8 has been impaired by Tshs.68,400.



B. THE CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OFCOMPREHENSIVE INCOME

The object of a consolidated statement of comprehensive income (CSCI) is to present information obtained from the separate statements of comprehensive income of the companies in the group in such a way as to show the amount of undistributed group profit at the end of the period.

The actual layout of a CSCI is similar to an individual business income statement. Inaddition, though, we need to add a line in the statement to show the profit allocated to theminority interest.

Principles of Consolidation

You will appreciate that the principles involved here are the same as we met in preparing aconsolidated statement of financial position. The following matters in particular must not be overlooked:

Pre-acquisition profits or losses of subsidiary companies

Minority interests, both as regards current preference dividends paid and undistributedprofits of subsidiary companies

Inter-company dividends

Inter-company profits or losses

Impairment of goodwill now charged to the CSCI.

With these in mind, we will consider the steps to be taken in preparing our consolidatedstatement of comprehensive income. You are usually given the separate income statementsof the holding company and the various subsidiary companies. Additional information isgiven and you are then required to draw up the CSCI.

The best way to get to grips with the CSCI is to work through a simple example and thenconsider the further complications of what can appear at first glance to be a fairly demandingstudy topic.

Example

(You should work through the question and suggested answer to familiarise yourself with thebasic approach before proceeding further with this chapter.)

W plc acquired 80% of the Tshs.1 ordinary share capital of S Ltd some years ago when theretained profits of S Ltd was Tshs.20,000. The following draft statements of comprehensiveincome for the two companies for the year to 31 December have been prepared:


W plc S Ltd

Sales

Cost of sales

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

1,000 400

(600 ) (200 )

Gross profit

Distribution costs

Administration expenses

Operating profit pre-tax

Tax

Profit after tax

Dividend proposed

Retained profit of year

Retained profit b/f

Retained profit c/f

400

(80 )

(70 )

250

(80 )

170

(100 )

70

260

330

200

(30 )

(50 )

120

(40 )

80

(50 )

30

100

130

(a) W plc sold goods Tshs.100,000 to S charging cost + 25%. There were Tshs.10,000 of these goods in the inventory of S Ltd at 31 December.

(b) W plc has not yet taken the dividend from S Ltd into its records.

(c) There was no goodwill at acquisition.

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

Note

(1) Revenue (1,000 + 400 – 100)

(2) Cost of sales (600 + 200 – 100 + 2)

Gross profit

Distribution costs (80 + 30)

Administrative expenses (70 + 50)

Profit on ordinary activities before taxation

Taxation on profit on ordinary activities (80 + 40)

Profit on ordinary activities after taxation

(3) Minority interest: (20% × Tshs.80,000 (after tax profits of S Ltd))

Dividend proposed (W only)

Retained profit for year

Retained profit b/f:

Tshs.000

Tshs.000

1,300

(702 )

598

(110 )

(120 )

368

(120 )

248

(16 )

232

(100 )

132

W plc

Group share of S Ltd i.e. 80% of post-acquisitionretained profit b/f 80% × (100 – 20)

Retained profit c/f

260

64 324

456

As W plc had not accounted for dividends received from S Ltd, no adjustment was necessaryto eliminate these prior to the preparation of the CSCI for the group. Remember, the pre-


acquisition profits of S Ltd are effectively frozen by being taken to cost of control account andare excluded from the retained profit brought forward figures.

Notes

(1) The Tshs.100,000 sales from W to S are eliminated as inter-company trading.

(2) The purchase price of goods to S from W is the same adjustment Tshs.100,000. Inaddition cost of sales is increased by the unrealised profit included in the inventory,thus reducing group profits.

(3) The dividends attributable to the minority interest in S Ltd will eventually appear as acurrent liability in the consolidated statement of financial position. The profit for the year attributable to the minority interest is split between the proposed dividend and the net addition to the minority interest figure in the consolidated statement of financial position, i.e.:

Tshs.000

Profit attributable to minority interest

Proposed dividend payable to minority interest (Tshs.50,000 × 20%)

16

10

Minority interest share of S Ltd retained profit for year (Tshs.30,000 × 20%) 6

16

Preparation of a Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

The procedure for the preparation of a consolidated statement of comprehensive incomeinvolves working through the following points, in this order:

(a) Balances Brought Forward

(i) Eliminate the proportion attributable to minority interests. This amount can nowbe disregarded for CSCI purposes, forming part of the minority interest figure forthe consolidated statement of financial position.

(ii) Eliminate pre-acquisition profits and losses of subsidiaries attributable to the group. This amount can also now be disregarded for CSCI purposes, although it forms part of cost of control workings.

These two adjustments will have the effect of eliminating all pre-acquisition profits, andthe outside shareholders' proportion of post-acquisition profits, from balances broughtforward. However, we still need to consider the effects on the consolidated statementof comprehensive income if the subsidiary was acquired during the year, and we also need to deduct minority interests from the profits for the year.

(b) Pre-acquisition Profits and Losses

We have already learnt that pre-acquisition profits are not free for distribution and are taken to cost of control account. Similarly, if shares in the subsidiary were acquired during the year, the profits for the year must be apportioned to the date of acquisition,and the pre-acquisition profits transferred to cost of control.


Illustration

Profits on ordinary activities after tax

less Pre-acquisition profits

less Minority interests

Profits applicable to group shareholders

Deduct proposed dividends

Tshs.

X

(X )

X

(X )

X

(X )

Unappropriated profits applicable to group shareholders X

(c) Inter-company Unrealised Profits

Deduct from the profits shown in the separate income statements the proportion of anyunrealised profits on inventories, i.e. due to trading within the group at a profit. (This is a point we have already considered for consolidated statement of financial positionpurposes.) Remember that the profit of a selling company is adjusted. In the consolidated statement of financial position, of course, a second adjustment is made tothe inventory of the purchasing company. The trading profits can now be combined. Remember to eliminate inter-company sales from revenue and cost of sales as well, ifthe question demands it as in the previous example.

(d) Inter-company Dividends

Note particularly that all ordinary dividends paid by subsidiaries should be eliminated,irrespective of minority holdings. The liability to minorities is calculated on the balancebrought forward and the trading profit for the period. Therefore, dividends paid to themare merely cash payments on account of that liability for CSCI purposes, and then may be eliminated with other ordinary dividends. (There would not, of course, be anyobjection to allocating to them first their due proportion of dividends and then the balance of their profits.)

The inter-company dividends are deleted from "Income from shares in groupundertakings" on the credit side of the recipient company's income statement, and thisamount is deducted from the balance of profit carried forward. In the income statementof the paying company, the whole of the ordinary dividends paid, whether to members of the group or to minority interests, is deleted from the debit side of the account. Thegroup's proportion is added back to the balance of profit carried forward, for purposes of the CSCI, and the outside shareholders' proportion is automatically allowed for in the calculation of their interests, as we have seen.

Different considerations apply to preference dividends. Here, the group proportionmust be eliminated as described above, but the outside shareholders' proportion mustbe left as a debit or included with the debit of the proportion of profit attributable to minority interests, since the liability is not otherwise provided for.

You must remember to show dividends paid by the holding company in the CSCI.

Eliminate dividends from pre-acquisition profits as described above. Remember that,for the purposes of the consolidated statement of financial position, the amountreceived by the holding company (or subsidiary, if one holds shares in another) should be credited to shares in subsidiary's account, since it acts as a reduction in the pricepaid for the shares and, consequently, the amount attributable to goodwill.

(e) Transfers to Reserve

Eliminate the proportion attributable to minority interests and combine the balance ofthese items.

(f) Minority Interests


Dividends, except preference dividends, paid to outside shareholders and theirproportion of the balance brought forward, have all been eliminated. It only remains tocalculate from the individual income statements of subsidiaries the true net profits(excluding transfers to reserve and similar appropriations). The outside shareholders'proportions of such net profits can then be ascertained and the consolidated total entered as a debit in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

Example 1

The summarised statements of comprehensive income of R Ltd and its subsidiary S Ltd forthe year ended 31 December are as follows:

Trading profit

Dividends received (net)

Profit before tax

Taxation

Profit after tax

Dividends: paid

proposed


Balance brought forward

Balance carried forward

R Ltd

Tshs.000

25,000

3,750

28,750

(14,000 )

14,750

–

(10,000 )

4,750

35,000

39,750

S Ltd

Tshs.000

30,000

–

30,000

(14,000 )

16,000

(5,000 )

(5,000 )

6,000

40,000

46,000

Prepare the consolidated statement of comprehensive income from the above and the following supplementary information:

(a) R Ltd acquired 75% of the shares of S Ltd two years previously when the balance on SLtd's retained profits stood at Tshs.16m.

(b) Inventories of R Ltd at 31 December include goods to the value of Tshs.400,000 invoiced

by S Ltd at cost plus 331/3%.

Answer

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income of R Ltd and its Subsidiary for the Year ended 31 December

Group profit on ordinary activities before taxation (see workings (b)) Taxation on profit on ordinary activities

Group profit on ordinary activities after tax

Minority interest

Profit for year attributable to holding company

Dividends: paid

Tshs.000

–

Tshs.000

54,900

(28,000 )

26,900

(4,000 )

22,900

proposed


Statement of Group Retained Profits

10,000 (10,000 )

12,900


Balance at 1 January Retained for the year

Balance at 31 December

Workings

(a) Unrealised Profit

Tshs.000

53,000

12,900

65,900

Unrealised profit in inventory (Tshs.400,000 × 25%): Tshs.100,000

This is all allocated to the group in accordance with IAS 27:

(b) Trading Profit

R S Combined

Tshs.000 Tshs.000 Tshs.000

As stated 25,000 30,000 55,000

Unrealised profit – (100 ) (100 )

As restated

(c) Minority Interest

S Ltd Trading profit after tax

25% thereof

(d) Dividends

25,000 29,900

Tshs.000

16,000

4,000

54,900

Note that only the dividends proposed by the holding company are shown in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

(e) Retained Profit for Year

As individual P & L

R

Tshs.000

4,750

S Combined

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

6,000 10,750

Inter-company dividend (3,750 ) – (3,750 )

Dividends paid and proposed

Minority interest (as per workings (c))

–

1,000

–

1,000

10,000 10,000

16,000 17,000

(4,000 ) (4.000 )

12,000 13,000

Unrealised profit – (75 ) (75 )

(f) Balance Brought Forward

1,000 11,900 12,900


As stated

Minority interest 25%

Pre-acquisition profit (75% ×

Tshs.16m)

R

Tshs.000

35,000

–

35,000

–

35,000

S Combined

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

40,000 75,000

(10,000 ) (10,000 )

30,000 65,000

(12,000 ) (12,000 )

18,000 53,000

Note that as no information was given regarding the cost of R investment in S, goodwillcannot be ascertained and is ignored.

Example 2

X plc bought 60% of Z Ltd many years ago when the reserves of Z Ltd stood at Tshs.100,000. X plc also bought 20% of Z Ltd preference shares at the same date. The summarisedstatements of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December were as follows:

Gross profit

Expenses

Net profit

Investment income

Profit before tax

Taxation

Profit after tax

Dividends paid: Ordinary

Preference

Dividends proposed: Ordinary

Preference

Retained

Reserves b/f

Reserves c/f

X plc

Tshs.000

Tshs.000

2,000

(1,300 )

700

52

752

(210 )

542

100

10

120

10 (240 )

302

500

802

Z Ltd

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

500

(200 )

300

–

300

(90 )

210

20

10

60

10 (100 )

110

200

310

X plc sold goods to Z Ltd at invoice price Tshs.300,000 (invoiced at cost + 50%). Z Ltd has still tosell half of these goods at the year end.

Prepare a statement of comprehensive income for X plc and its subsidiary for the year ended 31 December.


Workings

(a) Unrealised profit in inventory:

50 × Tshs.300,000 × ½ Tshs.50,000 150

This is eliminated in full against the group results as the sale was from the holdingcompany to the subsidiary.

(b) Dividends received by X plc from Z Ltd: Tshs.000

Preference (20% × (Tshs.10,000 + Tshs.10,000)) Ordinary (60% × (Tshs.20,000 + Tshs.60,000))

(c) Minority interest:

4 48

52

Z Ltd profit after tax

less Preference dividend

Attributable to ordinary shareholders

(d) Reserves b/f:

Tshs.000

X plc 500

Z Ltd 60% × (200 – 100) 60

560

Answer

Tshs.000 210

(20 )

190

Tshs.000

Minority Share 80% 16

Minority Share 40% 76

Total 92

X plc and Subsidiary Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income for Year ended 31 Dec

Tshs.000

Gross profit (2,000 + 500 – 50)

Expenses (1,300 + 200)

Profit on ordinary activities before taxation

Taxation (210 + 90)

Profit on ordinary activities after taxation

Minority interest (as per working (c))

Dividends paid and proposed

Retained profit for the year

Reserves b/f (as per working (d))

Reserves c/f

2,450

(1,500 )

950

(300 )

650

(92 )

558

(240 )

318

560

878


C. GROUP ACCOUNTS – EXAMPLE

This example is aimed at consolidating your knowledge of group accounts acquired over thisand the previous chapter. You may wish to attempt it without looking at the answer – allow30 minutes to complete it.

On 1 January Year 1, H plc acquired an 80% ordinary shareholding in S Ltd for Tshs.600,000 when the balances on S Ltd share capital and reserves were Tshs.400,000 and Tshs.100,000 respectively. At the same date, H plc had acquired 25% of the ordinary shares in A Ltd andhad secured board representation with a view to long-term and significant involvement with A Ltd. The cost of the investment in A Ltd was Tshs.140,000 and the balances in A Ltd accounts forshare capital and reserves were Tshs.200,000 and Tshs.80,000 respectively.

The summarised financial statements of H plc, S Ltd and A Ltd at 31 December Year 3 areshown below and you are to prepare a consolidated statement of financial position at thatdate and a consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the year to 31 DecemberYear 3.

The non-current assets of S Ltd were considered to have a fair value of Tshs.1,200,000 at 1January Year 1 and this has not yet been incorporated in the financial statements.

Assume that the goodwill in the combination with S has been impaired by Tshs.6,000 as at 31December Year 3. The is no evidence of impairment in the fair value of the investment in A. There are no inter-company items needing adjustment.

Statements of Comprehensive Income

Pre-tax profit

Tax

Profit after tax

Dividends

Retained profit

H plc

Tshs.000

1,320

(400 )

920

(200 )

720

S Ltd

Tshs.000

260

(60 )

200

–

200

A Ltd

Tshs.000

180

(40 )

140

–

140

Statements of Financial Position

H plc S Ltd A Ltd

Non-current assets

Investment in: Subsidiary

Associate Net current assets

Tshs.000

2,000

600

140 660

3,400

Tshs.000

1,000

–

–240

1,240

Tshs.000

400

–

–200

600

Creditors: amounts falling due after more than 1 year (400 )

3,000

(40 )

1,200

(120 )

480

Share capital Reserves

800 2,200

3,000

400 800

1,200

200 280

480


Suggested approach:

(a) Calculate the goodwill for each acquisition and action the impairment if any

(b) Calculate minority interest in S Ltd

(c) Calculate investment in associate for A Ltd

(d) Calculate group reserves at 31 December Year 3

(e) Prepare accounts

Workings

(a) Goodwill calculations Tshs.000 Tshs.000

S Ltd: Purchase consideration

80% ordinary share capital

80% pre-acquisition reserves

80% revaluation reserve (fair value) (1,200 – 1,000) × 80%

Goodwill on acquisition

Impairment: Tshs.6,000

A Ltd: Purchase consideration 25% of ordinary share capital 25% pre-acquisition reserves

Goodwill on acquisition

(b) Minority interest in S LtdTshs.000

20% ordinary shares 80

20% reserves 160

20% revaluation 40

280

(c) Investment in associated company

Cost of investment

Group share of post-acquisition retained profits (25% × (280 – 80))

Equals: 25% of A Ltd net assets at 31.12. Year 3 (i.e. 480 × 25%)

plus Goodwill

600

320

80

160 (560 )

40

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

140

50 20 (70 )

70

Tshs.000

140

50

190

120 70

190


(d) Group reserves (using a "T" account)

Group Reserves

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

S Ltd pre-acquisition reserve

Minority interests

Impairment

Balance c/d

80 H Ltd

160 S Ltd

6 A Ltd (share)

2,804

3,050

2,200

800

50

3,050

Group Statement of Comprehensive Income for the Year ended 31 December Year 3

Tshs.000

Profit before tax (1,320 + 260 + (180 × 25%)) Taxation (400 + 60 + (40 × 25%))

Profit after tax

Impairment of goodwill

S Minority interest (20% × 200)

Profit after tax and minority interest

Dividend

Group retained profit for the year

1,625 (470 )

1,155

(6 )

(40 )

1,109

(200 )

909

Group Statement of Financial Position as at 31 December Year 3

Tshs.000

Non-current assets

Intangible (40 6)

Tangible (including revaluation) Investment in associated undertaking Net current assets

34

3,200

190

900

4,324

Creditors: amounts falling due after more than 1 year (440 )

3,884

Share capital

Reserves

Minority interest

800

2,804

280

3,884

Note that only the unimpaired goodwill in relation to S appears under intangibles.



5. Bold plc purchased 75% of the ordinary share capital of Surf Ltd several years agowhen Surf Ltd's retained earnings were Tshs.200,000. Bold plc has also owned 25% ofTide Ltd since 31 December Year 0. At that date Tide Ltd's reserves were Tshs.40,000.

The statements of comprehensive income for the three companies for the year ended31 December Year 7 were as follows:

Sales

Cost of sales

Gross profit

Expenses

Operating profit

Dividends receivable

Profit before tax

Taxation

Profit after tax

Dividends proposed


Retained profit b/f

Retained profit c/f

Bold plc

Tshs.000

1,000

(600 )

400

(200 )

200

60

260

(70 )

190

(100 )

90

1,200

1,290

Surf Ltd

Tshs.000

800

(450 )

350

(200 )

150

–

150

(48 )

102

(60 )

42

800

842

Tide Ltd

Tshs.000

500

(200 )

300

(100 )

200

–

200

(60 )

140

(60 )

80

400

480

Prepare a consolidated statement of comprehensive income and analysis of retained profits for the year ended 31 December Year 7 for the Bold group. Show also howthese profits would be reflected in reserve movements.


6. This final question for practice is taken from the December 2007 examination paper.

On 1 October 2005, Helman enterprise acquired 2 million of Sabine enterprises'ordinary shares paying Tshs.4.50 per share. At the date of acquisition, the retained earnings of Sabine were Tshs.4,200,000. The draft statements of financial position of thetwo enterprises as at 30 September 2007 were as follows:

Assets

Non-current assets

Property Plant and equipment

Investment in Sabine

Current assets

Inventory

Trade receivables

Cash

Total assets

Equity and liabilities

Equity

Ordinary shares Tshs.1

Retained earnings


10% loans

Current liabilities

Trade payables

Bank overdraft

Tax

Total equity and liabilities

Helman

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

11,000

10,225

9,000

30,225

4,925

5,710

495 11,130

41,355

5,000

25,920

30,920

6,000

3,200

–

1,235 4,435

41,355

Sabine

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

6,000

5,110

11,110

3,295

1,915

– 5,210

16,320

2,500

8,290

10,790

2,000

2,255

285

990 3,530

16,320

Extracts from the income statement of Sabine enterprise before inter-groupadjustments for the year ended 30 September 2007 are:

Tshs.000 Profit before tax Taxation

Profit after tax

2700 800

1900

The following information is also relevant:

(a) During the year, Sabine sold goods to Helman for Tshs.0.9 million. Sabine adds a20% mark-up on cost to all its sales. Goods with a transfer price of Tshs.240,000 were included in Helman's inventory as at 30 September 2007.


(b) The fair value of Sabine's land and plant and equipment at the date of acquisitionwas Tshs.1 million and Tshs.2 million respectively in excess of the carrying values. Sabine's statement of financial position has not taken account of these fairvalues. Group depreciation policy is land not depreciated, plant and equipmentdepreciated 10% per annum on fair value.

(c) An impairment review has been carried out on the consolidated goodwill as at 30September 2007 and it has been found that the goodwill has been impaired byTshs.400,000 during the year.

Required

Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position of the Helman group as at 30September 2007.




1. H plc Consolidated Statement of Financial Position as at 31 December Year 9

Tshs.000

Tangible non-current assets (1,000 + 1,400 + 200) (i.e. including revaluation) Net current assets (500 + 400)

Represented by:


Income statement

Minority interest

2,600

900

3,500

100

2,960

3,060

440

3,500

Note that "negative goodwill", in accordance with IFRS 3, is written off to retained profits.

Workings

Cost of Control

Investment in S Ltd

Negative goodwill (bal. fig.)

Tshs.000

700 Shares (80%)

20 Pre-acquisition profit and loss(80% × 600)

Revaluation (80% × 200)

720

Group Reserves

Tshs.000

Tshs.000

80

480

160

720

Tshs.000

Minority interest (20% × 1,650) 330 H plc

Pre-acquisition profit and loss 480 S Ltd

CSFP (balancing figure) 2,940

3,750

2,100

1,650

3,750


Minority Interest

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

CSFP (balancing figure) 440 Shares (20%)

Preference shares (100%)

Revaluation (20%)

Profit and loss (20%)

440

20

50

40

330

440

The figure for "profit and loss" included in the minority interest working at Tshs.330,000 represents 20% of the total Income statement of S Ltd. There is no distinction drawnbetween the pre- and post- acquisition profits as far as the minority interest isconcerned, whereas the cost of control account includes only the group share of the pre-acquisition profits. This is a common area for mistakes and you must be sure that you fully understand it. To clarify:

Tshs.000S Income statement

This has been disposed of as follows:

1,650

Taken to cost of control: 80% of pre-acquisition profit (80% × 600) 480

Taken to group profit and loss: 80% of post-acquisition profit i.e. 80% × (1,650 – 600) Taken to minority interest: (20% × 1,650)

840 330

1,650

2. H plc Consolidated Statement of Financial Position as at 31 December Year 9

Tshs.000

Intangible non-current asset: goodwill 42.75

Tangible non-current assets (800 + 900) 1,700.00 Net current assets (520 + 360 + 20)

Represented by:


Retained profits

Minority interest

900.00

2,642.75

100.00

2,252.75

2,352.75

290.00

2,642.75

Workings


Cost of Control

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

Investment

Goodwill is impaired by

Tshs.2,250.

Minority interest

420.00 Shares (75%)

Pre-acquisition reserves (75% × 300)

Goodwill

420.00

Group Reserves

Tshs.000

H plc

150.00

225.00

45.00

420.00

Tshs.000 1,760.00

(25% × 960)

Pre-acquisition reserves

240.00

225.00 S Ltd 960.00

Goodwill written off 2.25 CSFP (balancing figure) 2,252.75

2,720.00

Minority Interest

Tshs.000

2,720.00

Tshs.000

CSFP (balancing figure)

Notes

290.00 Shares (25%)

Reserves (25% × 960)

290.00

50.00

240.00

290.00

(a) The minority interest could also have been calculated by taking 25% of S Ltd's net assets, i.e. 25% × 1,160 290.

(b) The inter-company accounts cancel on consolidation and an adjustment ofTshs.20,000 is made to net current assets to include the cash in transit at year-end,which increases recorded group liquid assets.


3. X plc Consolidated Statement of Financial Position as at 31 December Year 9

Tshs.000

Tangible non-current assets (1,200 + 700) 1,900

Workings

Net current assets (260 + 350)

Debenture stock (50 – 10)

Represented by:


Share premium

Retained profits

Minority interest

Cost of Control

Tshs.000

610

(40 )

2,470

100

100

1,810

2,010

460

2,470

Tshs.000 Investment Negative goodwill

Cost of investment

250 Shares (60%) 2 Share premium (60% × 80)

Pre-acquisition reserves (60% × 240)

252

Cost of Debentures

Tshs.000

10.5 Nominal value of stock Premium on acquisition

10.5

Group Reserves

Tshs.000

60 48

144

252

Tshs.000

10.0 0.5

10.5

Tshs.000

Minority interest (40% × 720) 288.0 X plc 1,520.5

Pre-acquisition reserves Premium on acquisition of

debentures

CSFP (balancing figure)

144.0 Y Ltd

0.5

1,808.0

2,240.5

720.0

2,240.5


Minority Interest

CSFP

Tshs.000

460 Shares (40%)

Preference shares (100%)

Share premium (40%)

Reserves (40%)

460

Tshs.000

40

100

32

288

460

4.

Note that negative goodwill is written off to retained profits in accordance with IFRS 3.

Consolidated Statement of Financial Position as at 30 June Year 8

Tshs.000

Intangible asset (goodwill) 387.6

Plant & machinery 4,106.0

Inventory (1,120 + 480 – 10) 1,590.0 Debtors 1,560.0

Bank 250.0

Creditors (1,430.0 )

6,463.6

Represented by: Tshs.1 Ordinary shares 2,000.0

Reserves 3,839.6

5,839.6

Minority interest 624.0

6,463.6

Workings

(a) Plant & Machinery and Inventory Unrealised Profits

(i)

Hold plc Sub Ltd

less Profit on sale

plus Excess depreciation

Tshs.000

960

(60 )

6

Tshs.000

3,200

906

4,106

The excess depreciation is calculated as follows:

10% Depreciation on the asset transferred (cost Tshs.300,000) in Sub's books

Tshs.

30,000

10% Depreciation on the cost of the asset to the group 24,000

Thus increase in group reserves 6,000


(ii) Stock from Sub in Hold's books:

Unrealised profit element (mark-up 50%) allocated to group reserves:

(b) Goodwill

Tshs.30,000

Tshs.10,000

This calculation is merely the normal cost of control a/c done using a memorandum format:

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

Investment in Sub Ltd

Shares (60% × 200) Pre-acquisition reserves (60% × 1,040)

Goodwill

Annual amortisation over 20 years:

Tshs.22,800

(c) Minority Interest

Tshs.000

40% ordinary shares in Sub 80 40% Sub profit and loss 544

624

(d) Consolidated reserves

1,200

120 624 744

456

Again, done using a memorandum format instead of a "T" account:

Hold Unrealised profit in machinery cost

Sub

Unrealised profit in stock Excess depreciation

Pre-acquisition profits 60% × 1,040

Minority interest 40% × 1,360

Group share of Sub post-acquisition profits

less Goodwill (3 years at Tshs.22,800 pa)

Balance to Consolidated statement offinancial position

Tshs.000

1,360.0 (10.0 )

6.0

1,356.0

(624.0 )

(544.0 )

Tshs.000

3,780.0 (60.0 )

188.0

3,908.0

68.4

3,839.6


5. Tide is treated as an associated company and is consolidated using the equity method.

Bold plc Group Consolidated Statement of comprehensive income for the Year ended 31

December Year 7

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

Sales (1,000 + 800)

Cost of sales (600 + 450)

Gross profit

Expenses (200 + 200)

Share of associated company profit before tax (200 × 25%)

Taxation: Group (70 + 48)

Associate (25% × 60)

Profit after tax

Minority interest (25% × 102)

Profit after tax attributable to the group

Dividend


1,800.0

1,050.0

750.0

400.0

350.0

50.0

400.0

118.0

15.0 133.0

267.0

25.5

241.5

100.0

141.5


6. Note that the marks allocated within the answer are also shown here.

Helman Group Consolidated Statement of Financial Position as at 30 September 2007

Tshs.000

Assets

Non-current assets

Land and property (11,000 + 6,000 + 1,000) 18,000

Marks

2

Plant and equipment (see workings)

Intangible assets (see workings)

Current assets

Inventory (see workings)

Trade receivables (5,710 + 1,915) 8,180 7,625

16,935 840

35,775

3

4

2

½

Cash

Total assets

Equity and liabilities

Equity

Ordinary share capital

Retained earnings (see workings)

Minority interest (see workings)

Total equity


10% loans (6,000 + 2,000) Current liabilities

Trade payables (3,200 + 2,255)

Bank overdraft

495 16,300

52,075

5,000

28,440

2,670

36,110

8,000

5,455

285

½

1

5

3

½

½

½

Tax (1,235 + 990)

Total equity and liabilities

2,225 7,965

52,075

½

Workings

Plant and equipment: 10,225 + 5,110 + 2,000 – 400 (depreciation)

Intangible assets: 1,240 (goodwill) – 400 (impairment)

Inventory: 4,925 + 3,295 – 40 (unrealised profit)

Retained earnings:

Presentation 2

25,920 + 80%(8,290 – 4,200 (preacq) – 400 (dep) –40 (urp)) – 400 (impairment)

Minority interest: 20%(10,790 – 400 – 40 + 3,000 (revaluation))

Calculation of goodwill:

Paid: 2m x Tshs.4.50 Bought:

2m Tshs.1 shares

80% revaluation of assets Tshs.3m


Tshs.000 Tshs.000

9,000

2,000

2,400

80% retained earnings at date of acquisition Tshs.4.2m

Goodwill

3,360 (7,760 )

1,240

Chapter 12

Financial Accounting Examination –The Compulsory Question

Contents

A. The Financial Accounting Examination

B. December 2007 Compulsory Question

Technique for Answering the Question Answer

C. Specimen Examination Compulsory Question

Answer

287

Page

288

289

290292

294

296

288 Financial Accounting Examination – The Compulsory Question

A. THE FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING EXAMINATION

The financial accounting examination requires you to answer a compulsory question insection A and you have a choice of three questions from seven in section B. All questions carry equal marks – 25 marks – but it is imperative that you make a good attempt at thecompulsory question. This compulsory question will always require you to prepare financial statements for a business, starting from balances in the books/ledgers of the business and taking account of further additional information. You may, for example, be asked to prepare astatement of financial position or a statement of comprehensive income, or a statement ofchanges in equity, or indeed any combination of the three.

The style of these financial statements was given to you in chapter 3 and we advise you to study these carefully as marks will be awarded in the question for presentation style. The additional information you will be given in the question will require you to make adjustmentsto the balances in the business books in accordance with IASs that we have covered in thisstudy manual.

This chapter provides detailed guidance on tackling the compulsory question. We set outhere the compulsory questions, together with their answers, from both the December 2007 examination and the specimen paper for this Unit. Also included, in respect of the December2007 question, is the marking scheme which give you a guide to what the examiners arelooking for when assessing your answer.

(Note that we have used the latest accounting terminology in these questions – substitutingstatement of comprehensive income for income statement/profit and loss account, andstatement of financial position for balance sheet – so they differ in these respects from the original question papers.)

Financial Accounting Examination – The Compulsory Question 289

B. DECEMBER 2007 COMPULSORY QUESTION

The trial balance of Mullion enterprise for the year ended 30 September 2007 is as follows:

Debits Credits

Purchases

Revenue

Trade receivables (debtors)

Trade payables (creditors)

Distribution costs

Administration costs Inventory 1 October 2006

Bank interest

Bank overdraft

Wages and salaries – administration

Provision for bad debts Bad debts written off

Property at cost

Plant and equipment at cost

Vehicles at cost

Property accumulated depreciation as at 1 October 2006 Plant and equipment accumulated depreciation as at 1October 2006

Vehicles accumulated depreciation as at 1 October 2006

Retained earnings as at 1 October 2006 Ordinary share capital Tshs.1 shares

Other reserves

Long term loans 6% redeemable 2012

Bank

Tshs.000

5,200

1,180

920

1,650 1,620

5

420

5

3,100

2,200

900

350

Tshs.000

12,363

550

220

52

750

520

230

415 700

250

1500

The following information is also available:

17,550 17,550

1. The inventory (stock) as at 30 September 2007 has been valued at Tshs.1,570,000.

2. As at 30 September 2007, rent owing is Tshs.90,000 and Tshs.25,000 had been paid inadvance for insurance. Both these expenses are chargeable 60% to distribution and40% to administration.

3. The interest on the long-term loan needs accruing for the year.

4. Tax is to be provided at 20% of profit after charging all expenses and interest.

5. Depreciation is to be provided for the year at the following rates:

(i) Property: 2% on cost, chargeable 50% distribution and 50% administration

(ii) Plant and equipment: 10% on cost, chargeable 60% distribution and 40%administration


(iii) Vehicles: 20% reducing balance, all chargeable to distribution.

6. Provision for doubtful debts is to be set at 5% of trade receivables as at 30 September2007.

7. Administration costs include Tshs.350,000 in relation to spending on research anddevelopment in connection with a new product. The product is set to go on sale on 1 January 2008 and revenue from the product is expected to cover all costs ofproduction.

Required

Prepare the statement of comprehensive income (income statement) for the year ended 30September 2007 and the statement of financial position as at that date for Mullion inaccordance with IASs.

Total 25 marks

Technique for Answering the Question

The best approach in answering questions of this kind is to set up, at the outset, a template for the financial statements you are asked to prepare. In this case, that would be anstatement of comprehensive income and a statement of financial position. You can then startto slot figures into them as you work through the information provided.

The next step is to deal with the additional information. We shall take you through thiscarefully.

Note 1

This gives us the closing inventory figure and from this, plus the purchases figure andthe opening inventory (inventory 1 October 2006) from the trial balance, we cancalculate the cost of sales to match against the revenue to commence the statement ofcomprehensive income. Note also that this closing inventory figure will need to appearunder current assets on the statement of financial position.

Note 2

This refers to accruals and prepayments, and we are also told where we should chargethese in the statement of comprehensive income.

The rent owing of Tshs.90,000 needs to be accrued and charged 60% (that isTshs.54,000) to distribution expenses, shown in the trial balance as Tshs.920,000, and40% (that is Tshs.36,000) to administration expenses, currently in the trial balance atTshs.1,650,000. This accrual of Tshs.90,000 will also appear in the statement of financial position under current liabilities.

The insurance is a prepayment and therefore 60% of Tshs.25,000 (Tshs.15,000) needs tobe deducted from distribution expenses and 40% (Tshs.10,000) from administrationexpenses. This prepayment of Tshs.25,000 will also be included on the statement offinancial position under current assets.

Note 3

Here we need to accrue the interest on the long term loan due for the accountingperiod. The long term loans carry an interest rate of 6% on a nominal value ofTshs.1,500,000, so that is an annual interest payment of Tshs.90,000. This will be shown onthe statement of comprehensive income under finance/interest costs. Again theaccrual for the interest will need to be included on the statement of financial positionunder current liabilities.

Note 4


We cannot calculate the tax figure at this stage – rather, we will need to wait until wehave completed the statement of comprehensive income to the point "net profit before tax". However, don't forget to enter it in the statement of comprehensive income whenyou do calculate it, and also to accrue it under current liabilities on the statement offinancial position.

Note 5

IAS 16 requires us to depreciate all non-current tangible assets and also test them forimpairment (see chapter 5). In this example, we are not made aware of anyimpairment, but we are given the depreciation rates to apply. So, calculate these beingcareful to apply the correct methods as specified in the question – i.e. straight linedepreciation for property and plant and equipment, applied to the cost figure, andreducing balance depreciation for vehicles, to the net book value.

You can see the calculations for depreciation in the answer after the statement offinancial position.

Ensure that you allocate the charge for depreciation in accordance with the question to distribution and administration expenses, and don't forget that these charges for depreciation will also need to be added to the current provision in the trial balancewhen you prepare the statement of financial position.

Note 6

IAS 37 requires us to provide for provisions when it is probable they will occur andwhen we can make a reliable estimate (see chapter 6). Bad debts occur in almost allbusinesses and we can generally estimate the provision required from previous years'data.

In this example, we are told the provision needs to be carried at 5% of tradereceivables as at 30 September 2007. Trade receivables are shown as Tshs.1,180,000 in the trial balance, so the provision needed is Tshs.59,000 – BUT there is already a provisionin the trial balance for Tshs.52,000, so we only need to provide the increase in this year's statement of comprehensive income – i.e. Tshs.7,000.

In addition, remember that the provision for doubtful debts needs to be deducted fromtrade receivables to arrive at the statement of financial position figure for tradereceivables. This will be Tshs.59,000 – our new provision.

Note 7

Research and development costs are dealt with in IAS 38 (see chapter 6).

Where we can match the costs of development with future income, then we are permitted to capitalise the development costs as an intangible asset. Remember tocheck that this expenditure is likely to meet the criteria laid down in IAS 38 forcapitalisation. In this case, as the product is set to go on sale on 1 January 2008, we can assume the criteria are met. So, you need to deduct the costs of Tshs.350,000 fromadministration expenses that appear on the statement of comprehensive income andshow them as an intangible asset under non-current assets on the statement offinancial position.

At this point you should have several figures slotted into the templates. All that remains to dois to transfer the rest of the items from the trial balance to the correct place in the templates of the statement of comprehensive income and statement of financial position. For example,bank interest (Tshs.5,000) should be transferred to finance/interest costs on the statement ofcomprehensive income, and ordinary share capital (Tshs.700,000) is transferred to ordinaryshare capital under equity on the statement of financial position.


(A good technique, by the way, is to tick every note and every item on the trial balance as youdeal with it or transfer it. This way you will not miss anything.)

Finally, calculate the sub-totals in the statement of comprehensive income and calculate thetax figure as per Note 4 (and remember to show this in the statement of financial position),and then transfer the final profit after tax figure (Tshs.3,108,000) as an addition to retainedearnings on the statement of financial position. Calculate sub-totals in the statement offinancial position and ensure net assets equals total equity.

The full answer is given below.

Marking

If you look at the marking scheme on the answer, you will see that if you had just dealt withthe notes (excluding the tax) within the question and placed those amounts on the relevanttemplate, you would have scored 17 marks!!! 2 marks are awarded for presentation, so youneed to remember the formats and where to place sub-totals and totals. 1½ marks are available for calculating the correct tax figure and entering it in the statements, and ½ markfor the final figure of retained earnings. Only 4 marks are available for correctly transferringunadjusted items from the trial balance to the relevant statement.

Answer

Mullion Statement of Comprehensive Income for the year ended 30 September 2007

Revenue Opening inventory

Purchases

Closing inventory

Gross profit

Distribution costs (920 TB + 54 rent – 15 insurance + 31 + 132 + 134 depreciation) Administration costs (1,650 TB + 36 rent – 10 insurance + 31 + 88 depreciation – 350 R&D + 420 wages)

Provision for doubtful debts (59 – 52)

Bad debts written off

Finance costs: – bank interest

Tshs.000s Tshs.000s

12,363

1,620

5,200

6,820

1,570 (5,250 )

7,113

1,256

1,865

7

5

5

marks

½

½

½

½

½

3

3½

½

½

½

– loan interest

Net profit before tax

Tax

Profit after tax

90 95 (3,228 )

3,885

(777 )

3,108

1

1

Total marks: 12½


Mullion Statement of Financial Position as at 30 September 2007

Assets and liabilities

Tshs.000 Tshs.000

Tshs.000

Marks

Non-current assets Cost Dep'n nbv

Property

Plant and equipment

3,100

2,200

(812 ) 2,288

(740 ) 1,460

1

1

Vehicles 900 (364 ) 536 1

Intangible assets – research and development

Current assets

Inventories Trade receivables (1,180 – 59 provision)

Insurance

Bank

Current liabilities

6,200 (1,916 ) 4,284

350

4,634

1,570

1121

25

350 3,066

1

½

½

½

½

Trade and other payables (550 + 90 rent + 90 interest)

Tax

Bank overdraft

Total net current assets


Long terms loans 6% (redeemable 2012)

Total net assets

Equity

Share capital

Other reserves

Retained earnings (415 + 3,108)

(730 )

(777 )

(220 ) (1,727 )

1,339

(1,500 )

4,473

700

250

3,523

4,473

1½

½

½

½

½

½

½

Calculations

Total marks: 10½

Additional marks for presentation: 2

Depreciation

Property: Amount

2% x 3,100 62

Allocation

31 Distribution : 31 Administration

Plant and equipment: 10% x 2200 220 132 Distribution : 88 Administration

Vehicles:

Provisions

20% x (900 – 230) 134 134 Distribution

Provision for bad debts: 5% x 1,180 59


C. SPECIMEN EXAMINATION COMPULSORY QUESTION

For this question, we have not included the marking scheme or a detailed work through of the question. We suggest you attempt this question using the technique as we have describedin section B.

You should also note that the format of the statement of financial position in the answer is alittle different to that we used in the answer to the question from the December 2007examination. This is an alternative presentation provided in the guidance notes to IAS 1 andeither template would be acceptable. We find the template used in the answer to December 2007 a little clearer as it shows the net assets figure, but both templates would gainpresentation marks.

J. P. Matthew plc are wholesalers. The following is their trial balance as at 31 December2006.

Ordinary Share Capital: Tshs.l shares

Share Premium General Reserve

Retained Profits as at 31/12/2005

Stock: 31/12/2005

Sales

Purchases Returns Outwards

Returns Inwards

Carriage Inwards

Carriage Outwards

Warehouse Wages Salesmen's Salaries

Administrative Wages and Salaries

Plant and Machinery

Hire of Motor Vehicles

Provision for Depreciation – Plant and Machineryaccumulated depreciation as at 1/1/06 Goodwill

General Distribution Expenses

General Administrative Expenses

Directors' Remuneration

Rents Receivable Trade receivables

Cash at Bank

Trade payables

Tshs.

Dr

33,235

250,270

13,810

570

4,260

50,380

32,145

29,900

62,500

9,600

47,300

2,840

4,890

14,800

164,150

30,870

Tshs.

Cr

150,000

10,000 8,000

27,300

481,370

12,460

24,500

3,600

34,290

You are given the following information:

751,520 751,520


(1) Closing stock at 31/12/06 has been valued at Tshs.45,890.

(2) Plant and machinery is to be depreciated at 20% straight line; 60% relates todistributive expenses, 40% relates to administrative expenses.

(3) Motor vehicle hire is to be split Tshs.6,200 to distribution and Tshs.3,400 to administrativeexpenses.

(4) Audit fees of Tshs.600 need to be accrued for the year ending 31/12/06.

(5) A Corporation Tax provision of Tshs.29,100 is needed.

(6) A final dividend of 36p per share approved by the directors has not yet been accountedfor.

(7) An impairment review is undertaken in respect of the goodwill and its value is found tohave been impaired by Tshs.5,000.

Required

A trading account and statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December2006 and a statement of financial position as at 31 December 2006.

Show all your workings.

(25 marks)


Answer

JP Matthews plc Trading Account and Statement of Comprehensive Income

for the year ended 31 December 2006.

Tshs. Tshs. Tshs. Sales Returns Inwards

Cost of Sales

Opening Stock

add: Purchases

less: Purchases Returns

Carriage Inwards

33,235 250,270

(12,460 )

570

271,615

481,370 (13,810 )

467,560

less: Closing Stock

Gross Profit

Other Income – Rent Received

Distribution Expenses

Carriage Outwards

Warehouse Wages Salesmen's Salaries

Plant and Machinery Depreciation

Motor Vehicle Hire

4,260

50,380 32,145

7,500

6,200

(45,890 ) (225,725 )

241,835

3,600

245,435

General Expenses

Administrative Expenses

Wages and Salaries

Motor Vehicle Hire General Expenses

Directors' Remuneration

Plant and Machinery Depreciation

Audit Fee

Goodwill impairment

less: Taxation

less: Ordinary Dividend

Retained Profit for the Year

2,840 103,325

29,900

3,400 4,890

14,800

5,000

600 58,590 (161,915 )

83,520

(5,000 )

78,520

(29,100 )

49,420

(54,000 )

(4,580 )


JP Matthews plc Statement of Financial Position as at 31 December 2006.

Tshs.

NON-CURRENT ASSETS

Tangible

Intangible

CURRENT ASSETS

Stock

Trade receivables

45,890

164,150

25,500

42,300

67,800

Cash at Bank

CREDITORS

Due within 1 year

Trade payables

Dividends Tax

Audit fee

CAPITAL AND RESERVES

Paid Up Share Capital:

150,000 Tshs.1 Ordinary Shares RESERVES


General Reserve

Retained Profits

30,870 240,910

34,290

54,000 29,100

600 (117,990 )

122,920

190,720

150,000

10,000

8,000

22,720 40,720

190,720

Abe Manual

Documents

Transcript of Abe Manual